16 vues

Transféré par anjaiah_19945

marc manual

- Shot Peening
- Performance Log
- Modeling Fracture in Abaqus (2)
- mechanicsofmetalcutting-120102095453-phpapp01
- Catalogo Acerbis 2017.pdf
- 2 NDT Tests Steel
- John Monte Snyder - Universal and Practical Processes
- 0319 Pavimentos Clase 04 KenLayer Conti01 y Conti02
- Solubility Data
- NDT ppt.pptx
- Exhaust Line to Evapourator-report-r0
- copiarinaldi
- Solid Works Sheet Metal
- 9783319006536-c2
- Classical Mechanics Oscillations and Waves
- Microstructural study of nanocrystalline pure and doped tin dioxide to be used for resistive gas sensors
- BYK-P9920
- 2.Bending and Axial Load(Tan K H_ NUS)
- BA exam
- Catalogo Ndti 2017

Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 1861

Corporate

MSC.Software Corporation

2 MacArthur Place

Santa Ana, CA 92707

Telephone: (800) 345-2078

FAX: (714) 784-4056

Europe

MSC.Software GmbH

Am Moosfeld 13

81829 Munich

GERMANY

Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0

Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6

Asia Pacific

MSC.Software Japan Ltd.

Shinjuku First West 8F

23-7 Nishi Shinjuku

1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku

Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN

Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200

Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201

Worldwide Web

www.mscsoftware.com

User Documentation: Copyright 2010 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.

This document, and the software described in it, are furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the

terms of such license. Any reproduction or distribution of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written authorization of

MSC.Software Corporation is strictly prohibited.

MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document

without prior notice. The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this document are for illustrative and educational purposes

only and are not intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. THIS DOCUMENT IS

PROVIDED ON AN AS-IS BASIS AND ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE

DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.

MSC.Software logo, MSC, MSC., MD Nastran, Adams, Dytran, Marc, Mentat, and Patran are trademarks or registered trademarks of

MSC.Software Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.

NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. Python is a trademark of the Python Software Foundation. LS-DYNA is a trademark of

Livermore Software Technology Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC.Software suppliers.

METIS is copyrighted by the regents of the University of Minnesota. HP MPI is developed by Hewlett-Packard Development Company,

L.P. MS MPI is developed by Microsoft Corporation. PCGLSS 6.0, copyright 1992-2005 Computational Applications and System

Integration Inc. MPICH Copyright 1993, University of Chicago and Mississippi State University. MPICH2 copyright 2002, University

of Chicago.

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer

Software) and DFARS 227.7202 (Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation),

as applicable.

MA*V2010*Z*Z*Z*DC-VOL-C

Contents

Marc Volume C: Program Input

Contents

Preface

About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

25

25

Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

Introduction

Formats in Marc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fixed Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Free Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28

28

28

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

31

31

Typical Marc Problem Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Marc Input for New Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38

39

40

49

Parameters List

Parameters

TITLE Output Title Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ALLOCATE Initial Workspace Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SIZING Working Space Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREALLOC Initial Workspace Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELEMENTS Element Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

68

69

70

71

72

73

FEATURE Specification of the Behavior of a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PROCESSOR Parallelization Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UNIT Invoke Unit System Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$NO LIST No Listing of Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EXTENDED Extended Precision of Reading in Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

END End of Parameter Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analysis Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELASTIC Elastic Analysis with Multi-loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DESIGN SENSITIVITY Perform Sensitivity Analysis Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DESIGN OPTIMIZATION Perform Design Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ADAPTIVE Adaptive Mesh Refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LINEAR Matrices Saved for Linear Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FOURIER Arbitrary Loading of Axisymmetric Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DYNAMIC Dynamic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HARMONIC Frequency Response Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SS-ROLLING Steady State Transport Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RESPONSE Spectrum Response Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

R-P FLOW Rigid-Plastic Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPFLOW Superplastic Forming Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LARGE DISP Large Displacement or Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LARGE STRAIN Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UPDATE Updated Lagrange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FINITE Finite Strain Plasticity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONSTANT DILATATION Define That Elements Are to Use Constant Dilatation Formulation.

ASSUMED STRAIN Improved Bending Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELASTICITY Elasticity Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PLASTICITY Plasticity Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FOLLOW FOR Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current Geometry

Application of Total Boundary Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BUCKLE Buckling Load Estimation via Eigenvalue Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CREEP Creep Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VISCO ELAS Visco Elastic Analysis (Kelvin Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STRUCTURAL Mechanical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COUPLE Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DECOUPLING Set Control for Contact Decoupling Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FLUID Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PORE Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T-T-T Time-Temperature-Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HEAT Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

JOULE Joule Heating (Coupled Thermo-Electrical) Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIFFUSION Diffusion Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ABLATION Specify Ablation Occurrence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PYROLYSIS Indicates Thermo-poro-ablative Model Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

74

75

77

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

89

90

91

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

120

121

122

124

125

126

127

Contents 5

BEARING Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELECTRO Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAGNETO Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EL-MA Perform Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PIEZO Activate Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACOUSTIC Acoustic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RADIATION Radiation Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CAVITY Volume-dependant Pressure Load for Cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RBE Rigid Body Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MACHINING NC Machining (Metal Cutting) Process Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

138

139

140

REZONING Allow Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MNF MD ADAMS Modal Neutral File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SUPER Super Element Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USER Create User-defined Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

141

142

143

144

145

CENTROID State Storage at Centroid Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ALL POINTS State Storage at All Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOAD COR Residual Load Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO LOADCOR Suppression of Load Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SCALE Scaling to First Yield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THERMAL Thermal Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISTRESS Define Initial Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LUMP Lumped Mass or Specific-Heat Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPBC Application of Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACCUMULATE Accumulation of Strain and Displacements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ALIAS Define Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

NEW Use New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE Indicate How Tables are to be used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COMMENT Define Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT Debug Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STOP Exit following Workspace Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NOTES Print Notes and Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INPUT TAPE Specify Device for Model Definition Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELSTO Out-of-Core Storage of Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OOC Out-of-core Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IBOOC Out-of-core Storage of Incremental Backup Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO ECHO Suppress Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INCLUDE Insert File into the Input File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

159

160

161

162

163

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

STATE VARS Define Number of State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST LOADS Distributed Loads or Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FLUXES Distributed Fluxes or Point Fluxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FILMS Film Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RESTRICTOR Restrictor Input in Lubrication Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WELDING Welding Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BOUNDARY CONDITIONS Specify Maximum Number of Boundary Conditions to be Defined

SHELL SECT Define Number of Layer Through Shell Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TSHEAR Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TIE

Define Tying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MPC-CHECK Multi-point Constraint Checking Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUTOMSET Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUTOSPC Automatically Apply Constraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IO-DEACTIVATE Deactivate Element if it goes Inside-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

188

189

BEAM SECT Beam Section Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

190

191

MESH2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Two-dimensional Mesh Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MESH2D Define a Two-dimensional Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BLOCKS Define Working Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DEFINE (Mesh2D Block Type) Define Block Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MANY TYPES Define Multiple Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

START NUMBER Specify Starting Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BOUNDARY Define Boundary Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPECIFIED NODES Specify Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAPPER Invoke User Subroutine MAP2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONSTRAINT Generate Boundary Condition Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MERGE Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MERGE SELECTIVE Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes by Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONNECT Connect or Disconnect Mesh Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRTCONNECT Print Out Block Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SYMMETRY Define Axis of Symmetry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GENERATE End of Mesh Generation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

Mesh Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NEW Use New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DEFINE (Sets) Define Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

230

231

232

Contents 7

CONN FILL Specify Element Connectivity Interpolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONN GENER Copy Element Connectivity Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UFCONN Invoke the UFCONN User Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COORDINATES Enter Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INCLUDE Insert File into the Input File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FXORD Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NODE CIRCLE Generate Coordinates for Circular Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NODE FILL Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NODE GENER Generate Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NODE MERGE Merge Duplicate Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UFXORD Invoke the UFXORD User Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CYLINDRICAL Define Cylindrical Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WRITE Write Connectivity and Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ADAPTIVE Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ADAPT GLOBAL Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINTS Define Geometric Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CURVES Define Geometric Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SURFACES Define Geometrical Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STRING Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATTACH NODE Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATTACH EDGE Define the Element Edges which are attached to Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATTACH FACE Define the Element Faces which are attached to Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GEOMETRY Specify Geometrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NODAL THICKNESS Define Nodal Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACTUATOR Define the Length of the Actuator Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TRANSFORMATION Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COORD SYSTEM Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

SHELL TRANSFORMATION Define Shell Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UTRANFORM Invoke User Subroutine UTRANS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CYCLIC SYMMETRY Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TYING Define Tying Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SERVO LINK Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RBE2 Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RBE3 Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RROD Rigid 2-node Constraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PIN CODE Define Pin Code for Beam Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INSERT Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPRINGS Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PBUSH Input Data for Cbush Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CFAST Shell Patch Fastener Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PFAST CFAST Fastener Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CWELD Weld or Fastener Element Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PWELD Connector Element Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235

237

238

240

241

243

244

247

248

249

250

251

252

254

255

263

274

275

280

286

288

290

291

292

296

297

298

301

308

309

310

313

321

323

325

328

329

330

332

336

344

347

349

357

SUPERELEM Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .

SUPERELEM (DMIG Applications) Create DMIG of Substructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DMIG-OUT Output Control of Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BSQUEAL Specify Data for Output of Matrices used in Brake Squeal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .

MPCOUT Output Control of Tying Matrices (MPC Entries) for all Glued Contacts . . . . . . . . . .

DMIG Direct Matrix Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

K2GG, K2PP Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M2GG, M2PP Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B2GG, B2PP Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P2G Selects Direction Input Load Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BACKTOSUBS Recover Substructure Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MNF UNITS MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STIFSCALE Define Stiffness Scaling Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COEFFICIENT Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DEACTIVATE Deactivate Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ERROR ESTIMATE Create Error Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USDATA Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

359

365

367

370

375

377

378

381

382

383

384

385

386

388

389

392

393

394

Program Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CASE COMBIN Combine Load Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SOLVER Specify Direct or Iterative Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OPTIMIZE Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POST Create File for Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOADCASE Define Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TRACK Enter a List of Points to be Tracked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FLOW LINE Define a Flow Line Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IRM

Intergraph Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SDRC SDRC I-DEAS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HYPERMESH HyperMesh Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT CHOICE Specify Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT ELEMENT Specify Elements to be Included in Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT NODE Specify Nodes to be Included in Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO PRINT Suppress Elements and Nodes in Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT SPRING Controls the Print Out of Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO PRINT SPRING Deactivates the Printing of All Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT CONTACT Prints the Contact Body Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO PRINT CONTACT Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GRID FORCE Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT VMASS Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REAUTO Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RESTART Set Flags for Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RESTART LAST Use Condensed Restart File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UDUMP Specify Nodes and Element for Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SUMMARY Create Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

395

396

398

402

404

423

426

427

429

435

438

440

442

445

447

448

449

450

451

452

454

455

457

460

462

463

Contents 9

ELEMENT SORT Sort Element Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO ELEM SORT Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NODE SORT Sort Nodal Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO NODE SORT Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DESIGN OBJECTIVE Define Objective Function to be Optimized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DESIGN VARIABLES Define Variable Design Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Displacement Response . . . . . .

DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Stress Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Strain Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS Define Limits on Eigenfrequency Response . . . . . . .

464

465

467

468

470

471

472

474

476

478

480

Mechanical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL (Mechanical) Control Option for Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PARAMETERS Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MATUDS Provide Additional Data for Material User Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONUDS Provide Additional Data for Contact User Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED DISP (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) Define Fixed Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED DISP (Mechanical) Define Fixed Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input) Define Distributed Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST LOADS Define Distributed Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FACE IDS Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films,

and Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input) Define Nodal Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT LOAD Define Nodal Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HOLD NODES (with TABLE Input) Neglect Incremental Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HOLD NODES Neglect Incremental Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INERTIA RELIEF Define Inertia Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ROTATION A Define Rotational Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CORNERING AXIS Define Cornering Axis in Steady State Rolling Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FLUID DRAG Define Fluid Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CAVITY Define Constants and Reference Values for Structures with Internal Cavities . . . . . . .

PRE STATE Transfer History Data from Previous Analysis to the Current Analysis as

the Initial State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AXITO3D Transfer Data from Axisymmetric Analysis to 3-D Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLK Generation of Global Local File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLOBALLOCAL Structural Zooming Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INIT STRESS (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Stress. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INIT STRESS Define Initial Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Strain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL PLASTIC STRAIN Define Initial Plastic Strain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL STATE (with TABLE Input) Initialize State Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL STATE Initialize State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHANGE STATE (with TABLE Input) Redefine State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

481

482

489

493

494

495

499

501

506

511

516

520

523

525

526

528

529

530

532

533

537

541

542

546

548

552

554

556

559

562

INITIAL FICTIVE (with TABLE Input) Initialize Fictive Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL FICTIVE Initialize State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAP TEMP Map Temperatures from Different Meshes to Current Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THERMAL LOADS Input Temperature Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress) Define Initial Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL TEMP (Thermal Stress) Define Initial Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT TEMP (with TABLE Input) Define Point Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT TEMP Define Point Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FORCDT Input Displacement or Load Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FOUNDATION (with TABLE Input) Input Elastic Foundation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FOUNDATION Input Elastic Foundation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FOURIER Describe Fourier Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J-INTEGRAL Define Path for J-Integral Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LORENZI Define Path for Modified J-Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VCCT Virtual Crack Closure Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DELAMINATION Determines When to Split Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISLAND REMOVAL Deactivate Islands of Connected Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

566

570

572

574

576

578

580

582

584

586

587

590

591

593

594

597

601

603

Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deformable and Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motion of Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control Variables and Option Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contact/Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Heat Transfer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Electrical Data (Joule Heating Analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Time Step Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dynamic Contact - Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Two-dimensional Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three-dimensional Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selective Contact Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contact with Adaptive Meshing or Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Spring-Back Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contact Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Corner Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Segment-to-segment Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTACT (2-D) Define 2-D Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTACT with TABLES (3-D) Define 3-D Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTACT (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTACT TABLE with TABLES Define Contact Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

604

604

604

605

605

606

606

607

608

608

608

608

612

623

623

625

625

625

626

627

629

632

646

659

678

694

Contents 11

SPLINE Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UMOTION Invoke User Subroutine to Prescribe Surface Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UFRICTION Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface Friction Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UHTCOEF Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface/Environment Thermal Behavior. . . . . . .

UHTCON Invoke User Subroutine to Define Surface to Surface Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTACT NODE Define Nodes for Surface Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DEACT GLUE Define Deact Glue for Nodes in Glued Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EXCLUDE Ignore Contact with Certain Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WEAR Input of Wear Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

703

710

714

715

716

717

718

719

720

721

Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A. Elastic Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B. Elastic-Plastic Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C. Temperature Dependent Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D. Relative Density Dependent Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E. Low Tension Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F. Soil Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G. Material Dependent Failure Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H. Characterization of Gap Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I. Laminated Composite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J. Material Preferred Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

K. Material Property (Element) Coordinate Systems in Marc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Stress) Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (Stress) Define Mechanical Data for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) Define Mechanical Data for

Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical) Define Mechanical Data for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . .

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Mechanical) Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis.

ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical) Stress or Coupled-Thermal Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HYPOELASTIC (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HYPOELASTIC Define Data for Hypoelastic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MOONEY (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MOONEY Define Data for Mooney-Rivlin Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ARRUDBOYCE (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ARRUDBOYCE Define Data for Arruda-Boyce Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GENT (with TABLE Input) Define Data for the Gent Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GENT Define Data for the Gent Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OGDEN (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based Material Model

OGDEN Define Data for Ogden or Principal Stretch Based Material Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NLELAST Simplified Nonlinear Elastic Models Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FOAM (with TABLE Input) Define Data for Foam Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FOAM Define Data for Foam Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GASKET Define Material Data for Gasket Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

723

723

726

728

728

728

728

728

729

729

729

729

737

745

751

757

761

768

772

774

776

782

786

790

793

797

800

804

807

813

817

820

STRAIN RATE (Material Properties) Define Strain Rate Dependent Yield Stress . . . . . . . . . . .

FORMING LIMIT Forming Limit Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WORK HARD Define Workhardening Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Stress) Define Effects of Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Thermal-Stress) Temperature Effects in Coupled

Thermal-Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHO TEMP (Structural) Define Temperature Effects for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . .

TIME-TEMP Define Effects of Time/Temperature Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SHAPE MEMORY (with TABLE Input) Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model . . . . . .

SHAPE MEMORY Define the Properties of Shape Memory Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CRACK DATA (with TABLE Input) Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking. . . . . . . .

CRACK DATA Define Material Properties for Concrete Cracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FAIL DATA (with TABLE Input) Define Failure Criteria Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FAIL DATA Define Failure Criteria Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MATERIAL DATA Define Additional Material Data Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GRAIN SIZE Define Grain Size Growth Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAMAGE Define Properties for Damaging Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GAP DATA Define Data for Gap Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COMPOSITE Define Properties for Laminated Composite Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MIXTURE Define Constituents of Composite Material in Original and Potentially Damaged State

COHESIVE (with TABLE Input) Define Material Data for Interface Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COHESIVE Define Mechanical Data for Cohesive Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PSHELL Shell Element Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REBAR Define Rebar Positions, Areas, and Orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORIENTATION Define Orientation of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POWDER (with TABLE input) Define Powder Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POWDER Define Powder Material Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DENSITY EFFECTS Define Effects of Density on Powder Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RELATIVE DENSITY (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or

Coupled Thermal Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RELATIVE DENSITY Define Initial Relative Density for Stress or Coupled Thermal

Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SOIL (with TABLE Input) Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SOIL Define Material Properties for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL POROSITY (with TABLE input) Define Initial Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL POROSITY Define Initial Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POROSITY CHANGE (with TABLE Input) Define Changes in Porosity for Nonsoil Analysis . .

INITIAL VOID RATIO (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or Diffusion Analysis

INITIAL VOID RATIO Define Initial Void Ratio for Soil or Diffusion Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input) Define Changes in Void Ratio for Nonsoil Analysis . . . . .

INITIAL PC (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL PC Define Initial Preconsolidation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPECIFIC WEIGHT Define Specific Weight Constant for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL PORE (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Pore Pressure for Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . .

823

831

833

835

838

843

850

860

864

870

874

876

877

891

902

903

905

912

913

916

919

922

925

928

935

943

949

953

956

958

959

965

969

971

972

974

976

977

979

981

982

983

Contents 13

CHANGE PORE (with TABLE Input) Define Pore Pressure for Uncoupled Soil Analysis . . . . .

CHANGE PORE Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRESS FILM (with TABLE Input) Define Pressure Film Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRESS FILM Define Pressure Film Coefficient Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

985

988

990

993

996

Rate Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CREEP (with TABLE Input) Define Creep Constitutive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CREEP Define Creep Constitutive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PHI-COEFFICIENTS Define Phi-Coefficients for Rubber Viscoelastic Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VISCELPROP Define Properties for Isotropic Viscoelastic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VISCELORTH Define Properties for Viscoelastic Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VISCELMOON Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VISCELOGDEN Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Ogden Materials . . . . . . . . . .

VISCELFOAM Define Properties for Large Strain Viscoelastic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SHIFT FUNCTION Define Properties for Thermo-rheologically Simple Viscoelastic Materials .

VISCEL EXP Viscoelastic Thermal Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

997

999

1002

1007

1008

1009

1011

1012

1013

1014

1016

Dynamic Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAMPING Define Damping Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FLUID SOLID Define Fluid-Solid Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL DISP (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL DISP Define Initial Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL VEL (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL VEL Define Initial Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED ACCE Define Fixed Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MASSES Define Concentrated Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONM1 Define a General Concentrated Mass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONM2 Define a Diagonal Mass/Moment of Inertia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RESPONSE SPECTRUM Define Density for Spectral Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MODAL INCREMENT Define Increments for Eigenvalue Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BUCKLE INCREMENT Define Increments for Buckling Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1017

1018

1020

1021

1024

1025

1027

1028

1029

1030

1036

1038

1039

1041

FIXED TEMPERATURE (with TABLE Input) Define Fixed Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED TEMPERATURE Define Fixed Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FILMS (with TABLE Input) Define Thermal Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FILMS Define Convection Film Coefficient Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SINK POINTS (with TABLE Input) Define Sink Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST FLUXES (with TABLE Input) Define Distributed Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST FLUXES Define Distributed Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT FLUX (with TABLE Input) Define Point Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT FLUX Define Point Fluxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

QVECT (with TABLE Input) Define Thermal Vector Flux Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WELD FLUX (with TABLE Input) Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source . .

1043

1044

1047

1049

1053

1054

1056

1059

1060

1063

1064

1068

WELD FLUX Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WELD PATH Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WELD FILL Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Thermal or

Electrical Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THERMAL CONTACT (2-D) Define Two-dimensional Thermal or Electrical

Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THERMAL CONTACT with TABLES (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Thermal or

Electrical Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THERMAL CONTACT (3-D) Define Three-dimensional Thermal or Electrical

Contact Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Heat Transfer) Define Initial Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL TEMP (Heat Transfer) Define Initial Temperatures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials .

ISOTROPIC (Heat Transfer) Define Thermal Properties for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Define Thermal Properties for

Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal) Define Thermal Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . .

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Model Definition Option for Heat

Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ANISOTROPIC (Thermal) Model Definition Option for Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COHESIVE (with TABLE Input - Thermal) Define Material Data for Interface Elements . . . . . .

COHESIVE Define Material Data for Interface Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LATENT HEAT Define Latent Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Heat Transfer) Define Variation of Material Properties in

Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHO TEMP (Thermal) Define Variation of Orthotropic Thermal Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL (Heat Transfer) Define Control Parameters for Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . .

CONVERT Define Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONRAD GAP Define Convection/Radiation Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHANNEL Define Fluid Channel Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VIEW FACTOR Read in Radiation View Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RADIATING CAVITY Define Outline of Radiating Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RAD-CAVITY Define Radiation Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CAVITY DEFINITION Define Geometry of a Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMISSIVITY Define Emissivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Convective Heat Transfer) Define Nodal Velocity Components

VELOCITY (Convective Heat Transfer) Define Nodal Velocity Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CURE RATE Cure Kinetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INIT CURE (with TABLE Input) Define Initial Degree of Cure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INIT CURE Define Initial Degree of Cure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CURE SHRINKAGE Shrinkage Property of Resin Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THERMO-PORE Define Properties of Thermal Degrading Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SURFACE ENERGY Define Surface Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1072

1076

1082

1085

1093

1099

1110

1119

1122

1124

1126

1128

1131

1133

1136

1138

1140

1141

1142

1145

1150

1152

1153

1154

1155

1156

1157

1159

1162

1165

1167

1169

1172

1174

1175

1178

1183

Contents 15

Thermo-chemical Erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THROAT Define Coordinates of Throat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL PYROLYSIS Define Initial Pyrolysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL DENSITY (Heat Transfer) Define Initial Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STREAM DEFINITION Define Stream Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT STREAMLINE Control Output of Results along a Streamline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TRACK STREAMLINE Track Behavior of a Point along a Streamline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1189

1191

1192

1194

1196

1198

1199

JOULE Define Conversion Factor for Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Distributed Currents . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating) Define Distributed Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Point Currents. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT CURRENT (Joule) Define Nodal Point Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED VOLTAGE (with TABLE Input - Joule Heating) Define Fixed Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED VOLTAGE Define Nodal Fixed Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) Define Electric Conductivity

Properties for Isotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) Define Electric Conductivity

Properties for Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Conductivity) Define Electric Conductivity

Properties for Anisotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1200

1201

1202

1205

1206

1208

1209

1211

Diffusion Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INITIAL PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Initial Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Fixed Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Distributed Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT MASS (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Nodal Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Diffusion Properties for Isotropic Materials.

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Define Diffusion Properties for

Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Diffusion) Model Definition Option for Diffusion Analysis .

1222

1223

1225

1227

1230

1232

VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) Define Nodal Velocity Components . . . . . . . .

VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic) Define Nodal Velocity Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THICKNESS (with TABLE Input) Define Lubrication Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THICKNESS Define Lubrication Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RESTRICTOR (with TABLE Input) Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RESTRICTOR Coefficient Input for Bearing Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL (Hydrodynamic) Define Maximum Number of Increments for Bearing Analysis . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Hydrodynamic) Define Lubricant Material Properties . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic) Define Lubricant Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Hydrodynamic) Define Effect of Temperature in Bearing Analysis

1238

1239

1241

1243

1245

1246

1248

1249

1250

1252

1253

1212

1214

1218

1234

1236

Acoustic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED PRESSURE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Fixed Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED PRESSURE (Acoustic) Define Nodal Fixed Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST SOURCES (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Distributed Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST SOURCES (Acoustic) Define Distributed Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT SOURCE (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Point Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT SOURCE (Acoustic) Define Point Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (Acoustic) Define Properties for Acoustic Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACOUSTIC (with TABLE Input - Acoustic) Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis . .

ACOUSTIC Define Material Properties for Acoustic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1255

1256

1259

1261

1264

1265

1267

1268

1269

1270

1271

Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED EL-POT (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Fixed Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED EL-POT (Electrostatic) Define Fixed Nodal Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED POTENTIAL (Electrostatic) Define Fixed Nodal Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electrosatatic) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CHARGES (Electrostatic) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT CHARGE Define Nodal Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity) Define Electric Permittivity Properties for

Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electric Permittivity) Define Electric Permittivity

Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Electrical Properties for

Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic) Define Electrical Properties for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electrostatic) Define Electrical Properties for

Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical) Define Electrical Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . .

1272

1273

1276

1278

1280

1282

1285

1286

1288

Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED POTENTIAL (Piezoelectric) Define Fixed Nodal Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CHARGES (Piezoelectric) Define Distributed Charges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric) Define Nodal Point Charges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PIEZOELECTRIC (with TABLE Input - Piezoelectric) Define Electrical Data for

Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric) Define Electrical Data for Piezoelectric Analysis. . . . . . . . . .

1300

1301

1304

1305

1308

1309

1311

Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED MG-POT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Fixed Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED MG-POT (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1317

1318

1320

1289

1291

1295

1296

1297

1299

1312

1315

Contents 17

FIXED POTENTIAL (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Distributed Currents . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Point Current . . . . . . . . .

POINT CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Nodal Point Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COIL CURRENT Define the current in a Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMWINDING Define Path and Are Orientation for Coil or Winding Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for

Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability) Define Magnetic Permeability

Properties for Isotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetic Permeability) Define Magnetic Permeability

Properties for Orthotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for

Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic) Define Magnetic Properties for Orthotropic Materials . . . . . .

B-H RELATION (Magnetostatic) Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear Magnetic Material.

PERMANENT (with TABLE Input - Magnetostatic) Define Permanent Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PERMANENT (Magnetostatic) Define Permanent Magnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL (Magnetostatic) Control for Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED POTENTIAL (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Fixed Potential . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED POTENTIAL (Electromagnetic) Define Nodal Fixed Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CURRENT (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Currents. . . . . . . . .

DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CHARGES (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Charges. . . . . . . . .

DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT CURRENT-CHARGE (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Point Fluxes . . . . .

POINT CURRENT-CHARGE Define Nodal Point Currents and Point Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties

for Isotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties for Isotropic Materials . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties for

Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic) Define Electromagnetic Properties for

Orthotropic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-H RELATION (Electromagnetic) Define Magnetization Curve for Nonlinear

Magnetic Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PERMANENT (Electromagnetic) Define Permanent Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic) Control for Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1322

1325

1327

1330

1331

1333

1334

1336

1341

1343

1345

1349

1350

1354

1356

1358

1360

1362

1363

1364

1367

1369

1372

1373

1376

1377

1379

1380

1382

1384

1387

1389

1391

1393

Fluid Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REGION (Fluid) Define Elements in a Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COUPLING REGION Define Coupling Regions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED DISP (Fluid) Define Fixed Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED VELOCITY (with TABLE Input - Fluid) Define Fixed Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FIXED VELOCITY Define Fixed Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Fluid) Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis. . . . . . . .

ISOTROPIC (Fluid) Define Material Properties for Fluid Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STRAIN RATE (Fluid) Define Strain Rate Dependent Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TEMPERATURE EFFECTS (Coupled Fluid-Thermal) Temperature Effects in Coupled

Fluid-Thermal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL (Fluid) Control Option for Fluid Analysis or Fluid-Thermal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL (Fluid-Solid) Control Option for Fluid-Stress or Fluid-Thermal-Stress Analysis. . . .

END OPTION Model Definition Data End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1394

1396

1397

1401

1403

1406

1408

1410

1412

1415

1418

1421

1427

Elastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mechanical, Acoustic, Piezoelectric or Electrostatic-Structural or Electromagnetic Analyses . . . . .

Heat Transfer Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydrodynamic Bearing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table Driven Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Restart Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1434

1434

1434

1434

1435

1435

1435

1435

General Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COMMENT Enter Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TITLE Output Title Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NEW (History Definition) Use New Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INCLUDE (History Definition) Insert File into the Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT CHOICE (History Definition) Define Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT ELEMENT (History Definition) Specify Elements to be Included in Output . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT NODE (History Definition) Define Nodes and Nodal Quantities to be Printed . . . . . . . .

NO PRINT (History Definition) Suppress Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT CONTACT (History Definition) Prints the Contact Body Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO PRINT CONTACT (History Definition) Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout . .

PRINT SPRING (History Definition) Controls the Print Out of Springs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO PRINT SPRING (History Definition) Deactivates the Printing of All Springs . . . . . . . . . . . .

GRID FORCE (History Definition) Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level . . . . . . . . . .

SUMMARY (History Definition) Create Summary Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO SUMMARY (History Definition) Suppress Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ELEMENT SORT (History Definition) Sort Elements for Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1436

1437

1438

1439

1440

1441

1443

1445

1447

1448

1449

1450

1451

1452

1454

1455

1456

Contents 19

NODE SORT (History Definition) Sort Nodal Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NO NODE SORT (History Definition) Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT VMASS (History Definition) Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and

Strain Energies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL (Mechanical - History Definition) Control Option for Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .

PARAMETERS (History Definition) Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis. . . . .

SOLVER (History Definition) Specify Direct or Iterative Solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POST (History Definition) Create File for Postprocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POST INCREMENT Define Increments between Writing on Post File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RESTART INCREMENT Define Increments between Writing on Restart File . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ADAPT GLOBAL (History Definition) Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing.

LOADCASE (History Definition) Define Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DMIG-OUT (History Definition) Output Control of Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

K2GG, K2PP (History Definition) Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

M2GG, M2PP (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B2GG, B2PP (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

P2G (History Definition) Selects Direction Input Load Vector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1458

1459

1461

1462

1463

1470

1474

1478

1494

1495

1496

1507

1510

1515

1517

1518

1519

DISP CHANGE Define Displacement Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RELEASE NODE Define Nodes for which the Boundary Condition is Gradually Released . . . .

GAP CHANGE Redefine Data for Gap Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TYING CHANGE Define Tying Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST LOADS (History Definition) Define Distributed Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT LOAD (History Definition) Define Point Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUTO LOAD Define Equal Load Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INERTIA RELIEF (History Definition) Define Inertia Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BEGIN SEQUENCE Initiate a Series of Repeated Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

END SEQUENCE Terminates a Series of Repeated Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT Define Proportional Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUTO INCREMENT Define Automatic Load Stepping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUTO STEP Adaptive Load Step Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TERMINATE Terminate Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SUPERPLASTIC Superplastic Forming Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THERMAL LOADS (History Definition) Define Thermal Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUTO THERM Specify Data for Automatic Thermal Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHANGE STATE (History Definition) Change State Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT TEMP (History Definition) Define Point Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHANGE PORE (History Definition) Define Pore Pressures for Uncoupled Soil Analysis. . . . .

TIME STEP Define Time Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RESET TIME Resets Time to Zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BUCKLE Specify Buckling Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SUPERELEM (History Definition) Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for Adams MNF Interface.

1520

1521

1524

1525

1526

1527

1531

1533

1534

1536

1537

1538

1539

1544

1551

1553

1555

1557

1559

1563

1565

1568

1569

1570

1572

ASSEM LOAD Assemble Equivalent Nodal Force Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACTIVATE Activate Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DEACTIVATE (History Definition) Deactivate Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FOUNDATION (History Definition) Define Foundation Spring Force for Elements . . . . . . . . . .

CHANGE RIGID Define New Geometry For a Rigid Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ADD RIGID with TABLES (2-D) Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface. . . . . .

ADD RIGID (2-D) Define a New Two-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ADD RIGID with TABLES (3-D) Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface . . . .

ADD RIGID (3-D) Define a New Three-dimensional Rigid Contact Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTACT TABLE with TABLES (History Definition) Define Contact Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTACT TABLE (History Definition) Define Contact Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTACT NODE (History Definition) Define Nodes for Surface Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MOTION CHANGE Define Motion of Rigid Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SS-ROLLING Define the Parameters for Steady State Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RELEASE Define Release Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPROACH Move Rigid Surfaces into Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MOVE (History Definition) Perform Rigid Body Motion on Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ANNEAL Modify State of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SYNCHRONIZED Move Rigid Surfaces into Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPLINE (History Definition) Analytical Surface used to Represent a Deformable Body . . . . . .

EXCLUDE (History Definition) Ignore Contact with Certain Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACTUATOR Define the Length of the Actuator Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1574

1576

1577

1578

1581

1582

1590

1596

1601

1611

1621

1630

1637

1638

1640

1643

1644

1645

1647

1648

1649

1651

1652

CREEP INCREMENT Define Creep Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUTO CREEP Control Transient Creep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACCUMULATE Specify Accumulation Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EXTRAPOLATE Specify Extrapolation Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUTO THERM CREEP Automatic, Thermally-Loaded Elastic-Creep Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1653

1654

1655

1657

1658

1659

Dynamic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MODAL SHAPE Define Modal Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RECOVER Recover Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DYNAMIC CHANGE (Dynamic) Define Integration in Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPECTRUM Initiate Spectral Response Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HARMONIC (Dynamic) Define Excitation Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ACC CHANGE Define Acceleration Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1663

1664

1666

1668

1669

1670

1671

TRANSIENT Specify Transient or Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STEADY STATE (Heat Transfer) Specify Steady-State Heat Transfer Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST FLUXES (History Definition) Define Distributed Fluxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT FLUX (History Definition) Define Point Fluxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WELD FLUX (History Definition) Define Motion and Flux Parameters for Weld Heat Source . .

WELD PATH (History Definition) Define Path and Arc Orientation for Weld Heat Source. . . . .

1672

1673

1675

1676

1677

1678

1682

Contents 21

WELD FILL (History Definition) Define Parameters for Weld Filler Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTROL (Heat Transfer - History Definition) Define Controls for Heat Transfer Analysis . . .

TEMP CHANGE Specify or Change Fixed Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FILMS (History Definition) Define Film Coefficients and Sink Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VELOCITY CHANGE Modify Nodal Velocity Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1688

1691

1693

1695

1696

EMRESIS Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Resistance Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CURRENT (Joule Heating - History Definition) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT CURRENT (Joule - History Definition) Define Nodal Point Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOLTAGE CHANGE Define or Change Voltage for Joule Heating Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1698

1699

1700

1701

1702

Diffusion Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POROSITY CHANGE Define Changes in Porosity for Nonsoil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VOID CHANGE Define Changes in Void Ratio for Nonsoil Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST MASS (Diffusion) Define Distributed Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT MASS (Diffusion) Define Nodal Mass Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1704

1705

1707

1709

1712

THICKNS CHANGE Define Thickness Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAMPING COMPONENTS Define Damping Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STIFFNS COMPONENTS Define Stiffness Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1714

1715

1716

1717

Acoustic Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRESS CHANGE Define Fixed Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST SOURCES (History Definition) Define Incremental Distributed Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT SOURCE (Acoustic - History Definition) Define Incremental Nodal Point Sources . . . .

HARMONIC (Acoustic - History Definition) Define Excitation Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1718

1719

1721

1722

1723

Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STEADY STATE (Electrostatic) Specify Steady-State Electrostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMCAPAC Select Conducting Bodies to be used in a Capacitance Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . .

1724

1725

1726

Piezoelectric Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POTENTIAL CHANGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) Define Potential

Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) Define Nodal Point Charges. . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CHARGE (Piezoelectric - History Definition) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1727

1728

1730

1731

Magnetostatic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STEADY STATE (Magnetostatic) Specify Steady-State Magnetostatic Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . .

DIST CURRENT (Magnetostatic) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMINDUC Initiate an Inductance Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMLAMIN Initiate Lamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FORCE MAGNETOSTATIC Calculate Lorenzi Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1733

1734

1735

1737

1738

1739

Electromagnetic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HARMONIC (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Excitation Frequency . . . . . . . . . . .

DYNAMIC CHANGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Dynamic Change . . . . . . . .

POTENTIAL CHANGE Define or Redefine Potential Boundary Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

POINT CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Point Current and/or Charge.

DIST CURRENT (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Distributed Current. . . . . . . . . .

DIST CHARGE (Electromagnetic - History Definition) Define Distributed Charges . . . . . . . . . .

CONTINUE (History Definition) End Loadcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rezoning Options

Rezoning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REZONE Specify Rezoning Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPLIT BODIES Defines Rezoned Data of Contact Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTIONING (Rezoning) Define Sections for Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONNECTIVITY CHANGE Define or Change Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GEOMETRY CHANGE Specify New Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ORIENTATION CHANGE Redefine Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GAP DATA CHANGE Redefine Gap Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COORDINATE CHANGE Redefine Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UFRORD Use Subroutine UFRORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MOVE (Rezoning) Redefine Node Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTACT CHANGE Change Surface Contact after Rezoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRINT CHOICE (Rezoning) Select Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

URCONN Invoke User Subroutine URCONN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONTINUE (Rezoning) End Rezoning Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

END REZONE End Input for Rezoning Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1741

1742

1743

1744

1746

1747

1749

1751

1756

1757

1758

1759

1761

1762

1766

1768

1770

1771

1772

1773

1779

1781

1782

1783

Program Messages

Marc Exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exit Numbers 1-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exit Numbers 1001-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exit Numbers 2001-3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exit Numbers 3001-4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exit Numbers 4001-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exit Numbers 5001-6000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exit Numbers 9001-10000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1785

1785

1791

1793

1796

1799

1801

1803

Contents 23

1806

1807

1808

Running Marc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1810

1817

Default File

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Model Definition Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control File

Environment Variables

Material Database

Units

Tables of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameters List

Options List

1820

1820

1834

Preface

Preface

Chapter Contents

25

25

25

25

This document describes the file format of the Marc input file. Its chapters and sections roughly parallel

the organization of that file. Appendices describe Marc program messages and provide an alphabetical

list of parameters and options for easy reference. Plus, at the beginning of each chapter is a list of the

parameters or options discussed in that particular chapter.

This document is intended for current and new users of Marc. It does not purport to teach the use of Marc,

but is a reference to its specific functioning. Other Marc documents are listed below.

The Marc Reference Library includes:

Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information

Marc Volume B: Element Library

Marc Volume C: Program Input

Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines

Marc Volume E: Demonstrations Problems

Marc Python Tutorial and Reference Manual

Marc Mentat Help Reference

Chapter Contents

Chapter 1

Introduction

program input.

Chapter 2

Parameters

parameter section of the Marc input files.

Chapter 3

model definition section of the Marc

input files.

Chapter 4

displaying the results of the analysis.

Chapter 5

Rezoning Options

input files to specify load

history information.

Preface 26

termination of Marc.

supported computers.

and options put into a default file.

file.

introduces user-controlled

environment variables.

the database.

for remeshing observation.

Appendix I

Units

(SI) of units and conversation tables for

Imperial units from US units.

Appendix J

Parameters List

parameters and their associated

page numbers.

program options and their associated

page numbers.

Chapter 1 Introduction

Marc Volume C: Program Input

Introduction

Formats in Marc

38

49

28

29

Chapter 1 Introduction 28

Formats in Marc

This chapter contains a brief outline of the various data input options and problem solution setups which

are available to a Marc user. It highlights only a small segment of the total problem solution capability

available. You only have to select the options required for the solution of your problem. In addition, you

can further elect to use the many default and built-in conditions which have been provided in these

options.

This user-selection feature forms the basis for Marc and input data organization. Marc then provides a

solution capability based on your selection of options. Further details on Marcs organization can be

found in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.

Formats used by Marc are discussed in this chapter. A short description of the organization of the input

data is given, followed by an illustrative example particularly useful for new users. Selected portions of

the output generated by Marc are shown and discussed. The last section of this chapter summarizes the

input requirements for different classes of analyses.

Formats in Marc

Marc is written in FORTRAN, but does its own data conversion to avoid system aborts due to user data

errors. All input data files are read as alphanumeric and are converted to integer, floating point, or

keywords, as necessary. Marc issues error messages and displays the illegal image if it cannot interpret

the data field according to the specifications given in the manual. When such errors occur, Marc attempts

to scan the remainder of the data files and ends the run with an exit error message at the END OPTION

(or end file). Two conventions are allowed for input format controlfixed and free format. Fixed and

free format can be mixed within a data file, but on a single data line, only one type of format can be

entered. The syntax rules for each format type are as follows:

Fixed Field

1. Integers must be right-justified (right blank fill) in their fields.

2. Floating point numbers can be given with or without exponent. In either case, the mantissa must

contain a decimal point. If an exponent is given, it must be preceded by the character E or D and

must be right justified. The size of the number must lie in the range 10-72 to 1072.

Note that, in the this manual, integer fields are indicated as I and floating point numbers are indicated

as E or F and the allowable column field is specified.

Free Field

Data can be input in free field under the following syntax rules:

1. Each data block must contain the same number of data items that it would contain under standard

fixed format control as documented in this manual. Thus, for example, the 3rd data block of the

CONNECTIVITY option is given as (16I5); therefore, no more than 16 numbers can appear on a

data line in this data block under fixed or free field format. This syntax rule allows mixing of

fixed-field and free-field data in the data file, since the number of data blocks needed to input any

data list is the same in both cases.

Input of List Items

2. Data items on a data line must be separated by a comma. This separator can be surrounded by an

arbitrary number of blanks. Within the data item itself, no embedded blanks can appear.

3. Floating point numbers can be given with or without exponent. In either case, the mantissa must

contain a decimal point. If an exponent is given, it must be preceded by the character E or D and

must immediately follow the mantissa (no embedded blanks). The size of the number must lie in

the range 10-35 to 1035.

4. Keywords must be typed exactly as written in the manual. Embedded blanks do not count as

separators here (for example, BEAM SECT is one word only).

5. Note that you must distinguish between a real and integer zero when entering data; the floating

point zero must contain a decimal point, as in Rule 3, above.

6. If a data line contains only one free-field data item, that item must be followed by a comma. Thus,

1 must be entered as 1, if it is the only data item on a data line.

Marc requests that you input a list of items in association with certain program functions. These items,

as an example, can be a set of elements as in conjunction with the ISOTROPIC option, or a set of nodes

as in conjunction with the POINT LOAD option. There are 12 types of items that can be requested:

Element numbers

Points

Node numbers

Curves

Surfaces

Bodies

Layer numbers

Edges

Increment numbers

Faces

A set of items can be expressed as a combination of one or more subsets. These subsets can be specified

in three different forms, depending on your convenience. The operations that can be performed between

subsets are:

AND

INTERSECT

EXCEPT

In forming a set, subsets are combined in binary operations going from left to right. Hence, a set can be

formed as:

1. SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2

which implies all items in SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2. Duplicate items are eliminated and the

resultant set is sorted.

2. SUBLIST1 INTERSECT SUBLIST2

which implies only those items occurring both in SUBLIST1 and SUBLIST2.

Chapter 1 Introduction 30

Input of List Items

which implies all items in SUBLIST1 except those which occur in SUBLIST2.

4. SUBLIST1 AND SUBLIST2 EXCEPT SUBLIST3 INTERSECT SUBLIST4

which implies take the items in SUBLIST1 and SUBLIST2 and remove those items that occur in

SUBLIST3. Then, if these items also occur in SUBLIST4, include them in the set.

The SUBLISTS can have the form:

1. A range of items can be specified as:

l TO m BY n

or

1 THROUGH M BY n

that the range can be either increasing or decreasing.

2. A string of items can be specified as:

a1 a2 a3 ... an

CONTINUE should be the last item on the data line.

3. A setname can be specified as:

MYSET

which implies that all items previously specified to be in the set MYSET are to be used. The items

in a set are specified using the DEFINE option.

In a list, edges and faces are entered as pairs (i:j) where i is the user element id and j is the edge id or

face id. The edge id/face id for the different element classes is given beginning on page 31.

There are two types of edge and face sets; those expressed in Marc convention or the Marc Mentat

convention. The edge/face id in Marc convention is one greater than the Marc Mentat convention.

For example, to specify edge 1 on elements 1 to 20, one would use:

1:1 TO 20:1

In Marc, most lists are sorted lists. That is, regardless of the order of the list items on the list line, Marc

returns these items sorted from lowest to highest. Unsorted lists are required in several places, however.

These places are:

1. List of nodes in the TYING option.

2. List of nodes in the SUPERINPUT and SUBSTRUCTURE option.

3. List of degrees of freedom in the FIXED DISP option.

When defining unsorted lists, the sublist connectors EXCEPT and INTERSECT cannot be used. Setnames

can be used as long as the sets themselves are unsorted. In Marc, degree of freedom sets are always

Edges and Faces

unsorted. Unsorted node sets can be defined by using set type NDSQ (for node sequence) rather than set

type NODE (see the DEFINE model definition option).

Examples

Define subsets FLOOR, NWALL, WWALL

DEFINE NODE SET FLOOR

1 TO 5 (i.e. NODES 1,2,3,4,5)

DEFINE NODE SET NWALL

5 TO 15 BY 5 AND 20 to 22 (i.e. NODES 5,10,15,20,21,22)

DEFINE NODE SET WWALL

11 TO 20 (i.e. NODES 11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20)

1. NWALL AND WWALL, which would contain nodes

5

16

10

17

11

18

12

19

13

20

14

21

15

22

15

20

10

16

11

17

12

18

13

19

14

20

15

21

22

Marc 2003 introduces the concept of edge ids and face ids that are used with the ATTACH EDGE,

ATTACH FACE, and edge and face sets. The edge and face ids follow two different conventions - either

Marc or Marc Mentat. The difference is that the Marc Mentat number is equal to the Marc number minus

one. The edge and face ids are dependent upon the element geometry and are shown below.

1-D 2-Node Elements

y

2

1

EDGE ID

1

NODES

12

Chapter 1 Introduction 32

Edges and Faces

3

EDGE ID

1

NODES

123

2

1

2-D 4-Node Quadrilateral Elements

4

3

EDGE ID

1

2

3

4

NODES

12

23

34

41

2-D 8-Node Quadrilateral Elements

4

EDGE ID

1

2

3

4

NODES

152

263

374

481

Edges and Faces

3

EDGE ID

1

2

3

NODES

12

23

31

EDGE ID

1

2

3

NODES

142

253

361

3

4

3

1

2

EDGE ID

1

2

3

4

5

6

NODES

12

23

31

14

24

34

Chapter 1 Introduction 34

Edges and Faces

6

4

3

1

2

EDGE ID

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

NODES

12

23

31

45

56

64

14

25

36

EDGE ID

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

NODES

12

23

34

41

56

67

78

85

15

26

37

48

8

7

5

6

4

3

2

4

8

10

3

9

7

6

1

5

2

EDGE ID

1

2

3

4

5

6

NODES

12 5

23 6

31 7

14 8

24 9

3 4 10

Edges and Faces

8

16

15

EDGE ID

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

20

13

14

6

17

19

4

12

11

18

3

9

10

2

NODES

12 9

2 3 10

3 4 11

4 1 12

5 6 13

6 7 14

7 8 15

8 5 16

1 5 17

2 6 18

3 7 19

4 8 20

z

FACE ID

1

NODES

123

1

y

x

4

P

FACE ID

1

3

1

2

NODES

1234

Chapter 1 Introduction 36

Edges and Faces

3

P

FACE ID

1

NODES

123456

4

3

FACE ID

1

2

3

4

NODES

124

234

314

123

1

2

3-D 6-Node Pentahedral

6

4

3

1

2

FACE ID

1

2

3

4

5

NODES

1254

2365

3 1 4 6

132

456

Edges and Faces

8

7

5

6

4

FACE ID

1

2

3

4

5

6

NODES

1265

2376

3487

4158

1234

6587

3

2

4

10

FACE ID

1

2

3

4

9

7

6

NODES

1 2 4 5 09 08

2 3 4 6 10 09

3 1 4 7 08 10

1 2 3 5 06 07

1

5

2

3-D 15-Node Pentahedral

3

15

FACE ID

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

9

11

12

13

4

14

10

NODES

1 2 5 04 07 14 10 13

2 3 6 05 08 15 11 14

3 1 4 06 09 13 12 15

3 2 1 08 07 09

4 5 6 10 11 12

Chapter 1 Introduction 38

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

8

16

15

7

20

13

14

6

17

19

4

12

11

18

FACE ID

1

2

3

4

5

6

NODES

1 2 6 5 09 18 13 17

2 3 7 6 10 19 14 18

3 4 8 7 11 20 15 19

4 1 5 8 12 17 16 20

1 2 3 4 09 10 11 12

6 5 8 7 13 16 15 14

3

9

10

2

The input data for Marc is organized into three basic groups. These groups form a natural subdivision of

the data. Each group is then subdivided into various optional blocks of input data. The optional blocks of

data within each group have been organized to minimize the input of unnecessary data. The main idea is

to enable you to specify only the data for the optional blocks needed to define your problem. The various

blocks of input are referred to here as optional in the sense that many have built-in default values which

can be used and does not imply that they are optional in all cases. The input data is divided into the

following three groups:

Parameter Data

This group of data is used to allocate the necessary working space for the problem and to set up initial

switches which control the flow of Marc through the desired analysis. This set of input data is terminated

with END parameter data.

Model Definition Data

This set of data is used to read in the initial loading, geometry, and material data of the model. It also

provides nodal point data such a boundary conditions. In general, the initial model data is provided in this

group and control restart. Print options can also be specified here for further Marc processing. This data

provides Marc with the necessary information for determination of an initial elastic solution (zero

increment solution in Marc terminology). This group of data is terminated with END OPTION data.

History Definition Data

This group of data provide the load incrementation and control of Marc after the initial elastic analysis.

The group also includes blocks which allow changes in the initial model specifications. Each set of load

incrementation data is terminated with CONTINUE data. This data sends Marc back for another increment

or series of increments if the auto incrementation features are requested.

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

Linear Analysis

Requiring Incrementation

Proportional

Increment

Auto Load

Etc.

Connectivity

Coordinates

Fixed Displacements

Etc.

Title

Sizing

Etc.

Figure 1-1

Model

Definition

Parameter

Marc Parameter Data

END Data

(Zero Increment)

END OPTION Data

for the First Increment

CONTINUE Data

for the 2nd, 3rd, ..., Increments)

History

Definition

Chapter 1 Introduction 40

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

Marc input format is designed to allow the input of very complex problems. The new user is, however,

faced with gaining familiarity with the system and its conventions. At the outset, therefore, you should

adopt a systematic approach to the preparation of input data. One approach is to follow the construction

of Marc and adopt the procedure of preparing input for each of the data blocks (parameter, model

definition, and history definition options) in turn.

We shall illustrate our discussion by preparing input for the analysis of a thin plate with hole subjected

to pressure loading. The problem, as shown in Figure 1-2, is a well-known one so that the results can be

compared to the exact solution (Timoshenko, Theory of Elasticity). The hole/plate size ratio is chosen to

approximate an infinite plate. A procedure preparing Marc input takes the following steps:

Finite Element Modeling

The plate has an outside dimension of 10 inches x 10 inches with a central hole of 1 inch radius. The

thickness of the plate is assumed to be 0.1 inches and the material property is assumed to be isotropic and

linear elastic. The Youngs modulus is 30 x 106 pounds per square inch (psi) with Poissons ratio of 0.3.

These quantities are sufficient to define the behavior of an isotropic, linear-elastic material.

= 1.0 psi

10 in.

R = 1.0 in.

10 in.

Plate Thickness = 0.1 in.

E = 30 X 106 psi

Figure 1-2

As shown in Figure 1-2, due to symmetry conditions, only a quarter of the plate is analyzed. Prescribed

displacement boundary conditions exist along the lines of symmetry (that is, u = 0 at line x = 0; v = 0 at

line y = 0) and traction (pressure) boundary condition exits at the top of the plate.

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

This quarter plate is approximated by a finite element mesh consisting of twenty 8-node plane stress

elements with appropriate loading and boundary conditions. The element (Marc type 26) is a secondorder, isoparametric two-dimensional element for plane stress. There are eight nodes with two

translational degrees of freedom at each node. A description of element type 26 can be found in Marc

Volume B: Element Library.

This example uses a coarse mesh for demonstration purposes only. The analyst must anticipate the sharp

stress gradients in this problem and design the mesh accordingly. This is achieved in this problem by

using progressively smaller elements as the hole is approached. If necessary, further mesh refinement can

be achieved by adding elements to the mesh.

The preparation of parameter, model definition, and history definition data for this example is

demonstrated as follows:

Parameter Data

The analysis to be carried out in this example is a linear elastic analysis with plots. Consequently, only

five parameters are needed for the input data:

TITLE

ELEMENTS

SIZING

END

In this example, the title, Elastic Analysis of a Thin Plate with Hole, is chosen for the problem and entered

through the TITLE parameter.

The selected Marc element type 26 is entered through the ELEMENTS parameter.

No data is required on the SIZING parameter:

Finally, the parameters are completed with an END parameter.

At this stage, the input data is:

TITLE

ELASTIC ANALYSIS OF A THIN PLATE WITH HOLE

SIZING

ELEMENTS,26,

END

Model Definition Data

The model definition data contains the bulk data for the analysis. The data entered here concerns:

1. the topology of the model (finite element mesh in terms of element connectivity and nodal

coordinates, as well as plate thickness),

2. material property (Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio),

Chapter 1 Introduction 42

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

4. plotting and output controls.

A list of the model definition options can be found in Chapter 3 of this document.

1. Topology of the Model

The topology of the plate model is numerically defined by the following model definition options:

CONNECTIVITY

COORDINATES

GEOMETRY

In this example, the mesh consists of 20 elements and 79 nodes. The data required for element

connectivity and nodal coordinates are:

CONNECTIVITY

20

1

26

1

2

26

3

3

26

9

4

26

11

5

26

5

6

26

3

7

26

30

8

26

32

9

26

38

10

26

40

11

26

1

12

26

47

13

26

9

14

26

53

15

26

49

16

26

47

17

26

30

18

26

69

19

26

38

20

26

75

COORDINATES

0

0

1

1.4000

2

1.5500

3

1.7000

.

.

.

77

0.0000

78

0.4931

79

0.0000

3

5

11

13

3

1

32

34

40

42

9

53

17

59

64

66

38

75

29

66

11

13

19

21

27

29

40

42

27

25

53

55

59

61

66

29

75

77

66

64

9

11

17

19

25

27

38

40

29

27

47

49

53

55

47

1

69

71

75

77

2

4

10

12

4

2

31

33

39

41

6

50

14

56

62

63

35

72

43

78

7

8

15

16

23

24

36

37

44

45

52

54

58

60

65

67

74

76

67

65

10

12

18

20

26

28

39

41

28

26

50

51

56

57

63

24

72

73

78

79

6

7

14

15

22

23

35

36

43

44

46

48

52

54

48

46

68

70

74

76

1.4000

1.0500

0.7000

1.2500

1.1910

1.3750

The data in the CONNECTIVITY option consists of element numbers (1,2,...,19,20), element type

(26), and for each element, four corner node numbers and four midside node numbers.

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

The data in the COORDINATES option consists of the node number (1); and coordinates (x = 1.4,

y = 1.4) of node 1 in the global coordinate system (x, y).

Finally, the plate thickness is entered through GEOMETRY as:

GEOMETRY

0,

0.1,

1 TO 20

A thickness of 0.1 inches is assumed for all twenty (1 to 20) elements.

2. Material Property

Material properties of the plate are entered through the ISOTROPIC option. For our problem, the only

data required for a linear elastic analysis are Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio. The same material is

used for the whole mesh (from Element No. 1 to Element No. 20). This is given a material ID of 1. The

data in ISOTROPIC is:

ISOTROPIC

1,

1,

30.E6,0.3,

1 TO 20

3. Pressure Loading and Prescribed Displacement Boundary Conditions

As shown in Figure 1-3, the pressure loading is acted on two elements (elements 13 and 14), along the

lines 61-60-59 and 59-58-17.

From CONNECTIVITY, we observe that these lines represent the 2-6-3 face of the elements. As a result,

a distributed load type of 8 can be determined for the pressure loading from the QUICK REFERENCE

of element 26 in Marc Volume B: Element Library.

"LOAD TYPE (IBODY)=8 FOR UNIFORM PRESSURE ON 2-6-3 FACE"

In addition, as shown in Figure 1-4, the sign conversion of the pressure loading is that a negative

magnitude represents a tensile distributed load. Consequently, the input for the one pound tensile

distributed loading (DIST LOADS) acting on elements 13 and 14 takes the following form:

DIST LOADS

0,

8,-1.,

13,14,

Chapter 1 Introduction 44

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

60

61

57

59

58

14

17

13

16

55

12

51

11

19

49

62

64

79

77

73

71

15

20

18

16

19

17 9

7

8 10

20

5 in.

4

5

34 37424525 22 5

2

5 in.

8

13

16

21

Radius of the

hole = 1 in.

x

Figure 1-3

4

7

Figure 1-4

The FIXED DISP option is used for the input of prescribed displacement boundary conditions at the lines

of symmetry (x = 0, y = 0). As indicated in the QUICK REFERENCE of element 26, the nodal degrees

of freedom are as follows:

dof 1 = u = global x-direction displacement

dof 2 = v = global y-direction displacement.

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

dof 1 = u = 0 for nodes (71, 73, 77, 79, 64, 62, 49, 51, 55, 57, 61)

along the line x=0.

and

dof 2 = v = 0 for nodes (34, 37, 42, 45, 25, 22, 5, 8, 13, 16, 21)

along the line y=0.

FIXED DISP

2,

0.,

2,

34,37,42,45,25,22,5,8,13,16,21,

0.,

1,

71,73,77,79,64,62,49,51,55,57,61,

4. Bandwidth Optimization and Output Controls

Although the bandwidth in this sample problem cannot be extremely large, the use of the OPTIMIZE

model definition option demonstrates the bandwidth optimization capabilities in Marc. This option can

reduce considerable computing costs in larger problems. The bandwidth optimization option creates an

internal node numbering different from your node numbering, but all data input and output is in your

node numbering system.

There are a number of options available to you for bandwidth optimization. The option number 2

(Cuthill-McKee algorithm) with a maximum of ten iterations is selected for this example.

OPTIMIZE,2,0,0,1,

10,

In order to minimize the output quantity (number of printed pages), the PRINT ELEMENT option is used

for printing out stresses and strains at a few integration points of a number of elements. The elements to

be printed are:

From Element

to

Element

10

10

Only two integration points (numbers 4 and 6) where stresses and strains are to be printed. Nodal

quantities (displacement, reactions, etc.) are printed for all nodes (from node 1 to node 79). The input

data of PRINT ELEMENT is:

PRINT ELEMENT

1,

Chapter 1 Introduction 46

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

STRESS STRAIN

2,4,5,8,10

4,6,

The SUMMARY option produces summary tables containing maximum and minimum values of stresses

and strains.

The model definition data is completed with an END OPTION.

History Definition Data

This following example is a linear-elastic analysis which requires no incrementation data.

title

elastic analysis of a thin plate with hole

sizing

elements

26

end

connectivity

20

1

26

1

3

11

9

2

7

10

6

2

26

3

5

13

11

4

8

12

7

3

26

9

11

19

17

10

15

18

14

4

26

11

13

21

19

12

16

20

15

5

26

5

3

27

25

4

23

26

22

6

26

3

1

29

27

2

24

28

23

7

26

30

32

40

38

31

36

39

35

8

26

32

34

42

40

33

37

41

36

9

26

38

40

27

29

39

44

28

43

10

26

40

42

25

27

41

45

26

44

11

26

1

9

53

47

6

52

50

46

12

26

47

53

55

49

50

54

51

48

13

26

9

17

59

53

14

58

56

52

14

26

53

59

61

55

56

60

57

54

15

26

49

64

66

47

62

65

63

48

16

26

47

66

29

1

63

67

24

46

17

26

30

38

75

69

35

74

72

68

18

26

69

75

77

71

72

76

73

70

19

26

38

29

66

75

43

67

78

74

20

26

75

66

64

77

78

65

79

76

coordinates

0

0

1

1.4000

1.4000

2

1.5500

1.0500

3

1.7000

0.7000

4

1.8500

0.3500

5

2.0000

0.0000

6

2.3000

2.3000

7

2.5250

1.1500

8

2.7500

0.0000

9

3.2000

3.2000

10

3.2750

2.4000

11

3.3500

1.6000

12

3.4250

0.8000

13

3.5000

0.0000

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

4.1000

4.1750

4.2500

5.0000

5.0000

5.0000

5.0000

5.0000

1.7500

1.4900

1.2300

1.5000

1.3900

1.2800

1.1700

1.0600

0.7070

0.8315

0.9238

0.9810

1.0000

0.7953

1.0129

1.1250

0.8835

1.0008

1.1019

1.1855

1.2500

0.9718

1.1910

1.3750

1.0500

0.7000

0.3500

0.0000

1.1500

0.0000

2.4000

1.6000

0.8000

0.0000

2.0500

0.0000

3.7500

2.5000

1.2500

0.0000

0.0000

0.6150

0.0000

0.2650

0.5300

0.7950

4.1000

2.0500

0.0000

5.0000

3.7500

2.5000

1.2500

0.0000

0.0000

0.6150

1.2300

0.0000

0.2650

0.5300

0.7950

1.0600

0.7070

0.5557

0.3825

0.1948

0.0000

0.7953

0.4194

0.0000

0.8835

0.6753

0.4562

0.2299

0.0000

0.9718

0.4931

0.0000

1.5500

1.7000

1.8500

2.0000

2.5250

2.7500

3.2750

3.3500

3.4250

3.5000

4.1750

4.2500

5.0000

5.0000

5.0000

5.0000

1.7500

1.4900

1.5000

1.3900

1.2800

1.1700

Chapter 1 Introduction 48

Guide to Organization of Marc Input Data

68

0.5557

0.8315

69

0.3825

0.9238

70

0.1948

0.9810

71

0.0000

1.0000

72

0.4194

1.0129

73

0.0000

1.1250

74

0.6753

1.0008

75

0.4562

1.1019

76

0.2299

1.1855

77

0.0000

1.2500

78

0.4931

1.1910

79

0.0000

1.3750

geometry

1

0.1

1 to 20

isotropic

1

1

30000000.

.3

1 to 20

dist loads

1

8 -1.

13

14

fixed displacement

2

0.0000e+00

2

34

37

42

45

25

0.0000e+00

1

71

73

77

79

64

optimize,2,0,0,1,

10,

print element

1

stress strain

2

4

5

8

10

4

6

end option

22

13

16

21

62

49

51

55

57

61

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

Selected portions of the output for this problem are shown in the following. The small type on the output

are the authors comments and gives a further explanation.

Marc first gives a notes section which identifies the version of Marc being used. This is followed by an

echo of the input data and a summary of program sizing and options requested.

W

W

MMMMM

MMMMM

WWWWW

WWWWW

MMMMMMMMM

MMMMMMMMM

WWWWWWWWW

WWWWWWWWW

MMMMMMMMMMMMM

MMMMMMMMMMMMM

WWWWWWWWWWWWW

WWWWWWWWWWWWW

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW

MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM

WWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWW

MMMMMM

MMMMMMMMMMM

MMMMMM

WWWWWW

WWWWWWWWWWW

WWWWWW

MMMM

MMMMMMM

MMMM

WWWW

WWWWWWW

WWWW

MM

MMM

MM

WW

WWW

WW

M

M

M

W

W

W

MM

MMM

MM

WW

WWW

WW

MMMM

MMMMMMM

MMMM

WWWW

WWWWWWW

WWWW

MMMMMM

MMMMMMMMMMM

MMMMMM

WWWWWW

WWWWWWWWWWW

WWWWWW

MMMMMMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMM MMMMMMMM

WWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWW

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW

MMMMMMMMMMMMM

MMMMMMMMMMMMM

WWWWWWWWWWWWW

WWWWWWWWWWWWW

MMMMMMMMM

MMMMMMMMM

WWWWWWWWW

WWWWWWWWW

MMMMM

MMMMM

WWWWW

WWWWW

M

M

Marc REVISION 2010

MSC.SOFTWARE CORPORATION

machine type: NT

(c) COPYRIGHT 2010 MSC.Software Corporation, all rights reserved

Marc - N T

Chapter 1 Introduction 50

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

i n p u t

p a g e

d a t a

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------title

prob e2.9 elastic analysis

title

plate with hole

title

prob e2.9 elastic analysis - elmt 26

sizing

card

5

elements,26,

processor,1,1,1,

version,10,

end

connectivity

card

10

20

1

26

1

3

11

9

2

7

10

6

2

26

3

5

13

11

4

8

12

7

3

26

9

11

19

17

10

15

18

14

4

26

11

13

21

19

12

16

20

15

card

15

5

26

5

3

27

25

4

23

26

22

6

26

3

1

29

27

2

24

28

23

7

26

30

32

40

38

31

36

39

35

8

26

32

34

42

40

33

37

41

36

9

26

38

40

27

29

39

44

28

43

card

20

10

26

40

42

25

27

41

45

26

44

11

26

1

9

53

47

6

52

50

46

12

26

47

53

55

49

50

54

51

48

13

26

9

17

59

53

14

58

56

52

14

26

53

59

61

55

56

60

57

54

card

25

15

26

49

64

66

47

62

65

63

48

16

26

47

66

29

1

63

67

24

46

17

26

30

38

75

69

35

74

72

68

18

26

69

75

77

71

72

76

73

70

19

26

38

29

66

75

43

67

78

74

card

30

20

26

75

66

64

77

78

65

79

76

coordinates

2

79

1

1.4000

1.4000

2

1.5500

1.0500

card

35

3

1.7000

0.7000

4

1.8500

0.3500

5

2.0000

0.0000

6

2.3000

2.3000

7

2.5250

1.1500

card

40

8

2.7500

0.0000

9

3.2000

3.2000

10

3.2750

2.4000

11

3.3500

1.6000

12

3.4250

0.8000

card

45

13

3.5000

0.0000

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

p a g e

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------14

4.1000

4.1000

15

4.1750

2.0500

16

4.2500

0.0000

17

5.0000

5.0000

card

50

18

5.0000

3.7500

19

5.0000

2.5000

20

5.0000

1.2500

21

5.0000

0.0000

22

1.7500

0.0000

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

card

55

23

1.4900

0.6150

24

1.2300

1.2300

25

1.5000

0.0000

26

1.3900

0.2650

27

1.2800

0.5300

card

60

28

1.1700

0.7950

29

1.0600

1.0600

30

0.7070

0.7070

31

0.8315

0.5557

32

0.9238

0.3825

card

65

33

0.9810

0.1948

34

1.0000

0.0000

35

0.7953

0.7953

36

1.0129

0.4194

37

1.1250

0.0000

card

70

38

0.8835

0.8835

39

1.0008

0.6753

40

1.1019

0.4562

41

1.1855

0.2299

42

1.2500

0.0000

card

75

43

0.9718

0.9718

44

1.1910

0.4931

45

1.3750

0.0000

46

1.0500

1.5500

47

0.7000

1.7000

card

80

48

0.3500

1.8500

49

0.0000

2.0000

50

1.1500

2.5250

51

0.0000

2.7500

52

2.4000

3.2750

card

85

53

1.6000

3.3500

54

0.8000

3.4250

55

0.0000

3.5000

56

2.0500

4.1750

57

0.0000

4.2500

card

90

58

3.7500

5.0000

59

2.5000

5.0000

60

1.2500

5.0000

61

0.0000

5.0000

62

0.0000

1.7500

card

95

63

0.6150

1.4900

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

p a g e

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------64

0.0000

1.5000

65

0.2650

1.3900

66

0.5300

1.2800

67

0.7950

1.1700

card 100

68

0.5557

0.8315

69

0.3825

0.9238

70

0.1948

0.9810

71

0.0000

1.0000

72

0.4194

1.0129

card 105

73

0.0000

1.1250

74

0.6753

1.0008

75

0.4562

1.1019

76

0.2299

1.1855

77

0.0000

1.2500

card 110

78

0.4931

1.1910

79

0.0000

1.3750

isotropic

card

115

1

0.300e+08 0.300e+00 0.000e+00 0.000e+00 0.100e+21 0.000e+00

Chapter 1 Introduction 52

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

card

120

card

125

card

130

3

16

4

17

5

18

6

19

7

20

10

11

12

13

14

geometry

1

1.

1 to 20

fixed displacement

0.0000e+00

2

34

37

42

0.0000e+00

1

71

73

77

dist loads

45

25

22

13

16

21

79

64

62

49

51

55

57

61

8

-1.000

13

14

summary

card 135

optimize,2,0,0,1,

10,

print element

1

stress strain

card 140

2

4

5

8

10

4

6

post

16

17

2

0

19

17

equivalent von mises stress

card 145

11

1st comp of total stress

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

p a g e

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------12

2nd comp of total stress

13

3rd comp of total stress

end option

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------*************************************************

*************************************************

program sizing and options requested as follows

element type requested*************************

number of elements in mesh*********************

number of nodes in mesh************************

max number of elements in any dist load list***

maximum number of point loads******************

load correction flagged or set************

number of lists of distributed loads***********

values stored at all integration points****

tape no.for input of coordinates + connectivity

no.of different materials

1 max.no of slopes

number of points on shell section *************

new style input format will be used*********

maximum number of set names is*****************

number of processors used *********************

Marc input version ************************

end of parameters and sizing

*************************************************

*************************************************

26

20

79

2

0

3

5

5

11

50

1

10

15

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

At this stage, Marc attempts to allocate core for input of the model definition data and assembly of the

element stiffness matrix. Marc first prints out the key to strain, stress, and displacement output for each

element type chosen. Column numbers identifying output quantities are referenced to the appropriate

components of stress, strain, or displacement. Then, the required number of words is printed out followed

by a list of the internal core allocation parameters. They reflect the maximum requirements imposed by

different elements. The internal element variables are different for each element type and are repeated for

each element type used in a given analysis.

key to stress, strain and displacement output

element type

26

stresses and strains in global directions

1=xx

2=yy

3=xy

displacements in global directions

1=u global x direction

2=v global y direction

workspace needed for input and stiffness assembly

internal core allocation parameters

degrees of freedom per node (ndeg) 2

max. number of coordinates per node

2

max. nodes per element (nnodmx) 8

max. invariants per int. points (neqst) 1

max.stress components per int. point (nstrmx)

strains per integration point (ngens) 3

53059

elements in core, words per element (nelsto)

total space required

vectors in core, total space required

1046

20920

6004

40960

number of nodes= 8

stresses stored per integration point =

direct continuum components stored = 2

shear continuum components stored = 1

shell/beam flag = 0

Chapter 1 Introduction 54

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

int.points for elem. stiffness 9

number of local inertia directions 2

int.point for print if all points not flagged 5

int. points for dist. surface loads (pressure) 3

library code type = 26

large disp. row counts

4

4

7

residual load correction is invoked

For nonlinear problems, it is important to note if the residual load correction was turned on. this is

automatically done in the current version.

This is followed by the model definition data; how it is read and interpreted by Marc. Marc then

calculates the bandwidth of the stiffness matrix and optimizes it if the OPTIMIZE model definition option

is included. The original bandwidth (try 0) and the optimized bandwidth (try 10).

direct symmetric profile solver is invoked for region

maximum connectivity in stiffness matrix is

17 at node

75

45562

maximum sky-line including fill-in is526at try 0(forward numbering)

maximum sky-line including fill-in is1128at try10(backward numbering)

maximum sky-line including fill-in is1307at try10(forward numbering)

maximum sky-line including fill-in is900at try10(backward numbering)

maximum connectivity in stiffness matrix is

maximum half-bandwidth is

26

14 at node

between nodes

21

40

and

900

546

61121

summed over the whole model

from distributed loads

dist. loads on undeformed configuration - increments for dist. loads

increments for point loads

0.000000E+00

5.000000E+00

point loads

0.000000E+00

0.000000E+00

start of assembly

wall time =

cycle number is

2.00

wall time =

2.00

46

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

singularity ratio

1.8140E-01

wall time =

2.00

where equivalent stress is 3.091E-20 of yield

NT version

Marc 2010

output for increment

within which:

elastic strain energy

plastic strain energy

total ext-force work

within which:

work by appl. force/disp.

work by contact forces

work by frictional forces

is

4.60569E-07

is

is

is

4.60569E-07

0.00000E+00

4.60569E-07

is

is

is

4.60569E-07

0.00000E+00

0.00000E+00

After the bandwidth calculation (and optimization), Marc assigns the necessary workspace for the in-core

solution of this matrix.

maximum connectivity is

14 at node

40

maximum half-bandwidth is

26 between nodes

21 and

46

number of profile entries including fill-in is

900

number of profile entries excluding fill-in is

546

total workspace needed with in-core matrix storage = 60117

Marc then calculates the loading and sums the load applied to each degree of freedom for distributed

loads and point loads. This information provides for a valuable check on the total loads in the different

degrees of freedom.

load increments associated with each degree of freedom

summed over the whole model

distributed loads

0.000e+00 5.000e-01

point loads

0.000e+00 0.000e-00

load increments associated with each degree of freedom

summed over the whole model

distributed loads

0.000e+00 5.000e-01

point loads

0.000e+00 0.000e-00

Chapter 1 Introduction 56

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

Then it prints the time (system billing units) at the start of assembly measured from the start of the job.

It then prints out the bandwidth which might have changed due to optimization of the nodal numbering

(if specified by you). This is followed by a printout of the time at the start of the matrix solution

start

time

start

time

of assembly

=

0.18

of matrix solution

=

0.24

If the out-of-core solver is used, a figure representing the profile of the global stiffness matrix is shown.

It then prints the following message which gives an estimate of the conditioning of the matrix. If the

singularity is of the order of the accuracy of the machine (10 for 64 bits), the equations can be considered

singular and the solution unreliable. For nonlinear problems, incremental changes in the singularity ratio

reflects approaching instabilities. Marc then prints the time at the end of the matrix solution. This is the

time at the end of matrix triangularization.

singularity ratio

1.8140e-01

end of matrix solution

time =

0.25

At this stage, Marc enters a back substitution for the displacements. This is followed by calculation of

element stress values. Default yield stress is set by Marc for a linear elastic analysis.

0.

plate with hole

element with highest stress relative to yield is

0.309e-19 of yield

8

A heading is printed next. The Tresca Intensity is output for application in ASME code applications. The

Mises intensity is the equivalent yield stress. Principal stress and strain values are output. This is followed

by individual stress and strain components. The number of each column is to be used with the key printed

at the beginning of the analysis.

tresca

mises

mean

p r i n c i p a l

v a l u e s

o m p o n e n t s

intensity intensity normal minimum intermediate maximum

1

5

6

p h y s i c a l

2

intensity

element

20 point

4

integration pt. coordinate=

0.234e+00

0.121e+01

section thickness = 0.100e+00

engsts 5.802e-01 5.413e-01-1.342e-01-4.914e-01 0.000e+00 8.880e-02-4.531e-01 5.052e-02-1.440e-01

engstn 2.514e-08 1.550e-08-3.131e-09-1.727e-08 0.000e+00 7.874e-09-1.561e-08 6.215e-09-1.248e-08

element

20 point

6

integration pt. coordinate=

0.261e+00

0.137e+01

section thickness = 0.100e+00

engsts 6.055e-01 5.255e-01-2.275e-02-3.369e-01 0.000e+00 2.686e-01-2.677e-01 1.995e-01-1.926e-01

engstn 2.624e-08 1.518e-08-5.307e-10-1.391e-08 0.000e+00 1.232e-08-1.092e-08 9.326e-09-1.669e-08

The stress and strain results are followed by the increment of displacements and the total displacements

for all the nodes. If it is requested to print and store all stress points, a printout of the reaction forces would

follow the displacement output.

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

n o d a l

p o i n t

i n c r e m e n t a l

1 -2.17163e-08

7.15861e-08

4 -4.76926e-08

7 -4.39062e-08

1.49932e-08

4.43055e-08

d a t a

d i s p l a c e m e n t s

2 -3.08177e-08

5.15029e-08

3 -4.07290e-08

3.20392e-

08

5 -5.04297e-08

8 -5.45603e-08

t o t a l

1 -2.17163e-08

7.15861e-08

4 -4.76926e-08

7 -4.39062e-08

1.49932e-08

4.43055e-08

0.

0.

6 -2.76616e-08

9 -3.22702e-08

9.27126e-08

1.16274e-07

d i s p l a c e m e n t s

2 -3.08177e-08

5.15029e-08

3 -4.07290e-08

3.20392e-

08

5 -5.04297e-08

8 -5.45603e-08

0.

0.

6 -2.76616e-08

9 -3.22702e-08

9.27126e-08

1.16274e-07

1

4

7

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

2

5

8

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

3

6

9

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

1

1.21431e-17 -3.61690e-16

1.24033e-16 -1.11022e-16

3 -1.86483e-16

9.54098e-

1.31839e-16

1.42247e-16

5 -4.68375e-17 -4.27307e-02

6 -7.19910e-17

1.66533e-

7 -5.20417e-18

1.11022e-16

17

16

8 -3.96005e-17 -0.11445

9 -1.72388e-17

0.00000e+00

-0.72045e-17

0.50000e+00

summary of reaction/residual forces

-0.50000e+00

The results are concluded with an indication of the magnitude of distributed loads.

distributed load

list number

1

type

8

current

magnitude

-1.000

0.

0.

1.04083e-16

Chapter 1 Introduction 58

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

The SUMMARY model definition option prompts Marc to print summary tables of stresses and strains

as follows:

************************************************************************

************************************************************************

*

*

*

elastic analysis of a thin plate with hole

*

*

*

*

increment

0

MARC 2010

*

*

*

************************************************************************

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

quantity

*

value

* elem.* int.*layer*

*

*

*number*point*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

************************************************************************

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max first comp. of stress

* 0.52712e+00 *

7 * 2 *

1 *

* min first comp. of stress

* -0.11257e+01 *

18 * 7 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max second comp. of stress

* 0.31370e+01 *

8 * 3 *

1 *

* min second comp. of stress

* -0.75958e-01 *

18 * 4 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max third comp. of stress

* 0.15887e+00 *

18 * 1 *

1 *

* min third comp. of stress

* -0.84812e+00 *

7 * 3 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max

equivalent

stress

* 0.30910e+01 *

8 * 3 *

1 *

* min

equivalent

stress

* 0.26979e+00 *

17 * 4 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max

mean

stress

* 0.10821e+01 *

8 * 3 *

1 *

* min

mean

stress

* -0.38696e+00 *

18 * 7 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max

tresca

stress

* 0.31419e+01 *

8 * 3 *

1 *

* min

tresca

stress

* 0.29647e+00 *

17 * 4 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max first comp. of total strain

* 0.58578e-08 *

7 * 1 *

1 *

* min first comp. of total strain

* -0.37172e-07 *

18 * 7 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max second comp. of total strain

* 0.10347e-06 *

8 * 3 *

1 *

* min second comp. of total strain

* 0.34023e-08 *

17 * 7 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max third comp. of total strain

* 0.13769e-07 *

18 * 1 *

1 *

* min third comp. of total strain

* -0.73504e-07 *

7 * 3 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max

equivalent

total strain

* 0.87678e-07 *

8 * 3 *

1 *

* min

equivalent

total strain

* 0.77458e-08 *

17 * 4 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max

mean

total strain

* 0.00000e+00 *

1 * 1 *

1 *

* min

mean

total strain

* 0.00000e+00 *

1 * 1 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

************************************************************************

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

The message end of increment 0 signifies the end of analysis for 0th increment. Additional output

concerns only with post plottings. The output is finally concluded by plot messages, since plotting

was requested.

************************************************************************

************************************************************************

*

*

*

elastic analysis of a thin plate with hole

*

*

*

*

increment

0

MARC 2010

*

*

*

************************************************************************

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

quantity

*

value

* elem.* int.*layer*

*

*

*number*point*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

************************************************************************

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max

tresca

total strain

* 0.13162e-06 *

8 * 3 *

1 *

* min

tresca

total strain

* 0.12847e-07 *

17 * 4 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max temperature

* 0.00000e+00 *

1 * 1 *

1 *

* min temperature

* 0.00000e+00 *

1 * 1 *

1 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

************************************************************************

************************************************************************

Chapter 1 Introduction 60

Discussion of Marc Output for New Users

******************************************************************

******************************************************************

*

*

*

elastic analysis of a thin plate with hole

*

*

increment

0

Marc 2010

*

*

*

******************************************************************

*

*

*

*

*

quantity

*

value

* node *

*

*

* number *

*

*

*

*

******************************************************************

*

*

*

*

* max first comp. of incremental disp * -0.19968e-08 *

48 *

* min first comp. of incremental disp * -0.73223e-07 *

21 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max second comp. of incremental disp *

0.20382e-06 *

61 *

* min second comp. of incremental disp *

0.14872e-07 *

26 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max first comp. of total disp.

* -0.19968e-08 *

48 *

* min first comp. of total disp.

* -0.73223e-07 *

21 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max second comp. of total disp.

*

0.20382e-06 *

61 *

* min second comp. of total disp.

*

0.14872e-07 *

26 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max first comp. of reaction force

*

0.12293e-01 *

73 *

* min first comp. of reaction force

* -0.13867e-01 *

57 *

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

* max second comp. of reaction force

* -0.13839e-01 *

34 *

* min second comp. of reaction force

* -0.11445e+00 *

8 *

*

*

*

*

******************************************************************

******************************************************************

e n d

o f

time =

i n c r e m e n t

1.17

Chapter 2 Parameters List

Parameters List

Parameter

Page

$NO LIST

80

ABLATION

126

ACCUMULATE

157

ACOUSTIC

134

ADAPTIVE

87

ALIAS

158

ALL POINTS

149

ALLOCATE

70

APPBC

156

ASSUMED STRAIN

107

AUTOMSET

186

AUTOSPC

188

BEAM SECT

191

BEARING

129

Parameter

Page

BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

181

BUCKLE

112

CAVITY

138

CENTROID

148

COMMENT

162

CONSTANT DILATATION

106

COUPLE

116

CREEP

113

CURING

128

DECOUPLING

117

DESIGN OPTIMIZATION

86

DESIGN SENSITIVITY

85

DIFFUSION

125

DIST LOADS

176

DYNAMIC

91

ELASTIC

84

ELASTICITY

108

ELECTRO

130

ELEMENTS

73

EL-MA

132

ELSTO

169

END

82

EXTENDED

81

FEATURE

75

FILMS

178

FINITE

105

FLUID

118

Parameter

Page

FLUXES

177

FOLLOW FOR

110

FOURIER

90

HARMONIC

93

HEAT

122

IBOOC

171

INCLUDE

173

INPUT TAPE

168

IO-DEACTIVATE

189

ISTRESS

154

JOULE

124

LARGE DISP

98

LARGE STRAIN

99

LINEAR

89

LOAD COR

150

LUMP

155

MACHINING

140

MAGNETO

131

MNF

143

MPC-CHECK

185

NEW

160

NO ECHO

172

NO LOADCOR

151

NOTES

167

OOC

170

Parameter

Page

PIEZO

133

PLASTICITY

109

PORE

120

PREALLOC

PRINT

PROCESSOR

72

163

77

PYROLYSIS

127

RADIATION

135

RBE

139

RESPONSE

95

RESTRICTOR

179

REZONING

142

R-P FLOW

96

SCALE

152

SHELL SECT

182

SIZING

71

SPFLOW

97

SS-ROLLING

94

STATE VARS

175

STOP

166

STRUCTURAL

115

SUPER

144

TABLE

161

THERMAL

153

TIE

184

TITLE

69

TSHEAR

183

T-T-T

121

Parameter

UNIT

Page

79

UPDATE

104

USER

145

VERSION

74

VISCO ELAS

114

WELDING

180

Chapter 2: Parameters

Marc Volume C: Program Input

Parameters

Analysis Types

68

83

141

147

159

174

190

This chapter describes the parameter section of the Marc input file. It is the first section of the file. The

parameter section is used to specify the title of the file, the work space requirements, the elements to be

used in the analysis, and the type of analysis to be performed. It is organized according to loosely defined

categories of parameter types, as shown in the above list.

Only the TITLE, ELEMENTS, and END parameters are required. Optional parameters flag the use of

certain elements, analysis capabilities, or change the default values. The first ten columns of the

parameter data are reserved for the key words which control the input of the parameters. These key words

must be entered as left justified. Some options are set by the order in which data is input.

Chapter 2: Parameters 68

Basic Input Requirements

69 TITLE

Output Title Definition

TITLE

Description

This required parameter defines the output title. There is no limit to the number of the title data read in

as long as the word TITLE appears in the first field. However, only the last TITLE data is used as an output

header. Due to the free-format processor, do not place commas within the TITLE data (Columns 11-80).

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Type Entry

1-10

1st

11-80

2nd

ALLOCATE 70

Initial Workspace Definition

ALLOCATE

Description

This parameter allows the specification of memory to be allocated at the start of the job. Marc uses

additional memory if necessary and it is available. See Appendix B Workspace Definition and the Sizing

Option for more details. Values which are too large waste memory. The initial allocation can be done for

the following parts.

General memory: This specifies the initial allocation of the so-called general memory. This is used for

boundary condition data, material data, storing element stiffness matrices, and part or all of the assembled

global stiffness matrix among other things. Please note that element data like stresses and strains are no

longer part of the general memory starting with the 2005r3 release. Solver 0 also uses the general memory

area for the decomposition of the stiffness matrix. Initial allocation of the general memory can be used

for avoiding reallocation (increase of the workspace). For parallel processing, the amount specified is the

total for the job. It is divided by the number of domains used.

Matrix solver: This specifies the initial allocation of memory for solver 8. By giving a value that is more

than the maximum used during the run, one avoids that the solver workspace is increased (reallocated).

This can be particularly useful for large contact jobs, where additional memory may be allocated due to

contact. If the given workspace is less than what is needed, it is automatically increased. This option is

only for use with solver type 8. No check is done to see if solver type 8 is used in the job. For parallel

processing, the amount specified is the total for the job. It is divided by the number of domains used.

Format

Format

Free

Fixed

Data

Type Entry

1-8

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

71 SIZING

Working Space Definition

SIZING

Description

This parameter can be used to specify the maximum number of nodes and elements.

The values for the maximum number of elements and nodes should be set to an upper-bound if a manual

rezoning analysis is performed. In general for other cases, they are not needed.

If the number of elements or nodes in the model is greater than the value of MAXNUM in the include

file located in the tools directory, then either the value of MAXNUM should be increased or the number

of elements and nodes should be given on the SIZING parameter. The default value for MAXNUM is

one million. The value of MAXNUM may also be set using the environment value of MSC_MMEM. This is

often preferable to changing the include file.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Type Entry

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-25

3rd

26-30

4th

PREALLOC 72

Initial Workspace Allocation

PREALLOC

Description

This parameter allows the specification of memory to be allocated at the start of the job. The workspace

for solver 8, given in the second field, is used for allocating the workspace for the solver before any other

memory is allocated. By giving a value that is more than the maximum used during the run, one avoids

that the solver workspace is increased (reallocated). This can be particularly useful on 32 bit systems for

large jobs. If the given workspace is less than what is needed, it is automatically increased.

This option is only for use with solver type 8. No check is done to see if solver type 8 is used in the job. In

a job using parallel processing, the allocation applies to the local domain and is the same on all domains.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Sparse Solver).

73 ELEMENTS

Element Type Selection

ELEMENTS

Description

This required parameter is used to identify the elements used in the analysis. Element codes for all the

allowable element types are found in Marc Volume B: Element Library. This data can be repeated as often

as necessary.

Note that the ALIAS parameter is available to change element library code descriptions on the

CONNECTIVITY model definition option.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

Etc.

Etc.

VERSION 74

Indicate the Version of the Marc Input Data File

VERSION

Description

This parameter is used to control which version of the program to use from an input perspective and a

defaults perspective. The following numbers are appropriate.

9

10

11

12

Note:

If this parameter is not included or is given a value of zero, it is automatically set to nine.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 for multiphysics input associated with Marc 2008 and earlier

versions (default).

Enter 2 for multiphysics input based upon defining physics type on

material and control options.

75 FEATURE

Specification of the Behavior of a Feature

FEATURE

Description

This parameter allows the user to specify that a particular feature is to be defined in a selected data style.

This permits data files to maintain compatibility with older versions of the program while still utilizing

the latest technology.

Currently, the following options used this capability:

Option

Feature ID

(ifeat)

Consequence

RADIATION

3301

version 11.

RADIATION

3302

version 11.

MOONEY, ARRUDBOYCE,

GENT, OGDEN

3402

formulations and permits use of series representation of

volumetric strain energy function.

5700

default.

5701

instead, read off the CONTROL option.

5800

5801

element performance especially for distorted meshes (linear

analysis only).

5802

1002

elements only.

4401

computational costs.

5301

behavior for self contact, but often leads to increase costs. It

should only be used if no other method resolves penetration

problems.

-53xx

+53xx

xx>5

6601

CONTROL

CONTACT

FEATURE 76

Specification of the Behavior of a Feature

Feature ID

(ifeat)

Option

Consequence

8201

10201

in contact.

PIN CODE

6901

freedom. This is not recommended for dynamics.

HEAT

7001

conditions to improve compatibility with 2005 r3.

7902

Used for higher order tetrahedral elements 127, 130 and 133:

check inside-out condition based upon 16 integration points.

DIST LOADS

10101

on the face or edge are in contact. This feature internally

turns on FOLLOW FOR parameter.

Postprocessor

10401

stress free projection in contact analysis. This resolves some

problems associated with external post processors.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

feature IDs per line.

77 PROCESSOR

Parallelization Control

PROCESSOR

Parallelization Control

Description

This parameter may be used to specify the decomposition of the model when the single input DDM

procedure is used. It is necessary to start the analysis using the -nps command line argument. For more

details, see Table 2-3: Keyword Descriptions in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 2:

Program Initiation.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

26-30

5th

31-35

6th

36-40

7th

Decomposition method:

Enter 10 to use user specified decomposition (the user domains are

specified using the DEFINE element set option with name of domain*)

Enter 11 to use Metis Best decomposition; default.

Enter 12 to use Metis Element-Based decomposition.

Enter 13 to use Metis Node-Based decomposition.

Enter 14 to use Vector decomposition.

Enter 15 to use Radial decomposition.

Enter 16 to use Angular decomposition.

Enter 17 to use Recursive Coordinate Bisection decomposition.

41-45

8th

46-50

9th

0 - No additional input

1 - Additional Input (Data Blocks 2 and 3 required)

PROCESSOR 78

Parallelization Control

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

0 - Do not attempt to remove Islands

1 - Attempt to remove Islands

2 - Detect contact during Decomposition; do not attempt to remove

Islands

3 - Detect contact during Decomposition; attempt to remove Islands

6-10

2nd

(Default is 0)

0 - Coarse Graph

1 - Fine Graph

11-15

3rd

0 - Use Centroid of the Bounding Box of the model

1 - User-supplied point; defined in 4th, 5th, and 6th fields of 3rd data

block.

16-25

4th

cost of domains. Range <0.,1.0>. Default is 1.0 (use full element weight).

0 means do not use element weight.

1-10

1st

First direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15, or

16.

11-20

2nd

Second direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15,

or 16.

21-30

3rd

Third direction cosine of vector used for Decomposition method 14, 15,

or 16.

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

79 UNIT

Invoke Unit System Definition

UNIT

Description

This parameter allows users to specify the unit system used in the analysis. The material data read in from

the material data base or from the ISOTROPIC, WORK HARD, TEMPERATURE EFFECTS, MATERIAL

DATA, GRAIN SIZE, and PARAMETERS options are converted to this set of units where appropriate.

The output indicates both the user-defined quantity and the converted value. Note that if the material data

is entered through a user subroutine, it must be consistent with the unit type specified here. This option

is not applied to data entered through the TABLE option. Hence, the data must be consistent with the unit

type entered here. For material data, it is advantageous to enter data normalized with respect to the

reference value to avoid this problem. If this parameter is not included, no conversions are performed.

If this parameter is included, the display of the results indicate the unit of the resultant quantity.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 for SI-millimeter unit.

Enter 3 for US-inch unit.

Notes:

The unit is assumed to be SI-mm if this parameter is not used.

$NO LIST 80

No Listing of Input Data

$NO LIST

Description

Using this parameter results in the suppression of the printout of the remainder of the input file.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

81 EXTENDED

Extended Precision of Reading in Data

EXTENDED

Description

This parameter is used to indicate that models are to be in extended precision and/or a large number of

elements or nodes exist in the model. If this option is included, the width of all the data fields described

in this manual must be doubled. For example, all I5 integer fields change to I10. If this parameter is

included, all input lines must be in this format.

Note that the post file is written in 32 bit integer mode so the largest element of node ID is still limited

to about one billion.

Note that all floating point numbers are stored in double precision. So, when using the EXTENDED

parameter, one can have about 15 digits of precision for coordinate positions.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

END 82

End of Parameter Section

END

Description

This required parameter terminates the input of parameter data, signaling the end of the

parameter section.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

83

Analysis Types

er 2:

Para

meter

s

ELASTIC 84

Elastic Analysis with Multi-loads

ELASTIC

Description

When this option is invoked, each load case is independent. Total loads must be input with the POINT

LOAD, DIST LOADS, or CHANGE STATE/THERMAL LOADS model definition options after END

OPTION.

If the direct solver is invoked, the decomposed stiffness matrix is used for each load case and only a back

substitution on a series of load vectors is performed.

When the ADAPTIVE meshing option is used in conjunction with this parameter, only the loads before

the END OPTION (increment zero) are considered. This load is then re-analyzed until the error criteria

is satisfied.

Notes:

This data should never be used with any data which flags nonlinear analysis or which

change the stiffness matrix; for example, the LARGE DISP parameter or the DISP CHANGE

option.

If temperature dependent material properties are included, then a new assembly is

performed (if temperature loading is on).

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Set to 1, so that creep, swelling, plastic, incremental strains, plastic strain

rates, and incremental stresses are not stored.

Set to 2, so that strain energies, thermal strains, and elastic strains are

not stored.

Note:

If you request these items on the post file and they are not

stored, the information is incorrect.

85 DESIGN SENSITIVITY

Perform Sensitivity Analysis Only

DESIGN SENSITIVITY

Description

This parameter invokes the design sensitivity capability in Marc. In this release, the capability is

restricted to linear static structural analysis and eigenvalue analysis. This option requires the model

definition options: DESIGN VARIABLES and at least one of DESIGN DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS,

DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRAIN CONSTRAINTS, or DESIGN FREQUENCY

CONSTRAINTS. If multiple load cases are to be evaluated, the ELASTIC parameter should be included.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-18

1st

characters

N/A

2nd

Enter the word SORT* if you desire to sort the constraints by degree of

criticalness (optional), and also optionally to limit the number of

constraints to be analyzed (see third field).

N/A

3rd

to be analyzed. If no number is entered, the default number (100) of most

critical constraints are isolated by sorting and are subjected to

sensitivity analysis.

*If there are any eigenvalue constraints in the sorted group, these will be output before any static

response constraints. Thus, the first constraint to be output may not always be the most critical one.

DESIGN OPTIMIZATION 86

Perform Design Optimization

DESIGN OPTIMIZATION

Description

This parameter invokes the design optimization capability in Marc. In this release, the capability is

restricted to linear static structural analysis and eigenvalue analysis. This option requires the model

definition options: DESIGN OBJECTIVE, DESIGN VARIABLES and at least one of DESIGN

DISPLACEMENT CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRESS CONSTRAINTS, DESIGN STRAIN

CONSTRAINTS, or DESIGN FREQUENCY CONSTRAINTS. The DESIGN OBJECTIVE option is used to

define the objective function. If multiple load cases are to be evaluated, the ELASTIC parameter should

be included.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-19

1st

12 characters.

N/A

2nd

N/A

3rd

for the active set. This does not limit the number of constraints that can be

prescribed by you.

Default is 100.

N/A

4th

N/A

5th

optimization cycles (including analyses). Default is 20.

The order of the ACTIVESET and CYCLES can be reversed; for example,

Free Formats 4th and 5th become 2nd and 3rd while Free Formats 2nd and

3rd become 4th and 5th.

87 ADAPTIVE

Adaptive Mesh Refinement

ADAPTIVE

Description

This parameter is required when either a local adaptive meshing or global adaptive meshing is to be used

to improve the accuracy and/or mesh quality. The parameter indicates whether fixed bounds are set on

the number of elements and nodes or whether dynamic memory should be used.

Local Adaptive Meshing

The criteria for determining when local remeshing should occur is provided in the ADAPTIVE model

definition option.Local remeshing is available for lower-order shell and continuum elements including

triangular, quadrilateral, tetrahedral, and brick elements.

In an elastic analysis, Marc iterates based upon the excitation given to satisfy an error tolerance. The

ELASTIC parameter must be included. In a steady-state heat transfer, electrostatic, or magnetostatic

In a nonlinear incremental analysis, Marc adapts the mesh at each increment, or user controlled frequency

to improve the solution.

New elements are created as described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.

Global Adaptive Meshing

The criteria for determining when global remeshing is to occur is provided in the ADAPT GLOBAL

model or history definition option. This option also indicates which remeshing procedure is to be used.

Additionally, the REZONING,1 parameter must be used.

Global adaptive meshing is available for lower-order triangular, quadrilateral, and tetrahedral,

continuum, and shell elements in Marc.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-8

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

ADAPTIVE 88

Adaptive Mesh Refinement

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

21-25

4th

nodes or elements created exceeds the maximums specified, the previous

mesh is used.

26-30

5th

otherwise, dynamically allocate more space.

Note:

If only the word ADAPTIVE is entered, the program dynamically allocates memory for the

new elements and nodes (there is no limit to the number of elements or nodes unless all

memory is exceeded).

89 LINEAR

Matrices Saved for Linear Analysis

LINEAR

Description

This parameter allows additional values to be stored rather than being recalculated during subsequent

increments. This means an increase in the overall size of the workspace used for the problem, but can

actually result in a reduced computation time. The efficiency of this parameter is highly dependent upon

the analysis data and the machine on which the problem is computed. It has proven very effective in

reducing computation time for linear elastic and small displacement dynamic problems. When set to 0,

the parameter has also been used effectively on nonlinear problems such as rigid plastic flow.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 to save the BETA matrix and the stress-strain law.

FOURIER 90

Arbitrary Loading of Axisymmetric Structures

FOURIER

Description

This parameter governs the analysis of axisymmetric structures under arbitrary loading by means of the

Fourier series expansion technique. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for a description

of this analysis technique. To perform a modal Fourier analysis, you must include a DYNAMIC parameter.

To perform a Fourier buckling analysis, you must include a BUCKLE parameter.

The Fourier capability assumes that the material is linear elastic and is only available for Fourier

elements, type 62, 63, 73, 74, and 90.

Note:

Fourier analysis is not supported with the table driven input format.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

the circumferential variation of tractions, thermal loads and boundary

conditions.

16-20

3rd

terms is two times the number of harmonics plus one.

21-25

4th

forces or restrained by nonzero boundary conditions described by a

FOURIER series expansion.

26-30

5th

If only symmetric (cos) terms are present in all expansions used, set this

flag to 1. For strictly antisymmetric (sin) expansions, set this flag to 2.

Default is 0 which allows for the full expansion containing sine and

cosine terms.

To skip increments 0 and 1 for symmetric terms only, set this flag to -1. To

skip increments 0, 1 and 2 for antisymmetric terms only, set this flag to -2.

A negative value of this flag means that no constant loading or constant

nonzero boundary condition around the circumference are present.

31-35

6th

during the superposition using CASE COMBIN option. Default is 24.

36-40

7th

Fourier calculation.

91 DYNAMIC

Dynamic Analysis

DYNAMIC

Dynamic Analysis

Description

This parameter sets the flags for one of several possible dynamic analysis methods. Any of several

optional data blocks can be required. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. The MODAL

SHAPE history definition option or the MODAL INCREMENT model definition option controls the

eigenvalue extraction. The DYNAMIC CHANGE or AUTO STEP history definition options control the

time steps. The RECOVER history definition option allows for modal stress recovery or storing

eigenvectors on the post file. Eigenvectors can also be stored on the post file with the MODAL

INCREMENT option.

Notes:

1) The single step Houbolt procedure is the recommended method for nonlinear

transient analysis.

2) The Lanczos method is the recommended method for extracting eigenvalues.

3) The central difference operator do not work with zero mass at any degrees of freedom.

4) The direct integration operators automatically use residual load correction, and this

cannot be overridden. The CENTROID parameter should not be used.

5) The Houbolt (IDYN=3)and central difference (IDYN=4) operators can only be used

with constant time step. If the time step is changed during analysis, results are in error.

The Newmark-beta (IDYN=2), fast central difference operator (IDYN=5), and Single

Step Houbolt (IDYN=6) can use a variable time step.

6) Rigid body modes can be handled by the inverse power sweep or Lanczos method. Use

the flag in the CONTROL option for solving a singular equation.

7) The fast central difference operator can be used with element types (2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10,

11, 18, 19, 20, 52, 64, 75, 98, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120).

8) The Newmark-beta method is unconditionally stable for linear analysis, with = 0.25,

= 0.50. These parameters can be reset through the PARAMETERS option.

9) The central difference (IDYN = 4) operator does not consider damping.

10) The central difference (IDYN = 4 or IDYN = 5) operator cannot be used with

Herrmann elements.

DYNAMIC 92

Dynamic Analysis

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Set to 1 for modal superposition dynamic response.

Set to 2 for Newmark direct integration.

Set to 3 for Houbolt direct integration.

Set to 4 for explicit direct time integration using central difference.

Set to 5 for fast explicit direct integration.

Set to 6 for Single Step Houbolt integration (preferred for implicit dynamic

analysis with contact).

Set to 8 for generalized alpha method direct integration.

16-20

3rd

dynamic option. If the inverse power sweep method is used for eigenvalue

analysis, it is also the number of mode shapes and frequencies to

be extracted.

21-25

4th

Set to 1 to for the Lanczos method.

Set to 3 for Inverse power sweep with single eigenvalue extraction.

26-30

5th

be performed in this analysis.

31-35

6th

36-40

7th

Used only if the 2nd field is 8. Enter 0 (default) if the parameters of the

generalized alpha method are optimized for an analysis involving dynamic

contact; enter 1 if these parameters are optimized for an analysis without

dynamic contact. Note that user-defined values can be entered on the

PARAMETERS model definition or history definition option.

93 HARMONIC

Frequency Response Analysis

HARMONIC

Description

The HARMONIC parameter allows the frequency response analysis to be superimposed

upon the deformed configuration. This parameter can also be used in conjunction with the EL-MA

parameter for electromagnetic (harmonic) analysis or ACOUSTIC parameter for acoustic analysis or

PIEZO parameter for piezoelectric analysis.

Note that the 3rd through 5th fields are not required if the table input format is used.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

damping.

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

26-30

5th

31-35

6th

reaction force. Note that if damping is used, the mass proportional part of

the damping matrix also contributes to the inertia effects.

SS-ROLLING 94

Steady State Transport Analysis

SS-ROLLING

Description

This flag activates steady state rolling analysis. No additional data is needed for this parameter.

Using this procedure, an Eulerian/Lagrange analysis is performed on a body that is spinning about an

axis, which may also be rotating. This is typically applied to tire models, see Marc Volume A: Theory and

User Information for more detail.

Model definition options ROTATION A and CORNERING AXIS are used to define rotation and cornering

axes in a steady state rolling analysis. History definition option, SS-ROLLING, is used to define

parameters such as spinning velocity, cornering velocity, and translational velocities. See the options

descriptions for more details.

Only three-dimensional solid elements are supported in the current release.

This procedure results in a nonsymmetric matrix; hence, the iterative solvers are not available.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

Enter SS-RO.

95 RESPONSE

Spectrum Response Analysis

RESPONSE

Description

This parameter allows you to perform a spectrum response analysis. See Marc Volume A: Theory and

User Information for detailed directions. The modes used are specified in the SPECTRUM response load

incrementation data. To perform a spectrum response calculation, it is also necessary to include the

DYNAMIC parameter and either the MODAL INCREMENT or MODAL SHAPE option.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter the number of data points used to specify spectral density function.

Enter 0 to use the USSD user subroutine.

R-P FLOW 96

Rigid-Plastic Flow

R-P FLOW

Rigid-Plastic Flow

Description

This parameter is used to specify a rigid, perfectly-plastic flow analysis. See Marc Volume A: Theory and

User Information for an introduction to this technique. This parameter is used either with the Herrmann

elements or with conventional elements. In the latter case, a penalty function is used to apply the

incompressibility constraint. The penalty factor is defined through the PARAMETERS history

definition option.

This parameter has two modes. In the first mode, a steady state solution is obtained.

This parameter can also be used for the analysis of laminar fluid flow problems. See the UNEWTN user

subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines. This method requires iteration on

the velocity field for convergence; convergence controls are input in the CONTROL option.

In the second mode, a transient solution is obtained. This mode is always used in contact problems. This

method required iteration on the incremental displacements. Increment 0 is suppressed.

In this formulation, if the strain rate falls below a certain value, the material is effectively rigid. This

cutoff value is specified through the PARAMETERS history definition option.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-8

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 for transient procedure (default).

16-20

3rd

Option 2 is not available.

Enter 3 for variable penalty factor (adjusted to limit volume loss).

97 SPFLOW

Superplastic Forming Analysis

SPFLOW

Description

This parameter specifies the use of data for superplastic forming analysis. Use of this parameter

automatically turns on the FOLLOW FOR,1 parameter. See ISOTROPIC model definition option for use

of power law and rate power law hardening models (only available hardening rules for superplastic

forming) and SUPERPLASTIC history definition option for control parameters in this document for

more information.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

LARGE DISP 98

Large Displacement or Buckling

LARGE DISP

Description

This parameter is used to specify large displacement or buckling analysis. It signals Marc to calculate the

geometric stiffness matrix and the initial stress stiffness matrix. This parameter automatically switches

on the residual load correction option and switches off the scaling option. Default is no large

displacement terms. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for more information about large

displacement and buckling analysis.

Note:

The CENTROID parameter should not be used in conjunction with this parameter.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

99 LARGE STRAIN

Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation

LARGE STRAIN

Description

This option indicates that a nonlinear structural problem will be performed where either the

displacements and/or the strains will be large. If no other options are specified, Marc automatically

chooses the procedure used based upon the material model selected and the element type for each element

group. If possible, the updated Lagrange procedure is the preferred procedure. In a few special cases that

are discussed below, the total Lagrange procedure is automatically flagged but can be over-ridden by the

3rd field of the LARGE STRAIN option.

Procedures

For more details on the available procedures, the user is referred to Marc Volume A: Theory And User

Information, Chapter 5. A brief synopsis is provided here to highlight the approach that is internally

flagged when the LARGE STRAIN is used.

Updated Lagrange: The equations of equilibrium are formed on the current configuration. The Cauchy

stresses and logarithmic strains are the prevailing stress and strain measures. The updated Lagrange

procedure comes in two flavors: Additive Decomposition and Multiplicative Decomposition.

a. Additive Decomposition:

This is an incremental approach where the total incremental strain is formed by using

= th + e + p +

where th is the incremental thermal strain, e is the incremental elastic strain, p is the

incremental plastic strain, etc.

b. Multiplicative Decomposition:

Here, the strain measure is based on the deformation gradient F which, in general, is given by

th e p

F = F F F

where F p is the thermal deformation gradient, F e is the elastic deformation gradient and F p

is the plastic deformation gradient. When there is no plasticity (e.g. rubber elasticity), F p is

unity.

Total Lagrange: The equations of equilibrium are formed on the original configuration. The 2nd PiolaKirchhoff stresses and Green-Lagrange strains are the prevailing stress and strain measures.

Selection of Procedure:

When LARGE STRAIN is specified, the selection of the procedure used is based upon three criteria.

1. Large strain hyperelastic material models vs. small elastic strain Elastic or Elastic-Plastic Models.

2. Displacement elements vs. Herrmann (Mixed) elements.

3. Three dimension state of stress (3-D, plane strain, axisymmetric) vs. plane stress condition.

Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation

Hyperelastic Materials

The large strain hyperelastic materials are either incompressible or nearly incompressible which are

defined through the MOONEY, OGDEN, GENT, or ARRUDBOYCE options or highly compressible

defined in the FOAM option.

For the case of large strain incompressible rubber materials the following procedure will be used by

default.

Herrmann Element

stress

Updated Lagrange F e

Updated Lagrange - F e

Total Lagrange

For the case of large strain compressible foam materials the following procedure will be used by default.

Herrmann Element

stress

Not Available

Updated Lagrange - F e

Total Lagrange

Isotropic Materials

The ISOTROPIC option is formulated for small elastic strains but may include large plastic (inelastic)

strains. The procedure used by default is based upon three subcriteria, whether a yield stress is provided,

the type of yield surface (von Mises or other) or other material factors. The procedure to be used is also

controlled by the suboption used: LARGE STRAIN,1 or LARGE STRAIN,2.

When LARGE STRAIN, 1 is used, the options can be summarized as follows:

Herrmann Element

not plane stress

plane stress

No Yield

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

ELASTIC

Updated Lagrange - F e

Total Lagrange

Total Lagrange

Updated Lagrange

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

F F

Other Yield or

Cracking

Not Available

Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

No Yield refers to the yield type set to blank in this case, the formulation is the same as that used for

Von Mises Yield. Other Yield or Cracking includes Linear Mohr-Columb, Parabolic Mohr-Coulomb,

Buyokozturk Concrete, ORNL yield rules, Hill, Barlat, Shima Oyane, Exponential Cap, Generalized

Plasticity, Cam Clay.

Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation

One observes that in the case of an ISOTROPIC option with an ELASTIC yield stress type, Marc

switches to a total Lagrange formulation for displacement elements. This switch occurs only for the

elastic material under the following circumstances: no creep data, no failure data, no damage data, not

associated with a gasket and not a shell or beam element (i.e., only for 2-D plane strain, axisymmetric,

plane stress and 3-D continuum elements excluding the solid shell). This switch to total Lagrange may

be useful when there is frequent loading and unloading. Since the total Lagrange formulation is based on

a strain energy functional, a zero stress state at complete unloading is captured. If an updated additive

formulation is desired even for these conditions, then one can avoid the internal total Lagrange switch by

setting the 3rd field of the LARGE STRAIN option to a 1 (i.e., LARGE STRAIN,1,1). In this case, the

following formulations are used for the elastic material:

Herrmann Element

Elastic

Updated Lagrange - F e

not plane stress

plane stress

Updated Lagrange Additive

One observes that in the case of an ISOTROPIC option with a von Mises yield stress type, Marc default

is to use the additive decomposition of strain. In situations where elastic strains may be larger (e.g.

polymers) or when there is loading/unloading, the additive decomposition may not yield sufficient

accuracy and it may be desired to use the multiplicative formulation. This can be achieved by setting the

2nd field of the LARGE STRAIN option to 2.

The following formulations are used for LARGE STRAIN,2 in conjunction with an isotropic material

Herrmann Element

No Yield

Updated Lagrange -

not plane stress

plane stress

Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange - F e F p

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

e p

F F

ELASTIC

Updated Lagrange - F e

F F

Other Yield or

Cracking

Not available

Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation

Other Materials

For the ORTHOTROPIC or ANISOTROPIC material model the updated Lagrange F e F p formulation is not

available and the additive procedure is used where appropriate.

Herrmann Element

not plane stress

plane stress

No Yield

Not available

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

ELASTIC

Total Lagrange

Total Lagrange

Total Lagrange

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

Other Yield or

Cracking

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

Updated Lagrange

Additive - Finite

Not Available

Note that the internal switch to total Lagrange for ELASTIC can again be prevented by using LARGE

STRAIN,1,1. When the 1 on the 3rd field is activated, then Updated Lagrange Additive is used for the

orthotropic/anisotropic elastic material.

For cohesive materials which are used in conjunction with the interface elements, the relationship is

between the traction and the opening displacement which always takes into account the large

deformations and rotations.

For gasket materials which are used in conjunction with continuum composite elements, the LARGE

STRAIN option results in an updated Lagrange additive formulation.

For the NLELAST family of material models, the option initiates an updated Lagrange additive

formulation.

For the rigid-plastic problem, there are two variants: steady-state and transient. For the transient

procedure, the Updated Lagrange Additive formulation is used.

For the HYPOELASTIC material model, the option sets the flags for an Updated Lagrange Additive

formulation. The user is provided with quantities like F (deformation gradient), R (rotation tensor), etc.

in HYPELA2.F to provide flexibility in either using an additive or multiplicative formulation.

For the SHAPE MEMORY material model, the Updated Lagrange Additive formulation is set for the

thermo-mechanical model and the Updated Lagrange Multiplicative formulation is set for the mechanical

model.

For the SOIL material model, the Updated Lagrange Additive formulation is set.

Miscellaneous

It is important to note that the updated Lagrange additive or multiplicative procedure is not available for

some classes of elements including the rebar elements, Fourier elements, pipe bend (type 17), cable

Large Strain Analysis with Updated Lagrange Formulation

element (type51), shear panel (type 68), axisymmetric with bending (types 95 and 96) and piezoelectric

elements. Also, the updated Lagrange multiplicative procedure is not available for 3-D shells.

If a procedure is chosen which is not available for a particular material/element type, the program will

terminate with an Exit 13.

When using the updated Lagrange procedure, the material data should be provided with respect to the

Cauchy stress and logarithmic strain; and the output will be provided using these measures as well.

When the LARGE STRAIN option is used but the total Lagrange formulation is activated, the material

data should be provided with respect to the 2nd Piola Kirchhoff stress and the Green Lagrange strain. It

should also be noted that while the 2nd Piola Kirchhoff stresses are used for the total Lagrange analysis,

the stress quantities put on the post file for post codes 17, 117, 11 16, 111 116, 311, 391, 397 are the

appropriate Cauchy stresses.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

analysis.

= 1 Hypoelasticity and additive plasticity with mean normal return

mapping (default)

=2 Hyperelasticity and multiplicative plasticity with radial

return mapping.

16-20

3rd

possible.

If set to 1 then the total Lagrange formulation is not internally activated

for elastic materials.

UPDATE 104

Updated Lagrange Procedure

UPDATE

Description

This parameter flags the use of the classical updated Lagrange procedure for elastic-plastic materials, the

elements for which such a formulation can be applied. The use of the procedure has two consequences.

First, the element stiffnesses are assembled in the current configuration of the element. Second, the stress

and strain output is given in the coordinate system which is applicable in the updated configuration of

the element.

The procedure is useful for analysis of shell and beam structures where rotations are large and the

nonlinear terms in the curvature expressions can no longer be neglected.

The updated Lagrange procedure can be used with or without the LARGE DISP parameter. With the

LARGE DISP parameter invoked, the effect of the internal stresses on the stiffness is taken into account.

Also, the strain increment is calculated to second order accuracy and, hence, large rotation increments

might be allowed. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a list of the elements that can be used in

an updated Lagrangian analysis. Instead of invoking the LARGE DISP parameter, the 4th entry of the

UPDATE parameter can be set to 1.

When the UPDATE parameter is used in conjunction with a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the element

conductivity is assembled based on the current configuration of the element.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

available for beam element types 52, 76, 77, 78, 79, and 98.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 to account for the effect of the internal stresses on the stiffness.

105 FINITE

Finite Strain Plasticity

FINITE

Description

This parameter flags the use of the large strain plasticity option. With this option invoked, the effects of

the change in metric due to large inelastic deformations is included. This results in a different stiffness of

the structure as well as in a modified calculation of stresses and inelastic strains. This parameter is only

used for the elements which are formulated in terms of the updated Lagrange procedure. When using this

parameter, true stresses are printed out.

The UPDATE parameter must be included in all cases when this parameter is invoked. When the FINITE

parameter is used, the work hardening slope for plasticity is defined as the rate of true stress versus the

true plastic strain rate. Hence, the work hardening curve must be entered as the true stress versus

logarithmic plastic strain curve in a uniaxial tension test. The anisotropic plasticity formulation cannot

be used with this option. The finite strain option in Marc is written such that fairly large strain increments

(up to 3%) can be allowed. However, large increments can result in many recycles as well as in decreased

accuracy.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-6

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

Define That Elements Are to Use Constant Dilatation Formulation

CONSTANT DILATATION

Constant Dilatation Formulation

Description

When performing nearly incompressible analysis with displacement based elements, the conventional

isoparametric interpolation methods result in poor behavior for lower order elements. This results in

overly stiff behavior when using element type 7, 149 (brick), type 10, 152 (axisymmetric), type 11, 151

(plane strain), type 19 (generalized plane strain), type 20 (axisymmetric with twist), or 136 (pentahedral).

When this option is included, all elements of these types are modified to use the constant dilatation

formulation. This is recommended for elastic-plastic analysis and creep analysis because of the

potentially nearly incompressible behavior.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-8

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

Improved Bending Behavior

ASSUMED STRAIN

Description

The bending behavior can be improved by using the assumed strain formulation for element type 3, 160

(plane stress), type 11, 161 (plane strain), and type 7, 163 (brick). This procedure replaces the standard

linear interpolation functions with an enriched group that is able to represent pure bending behavior. This

formulation results in improved accuracy for isotropic behavior, but it should be noted that the

computational costs increase.

Note:

This option may not be used with all material behavior and is deactivated for those

elements for which it is not applicable.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

ELASTICITY 108

Elasticity Procedure

ELASTICITY

Elasticity Procedure

Description

This option can be used to define which formulation is used for large strain elasticity, including rubber

and foam materials. The default is total Lagrange elasticity procedure. For rubber materials, either total

(using Herrmann elements) or updated Lagrange (using either Herrmann or displacement elements) can

be used. For foam, either total or updated Lagrange procedure is supported using the displacement based

elements. The updated Lagrange procedure does not support plane stress elements and switches to total

Lagrange procedure for these elements. For more details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and

User Information.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 for updated Lagrange formulation.

109 PLASTICITY

Plasticity Procedure

PLASTICITY

Plasticity Procedure

Description

This option can be used to define the plasticity procedure that is used in Marc. The default is the mean

normal procedure for satisfying the yield criteria and the additive decomposition of the incremental

strains into elastic and plastic parts. For problems which have large elastic and plastic strains, the

multiplicative decomposition is more accurate. The multiplicative decomposition implementation

requires that the elasticity is isotropic. For more details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for additive decomposition using the mean normal method; small

strain formulation (default).

Enter 2 for additive decomposition using the radial return method; small

strain formulation.

Enter 3 for additive decomposition using the mean normal method; large

strain formulation using the updated Lagrange procedure.

Enter 4 for additive decomposition using the radial return method; large

strain formulation using the updated Lagrange procedure.

Enter 5 for multiplicative decomposition (FeFp) using the radial return

method and the three field variational principle; large strain formulation

using the updated Lagrange procedure.

Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current Geometry Application of Total

Boundary Condition

FOLLOW FOR

Current Geometry Application of Total Boundary Condition

Description

The FOLLOW FOR parameter is used for follower force (for example, pressure) problems. Separate flags

under this parameter are used to control follower forces for distributed loads and point loads respectively.

When this parameter is used with default values for the associated flags, all distributed loads are formed

on the basis of current geometry. This parameter requires the use of the residual load correction and,

therefore, forces the use of that option regardless of other parameters (for example, the NO LOADCOR

parameter is ignored).

Whenever FOLLOW FOR is used, the distributed load magnitude given in the FORCEM user subroutine

must be the total magnitude to be reached after the current increment, and not the incremental magnitude.

In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the fluxes are based upon the current geometry.

When the table driven input procedure is not used, boundary conditions in structural analysis are

normally entered as incremental values. To specify total values, use the third field of this option.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

(default).

Enter 2 if follower force stiffness due to distributed loads is to be included.

Enter 3 if the follower force for distributed loads is based upon the

displacement at the beginning of the increment, as opposed to the last

iteration.

Enter -1 if the undeformed geometry is required but total values of

distributed loads are to be used.

16-20

3rd

DISP CHANGE, POINT LOAD, and DIST LOADS options as opposed to

the default incremental loads.

21-25

4th

Enter 1 if follower force for point loads is to be considered.

Follower Forces: Distributed and Point Load Application on Current Geometry Application of Total

Notes:

If the follower force stiffness is included, the use of the SOLVER option can be used to

specify a nonsymmetric formulation. This improves convergence, but results in longer

solver times.

If the 2nd field is 0 and the 4th field is 0, follower force is turned on for all distributed loads

in the model (this allows compatibility with previous versions).

Setting the 4th field to 1 only allows the possibility that point loads can be follower forces.

Individual point loads specified under the POINT LOAD model and history definition

options are used to actually specify if the load is a follower force or not.

Follower force stiffness is not currently available for point loads.

Follower force stiffness for distributed loads is available for element types (3, 7, 10, 11, 18, 72, 75, 80,

82, 84, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 139, 149, 151, 152, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, and 185).

BUCKLE 112

Buckling Load Estimation via Eigenvalue Analysis

BUCKLE

Description

This parameter specifies the use of buckling load estimation by eigenvalue analysis, based on a

perturbation of the tangent stiffness. Multiple eigenvectors are allowed for the case where the closest root

to the current load set is not pertinent. Either the inverse power sweep method or the Lanczos method can

be used. The BUCKLE history definition option or the BUCKLE INCREMENT modal definition option

controls the eigenvalue extraction. The RECOVER history definition option allows for modal stress

recovery or storing eigenvectors on a post file. The LARGE DISP parameter should be included to obtain

the nonlinear collapse load estimate.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

any time.

In many buckling problems, collapse modes corresponding to loads of

opposite magnitude to those of interest exist. By specifying a larger

number of modes (say 5) in Columns 11-15 and one or two modes in this

field, you can ensure getting the one or two modes you are interested in.

Marc stops the modal search when all these modes have been formed, or

when all the modes requested in columns 11-15 have been formed,

whichever occurs first. If this field is left blank, all modes asked for in

columns 11-15 are formed regardless of sign.

21-25

4th

be performed in this analysis.

26-30

5th

31-35

6th

36-40

7th

Enter 1 if Lanczos method is to be used.

113 CREEP

Creep Analysis

CREEP

Creep Analysis

Description

This parameter specifies a creep analysis. For more information about creep analysis, see the Creep

Constitutive Data block model definition option in the section of this manual and Marc Volume A: Theory

and User Information. The Marc CRPLAW and VSWELL user subroutines, used with creep analysis, are

explained in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.

Note:

When using the implicit Maxwell creep model, the stress dependence must be in

exponential form, the CRPLAW user subroutine cannot be used.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter the flag for type of explicit creep analysis. Default of 0, normal

creep (Maxwell Model); 1, viscoplastic creep; 2, viscoplastic creep with

nonassociative flow rule.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 for explicit Kelvin Model. (This is identical to the VISCO ELAS

parameter.)

21-25

4th

26-30

5th

When using the implicit Maxwell creep model, the stress dependence

must be in exponential form, the CRPLAW user subroutine cannot be used.

Enter 0 for elastic tangent

Enter 1 for secant tangent

Enter 2 for radial return

Visco Elastic Analysis (Kelvin Model)

VISCO ELAS

Description

This parameter flags the use of the CRPVIS user subroutine to model generalized Kelvin material

behavior using an explicit procedure. See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for details. This

parameter automatically flags the CREEP option as well, so that Maxwell behavior (VSWELL, CRPLAW

user subroutines can be included with CRPVIS).

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

115 STRUCTURAL

Mechanical Analysis

STRUCTURAL

Mechanical Analysis

Description

This parameter is used in multi-physics analyses if one of the physics types is structural. It is used in

combination with other parameters such as HEAT or ELECTRO. The inclusion of both the STRUCTURAL

and ELECTRO parameters results in a coupled electrostatic-structural analysis. In such a multi-physics

analysis, one pass will be a mechanical analysis and subjected to boundary conditions defined in the

FIXED DISP, POINT LOAD, DIST LOADS, FOUNDATION, and CONTACT options.

The STRUCTURAL parameter may be used in conjunction with:

HEAT

JOULE

ELECTRO

MAGNETO

ACOUSTIC

PIEZO

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

COUPLE 116

Coupled Thermal-Stress Analysis

COUPLE

Description

This parameter allows a coupled thermal-stress analysis. In these problems, the independent variables are

displacements and temperatures. If you define displacement elements in the connectivity, heat transfer

capabilities are included for these elements. To obtain the coupling between plastic work and internal

heat generated, a DIST FLUXES model definition option with a flux type of 101 must be included. The

CUPFLX user subroutine can be used to define an alternative model for internal heat generation. Care

must be taken in defining the factor used to convert inelastic mechanical energy to thermal energy (see

the CONVERT model definition option). If shell elements are present or latent heats are used, the HEAT

parameter might also be required.

For a coupled thermo-mechanical-electrical problem, it is also necessary to include a JOULE parameter.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

117 DECOUPLING

Set Control for Contact Decoupling Analysis

DECOUPLING

Description

This parameter allows users to manually analyze contact between the workpiece and deformable tools in

a decoupled manner.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

rigid bodies.

Enter 2 for coupled analysis. The deformable tools are treated as rigidthermal bodies.

Enter 3 for tool stress analysis only.

Notes:

Using contact decoupling assumes that the deformation in deformable tool is small

compared to the workpiece deformation.

No remeshing is allowed in the deformable tools.

Typically, a decoupling analysis is run through the run_marc command: -dcoup.

However, you can use the control here to run the analysis manually. The data transfer file

is defined through READ FILE and WRITE FILE history options or, by default, using

jid.t70 in the current directory.

FLUID 118

Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis

FLUID

Description

This parameter controls the procedure when performing a fluid analysis. In this release, Marc provides

the ability to solve the Navier Stokes equations, excluding turbulence for incompressible fluids. Marc

offers either weakly (staggered method) or strongly (simultaneous method) procedures in multi-physics

type problems. Using the weak formulation, more iterations might be necessary, but overall computation

costs might be less. For fluid-thermal problems, the strongly coupled procedure is recommended; while

for fluid-solid problems, the weakly coupled procedure should be used. Furthermore, you can select how

the fluid incompressibility conditions are to be satisfied. Either a mixed method, with degrees of freedom

of velocity and pressure or a penalty method with degrees of freedom of velocity can be used with the

continuum elements. The penalty factor can be entered through the PARAMETERS option. For more

details, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.

Caution:

Fluid analysis cannot be performed with element types 155 through 157.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

10 fluid analysis mixed method

11 fluid analysis penalty method

12 fluid-thermal mixed method strong coupling

13 fluid-thermal penalty method strong coupling

2 fluid-thermal mixed method weak coupling

3 fluid-thermal penalty method weak coupling

40 fluid-solid mixed method weak coupling

41 fluid-solid penalty method weak coupling

42 fluid-thermal-solid mixed method strong weak coupling

43 fluid-thermal-solid penalty method strong weak coupling

44 fluid-thermal-solid mixed method weak weak coupling

45 fluid-thermal-solid penalty method weak weak coupling

119 FLUID

Fluid, Fluid-Thermal, Fluid-Solid, and Fluid-Thermal-Solid Analysis

Format

Fixed

16-20

Free

3rd

Data

Entry Entry

I

Enter 2 to obtain in addition external flux values at nodal points. If this

field is left blank, only temperatures at integration points and nodal

temperatures are printed.

PORE 120

Soil Analysis

PORE

Soil Analysis

Description

This parameter sets the flags for one of several possible soil analysis. It is possible to perform either a

pore pressure calculation (transient or steady state), a soil analysis (including the effects of previously

obtained pore pressures), or a coupled pore-soil plasticity analysis. For information about soil analyses,

see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.

Notes:

If only a pore pressure calculation is be performed, use element types 41, 42 or 44.

If an uncoupled soil calculation is to be performed, use element types 27, 28 or 21.

If a coupled fluid-soil analysis is to be performed, use element types 32, 33 or 35.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 if a steady state pore pressure calculation is to be performed.

Enter 2 if a transient pore pressure calculation is to be performed.

16-20

3rd

stress analysis.

Enter 1 if a stress analysis is to be performed.

Example

If a fully coupled analysis is required, enter:

PORE, 2, 1

121 T-T-T

Time-Temperature-Transformation

T-T-T

Time-Temperature-Transformation

Description

This parameter allocates storage for the time-temperature-phase dependent properties. The properties

themselves are defined using the TIME-TEMP model definition option.

Most materials, when quenched or air cooled from a sufficiently high temperature, exhibit a change in

mechanical or thermal properties. At any stage during the cooling process, these properties are usually

dependent not only on the current temperature but also on the previous thermal history. This is due to the

fact that the properties are influenced by the internal microstructure of the material and this in turn usually

depends on the rate at which the temperature changes. Only in instances where the temperature is

changed very gradually does the material respond in an equilibrium manner where properties are simply

a function of the current temperature. In addition, during the cooling process, certain solid-solid phase

transformations can occur. These represent another form of change in the material microstructure which

can influence the mechanical or thermal properties. This parameter allows you to account for the timetemperature-transformation interrelationships of what are generally termed thermomechanical effects.

For more information about this type of analysis, see the Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter the maximum number of material groups with time-temperaturetransformation dependent material properties (default is 1).

16-20

3rd

Enter the maximum number of cooling rates used to define any one

property of any material group (see Marc Volume A: Theory and User

Information for details). Default is 3.

21-25

4th

value is specified for any cooling rate. Default is 5.

25-30

5th

expressed in terms of polynomial expansions in temperature, enter the

maximum number of temperature points at which an expansion is defined

for any cooling rate.

HEAT 122

Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis

HEAT

Description

This parameter specifies a heat transfer (conduction) analysis instead of displacement/stress analysis.

Convection can be included if the velocities are known or in a steady-state rigid plastic analysis. For the

solution of the coupled thermal/flow problem, the FLUID parameter should be used. For more

information about heat transfer capabilities in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.

The HEAT parameter may be used in conjunction with:

STRUCTURAL

JOULE

ELECTRO

- resistance heating

MAGNETO

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-4

1st

11-15

2nd

elements 50, 85, 86, 87, and 88.

Enter 0 for linear temperature distribution in thickness direction.

Enter 1 for quadratic temperature distribution in thickness direction.

Default is 0.

16-20

3rd

Default is 0.

21-25

4th

Enter 2 to obtain in addition external flux values at nodal points. If this

field is left blank, only temperatures at integration points and nodal

temperatures are printed.

26-30

5th

nonsymmetric solver. The velocity must be prescribed.

123 HEAT

Heat Transfer (Conduction) Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

31-35

6th

Enter the number of heat transfer layers for composite shell elements.

Default is 1.

36-40

7th

data (default).

Enter 2 to not linearize calculation.

JOULE 124

Joule Heating (Coupled Thermo-Electrical) Analysis

JOULE

Description

This parameter allows you to perform a coupled thermoelectrical (Joule heating) problem or a coupled

thermo-mechanical-electrical problem. The coupling between the electrical problem and the thermal

problem is because: (1) the resistance in the electric problem is dependent on temperatures and (2) the

internal heat generation in the thermal problem is a function of the electric flow. For more information

about the finite element formulation of Joule heating problems, see Marc Volume A: Theory and

User Information.

In the analysis of Joule heating, the model definition options JOULE, VOLTAGE, DIST CURRENT and

POINT CURRENT must be used for the definition of electric problems. However, options for the heat

transfer analysis remain unchanged.

For a coupled thermo-mechanical-electrical problem, it is necessary to have either a COUPLE or a

STRUCTURAL parameter. In such problems, there is additional coupling because of the change in

boundary conditions through the CONTACT option which changes both the thermal and electrical

behavior. Heat is generated not only by electrical resistance (Joule heating), but also by heat generated

due to inelastic behavior.

Note:

Joule heating is not applied to shell elements, conventional heat transfer will be applied in

these regions.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 if electrical properties are a strong function of temperature.

125 DIFFUSION

Diffusion Analysis

DIFFUSION

Diffusion Analysis

Description

This parameter indicates that a diffusion analysis is to be performed. The boundary conditions are applied

using the FIXED PRESSURE, DIST MASS, and POINT MASS options.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

ABLATION 126

Specify Ablation Occurrence

ABLATION

Description

This parameter is used to specify that ablation is to occur. It is normally used in conjunction with the

PYROLYSIS parameter. The surface to be ablated is specified via the RECEDING SURFACE option. Data

used to control the ablation is entered via the SURFACE ENERGY option for the advanced model.

For more information, refer to Marc Volume A Theory and User Information, Chapter 6, Nonstructural

Procedure Library, Ablation.

Note:

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 to use normal based upon surfaces given by RECEDING

SURFACE data (default).

Enter 3 to use normal based upon direction of streamline.

Enter 4 to use normal based upon direction of streamline with projected

magnitude.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 if new surface node coordinate is equal to old, shaved coordinate

(default).

Enter 2 if new surface node coordinate is projected coordinate.

21-25

4th

default is write every increment.

26-30

5th

Enter 1 if s calculated at the nodal point.

127 PYROLYSIS

Indicates Thermo-poro-ablative Model Analysis

PYROLYSIS

Description

This parameter is used to indicate that a thermo-poro-ablative model is being analyzed. The region which

can undergo pyrolysis is defined either via the THERMAL CONTACT or STREAM DEFINITION option.

If the simplified streamline fluid flow model is used, the STREAM DEFINITION option is required.

For more information, refer to Marc Volume A Theory and User Information, Chapter 6, Nonstructural

Procedure Library, Pyrolysis

Note:

Pyrolysis is not applied to shell elements, conventional heat transfer will be applied in

these regions.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 for streamline fluid flow model.

Enter 3 for DArcy fluid flow model.

16-20

3rd

(default).

Enter 2 to not linearize system.

21-25

4th

Enter 2 to use nonsymmetric formulation.

26-30

5th

Enter 0 or 1 if

magnitude of

m

m

.

projection of m n .

31-35

6th

Enter 2 for 2 in rate term.

Enter -1 for no in rate term.

36-40

7th

Enter 2 to exclude divergence in g .

CURING 128

Curing Analysis Parameter Definition

CURING

Description

The parameter flags the capability to take into account the curing effect on either the heat transfer or

structural analysis. In a heat transfer analysis, the cure reaction heat flux is calculated and coupled into

the heat transfer equation system. In a structural analysis, the cure induced volumetric shrinkage can also

be incorporated.

For more information, refer to Marc Volume A Theory and User Information, Chapter 5, Structural

Procedure Library, Cure-Thermal-Mechanically Coupled Analysis.

Notes:

(a) Heat transfer analysis

(b) Thermal-mechanical coupled analysis

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

129 BEARING

Bearing Analysis

BEARING

Bearing Analysis

Description

This parameter activates the bearing analysis facility for the analysis of lubrication problems. For more

information about Marcs bearing analysis capabilities, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.

In a bearing analysis, the model definition options VELOCITY, THICKNESS, RESTRICTOR,

ISOTROPIC, FIXED PRESSURE, DAMPING COMPONENTS, STIFFNS COMPONENTS, and THICKNS

CHANGE can be used to define the problem.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-7

1st

11-15

2nd

ELECTRO 130

Electrostatic Analysis

ELECTRO

Electrostatic Analysis

Description

This parameter allows an electrostatic analysis to be performed. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC

model definition options are used to define the material properties. The FIXED POTENTIAL, DIST

CHARGES, and POINT CHARGE options are used to prescribe the boundary conditions while the history

definition option STEADY STATE is used for the steady state solution. For more information about the

electrostatic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. For

information about elements used in electrostatic analysis, see Marc Volume B: Element Library.

The ELECTRO parameter may be used in conjunction with:

STRUCTURAL

HEAT

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

87, and 88.

Enter 0 for linear potential distribution in thickness direction.

Enter 1 for quadratic potential distribution in thickness direction. Default

is 0.

16-20

3rd

a coupled electrostatic analysis.

Enter 0 for using the electric field intensity based calculation. Use this

when the distance between charged bodies is small.

Enter 1 for the nodal charge based calculation. Use this when the distance

between charged bodies is large.

See Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for details).

Default is 0.

131 MAGNETO

Magnetostatic Analysis

MAGNETO

Magnetostatic Analysis

Description

This parameter specifies a magnetostatic analysis. The ISOTROPIC and ORTHOTROPIC model

definition options are used for the input of isotropic or orthotropic magnetic permeabilities. The model

definition options FIXED POTENTIAL, POINT CURRENT, and DIST CURRENT are used for prescribed

potential and current boundary conditions. The COIL CURRENT and EMCOIL PATH may be used to

define the geometry and location of a coil. B-H RELATION is used for the input of the variation of

magnetic permeability with either the magnetic field density or the magnetic field vector. Permanent

magnets can be introduced by using the PERMANENT model definition option. The STEADY STATE

history definition option is used for the steady state option.

For more information about the magnetostatic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory

and User Information. For information about elements used in magnetostatic analysis, see Marc Volume

B: Element Library.

The MAGNETO parameter may be used in conjunction with:

STRUCTURAL

HEAT

Format

Format

Fixed

1-6

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

EL-MA 132

Perform Electromagnetic Analysis

EL-MA

Description

This parameter activates the capability in Marc to perform an electromagnetic analysis. The

electromagnetic analysis can be either a harmonic or a transient analysis. The ISOTROPIC and

ORTHOTROPIC model definition options are used to define the material properties. The FIXED

POTENTIAL, DIST CURRENT, and POINT CURRENT-CHARGE options are used to prescribe the

boundary conditions while the HARMONIC and DYNAMIC CHANGE history definition options are used

for the harmonic and transient solutions, respectively. Refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User

Information for a description of the electromagnetic analysis capability in Marc. An electromagnetic

analysis can be performed with element types 111, 112, or 113. See Marc Volume B: Element Library for

further details.

The EL-MA parameter may be used in conjunction with:

HEAT

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Set to 1 for harmonic electromagnetic analysis.

Default is 0.

16-20

3rd

beta procedure (default).

Set to 1 for transient electromagnetic analysis using backward Euler

procedure; preferred for low-frequency simulations.

133 PIEZO

Activate Piezoelectric Analysis

PIEZO

Description

This parameter activates a piezoelectric analysis. Possible analysis types are static, modal, transient

dynamic, harmonic, or buckling. A description of the piezoelectric capabilities is included in Marc

Volume A: Theory and User Information. Piezoelectric analysis may be performed with the following

element types:

160

161

162

4-node axisymmetric

163

8-node brick

164

4-node tetrahedron

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

ACOUSTIC 134

Acoustic Analysis

ACOUSTIC

Acoustic Analysis

Description

This parameter activates the capability to perform an acoustic analysis. The ACOUSTIC model definition

option is used to prescribe the material behavior of the fluid. The FIXED PRESSURE, DIST SOURCES,

and POINT SOURCE model definition options are used to prescribe boundary conditions.

For Modal Acoustic analysis, Marc calculates the fundamental frequencies when the MODAL SHAPE

option is encountered. A transient analysis can be performed using the DYNAMIC CHANGE option. This

option can only be used in combination with cavities with rigid reflecting surfaces

For Harmonic Acoustic analysis, Marc calculates the response of the coupled acoustic-solid system. The

coupling is done via the CONTACT option. The frequency range is specified using the HARMONIC

history definition option. Reactive boundary conditions can be given via the CONTACT TABLE option.

For more information about the acoustic analysis capability in Marc, see Marc Volume A: Theory and

User Information. For information about elements used in acoustic analysis, see Marc Volume B:

Element Library.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

DYNAMIC parameter. If the inverse power sweep method is used for

eigenvalue analysis, it is also the number of mode shapes and frequencies

to be extracted. Only needed for modal acoustics.

16-20

3rd

Enter 0 for inverse powder sweep method.

Enter 1 to force the Lanczos method.

21-25

4th

be performed in this analysis. Only needed for modal acoustics.

26-30

5th

is used.

1 = modal acoustics (default)

2 = harmonic acoustics

135 RADIATION

Radiation Analysis

RADIATION

Radiation Analysis

Description

This parameter activates the radiation analysis capabilities in heat transfer and coupled analyses. This

parameter selects the method to evaluate the viewfactors and controls the accuracy of the calculation of

the vivisectors, and the resulting thermal radiation calculation as well. Depending on which method is

chosen different model definition options are required to define the cavity and the specification of the

emissivity as defined below. If spectral dependent emissivity is defined it is also necessary to use the

PARAMETERS model definition option to specify the speed of light in the cavity medium.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-9

1st

11-15

2nd

Set to 0 to calculate viewfactors once using the direct integration method.

The RADIATING CAVITY model definition option defines the cavity. This

procedure is only available for axisymmetric cavities. The emissivity is

defined with other material data through the ISOTROPIC,

ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.

Set to 1 to read viewfactors from a file created by the direct integration

approach. The emissivity is defined with other material data through the

ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.

Set to 2 to read view factor file created by Marc Mentat using the Monte

Carlo method. They are read from a file jid.vfs. This procedure also

requires the use of the VIEW FACTOR model definition option. The

emissivity is defined with other material data through the ISOTROPIC,

ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options.

Set to 3 to calculate viewfactors by the hemi-cube projection method, and

the view factor file will be in ascii format. The CAVITY DEFINITION

option defines the cavity. The thermal radiation calculation is only active

if the RAD-CAVITY option indicates that the cavity is used in a boundary

condition, and the LOADCASE option is used to indicate that the boundary

condition is active. The emissivity is defined either with other material

data through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options, or through

the EMISSIVITY (preferred) option.

RADIATION 136

Radiation Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Set to 4 to calculate viewfactors by the hemi-cube projection method, and

the view factor file will be in binary format. The CAVITY DEFINITION

option defines the cavity. The thermal radiation calculation is only active

if the RAD-CAVITY option indicates that the cavity is used in a boundary

condition, and the LOADCASE option is used to indicate that the boundary

condition is active. The emissivity is defined either with other material

data through the ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, etc. options, or through

the EMISSIVITY (preferred) option. Default is 0

16-20

3rd

viewfactors. Viewfactors are written if IRADFL = 0, and are read if

IRADFL = 1. When IRADFL = 0 and IFILVF = 0, the viewfactors are

not saved. Default is 0.

21-25

4th

Set to 0 to use offset temperature entered in PARAMETERS option.

(Default)

Set to 1 if user input is in degrees Celsius.

Set to 2 if user input is in degrees Kelvin.

Set to 3 if user input is in degrees Fahrenheit.

Caution: Do not enter temperatures in degrees Rankine.

26-35

5th

value given in PARAMETERS option, 5.67051 x 10-8W/m2K4.

36-40

6th

41-45

7th

46-50

8th

51-55

9th

For the Monte Carlo approach (IRADFL=2) the 6th, 7th, 8th, and 9th fields are zero.

For the hemi-cube approach (IRADFL=3 or IRADFL=4).

36-40

6th

41-45

7th

the structure. Only available in a coupled analysis using the updated

Lagrange method, or in an analysis with ABLATION.

46-50

8th

circumference. Default is 36.

51-55

9th

137 RADIATION

Radiation Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

56-65

10th

cutoff. Viewfactors read in or calculated below this cutoff are ignored.

Default is 0.0001.

66-75

11th

implicitly (contribute to operator matrix). View factor values smaller than

this cutoff are treated explicitly. Default is 0.01.

CAVITY 138

Volume-dependant Pressure Load for Cavities

CAVITY

Description

This parameter governs the analysis of structures with internal cavities. When using the CAVITY

parameter, the FOLLOW FOR parameter is automatically switched on.

Note:

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

Enter 2 for low-order 2-D elements.

Enter 3 for high-order 2-D elements.

Enter 3 or 4 for low-order 3-D elements.

Enter 6 or 8 for high-order 3-D elements.

Default is 8.

139 RBE

Rigid Body Elements

RBE

Description

This option can be used to define the number of degrees of freedom for a reference node used in the RBE2

or RBE3 model definition option. This might be necessary in cases where the number of degrees of

freedom for all other nodes in the structure is smaller than the required number of degrees of freedom for

the reference node. This, for example, happens if the RBE2 or RBE3 option is used in an analysis with

continuum elements only.

It can also be used to set special features of RBE2 and RBE3.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 6 for a 3-D analysis.

Note:

16-20

3rd

coordinate system.

Enter 3 to deactivate automatic convergence test by the RBE2 module.

21-25

4th

rotational increment assumption.

Enter 2 to activate non-normalized rotation constraint coefficient of RBE3.

MACHINING 140

NC Machining (Metal Cutting) Process Analysis

MACHINING

Description

This parameter flags the capability to simulate the NC machining (that is, Metal Cutting or Material

Removing) processes. With this option invoked, the deactivation of elements can be done according to

the cutter path defined by either the APT source or CL files.

The DEACTIVATE model or history definition option must be used in order to apply this capability during

the course of analysis.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-9

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

141

Rezoning and Substructure Parameters

er 2:

Para

meter

s

REZONING 142

Allow Rezoning

REZONING

Allow Rezoning

Description

This parameter is used to indicate that rezoning can occur during this run. During rezoning, it is possible

to add and/or delete elements and/or nodal points. If elements and/or nodal points are added, there should

be enough elements and nodes allocated with the SIZING parameter in the initial run. The REZONING

parameter can be used with all continuum displacement elements, shell elements 22, 75, 138, 139, and

140 and Herrmann elements 80 through 84 as well as elements 155 through 157.

If the second field is entered as 1 or 2, automatic remeshing followed by rezoning is activated. In this

case, use the ADAPTIVE parameter to define the upper-bound of the number of elements and nodes in the

mesh and the ADAPT GLOBAL history definition option to define the criteria in global remeshing.

Automatic remeshing with rezoning can only be used with the updated Lagrangian formulation, and with

continuum (displacement or Herrmann) element. Marc switches to updated Lagrangian framework if the

total Lagrangian formulation is specified in the input file. Global adaptive remeshing is available for

lower-order triangular, quadrilateral continuum elements in 2-D and lower-order tetrahedral, lower-order

triangular, or quadrilateral shell elements in 3-D.

Note:

If rezoning is to be performed in this analysis, this parameter must be included from the

very beginning. It cannot be added upon restart.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 for 2-D automatic remeshing followed by rezoning.

Enter 2 for 3-D automatic remeshing followed by rezoning.

143 MNF

MD ADAMS Modal Neutral File Options

MNF

Description

This optional parameter allows the user to request that stress and/or strain modes be computed and

exported to the MNF. It also allows the user to pick the layer number for shell elements.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

0: continuum elements.

1: shell top layer.

2: shell middle layer.

3: shell bottom layer.

SUPER 144

Super Element Input

SUPER

Description

This parameter allows the user to define an upper-bound to the number of degrees of freedom per node

when DMIGs are used to define superelements.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

any super element.

145 USER

Create User-defined Element

USER

Description

You can define your own stiffness or mass matrix using this parameter and user subroutine USELEM to

specify equivalent nodal loads, stiffness matrix, mass matrix, stress recovery, and internal force. When

using this capability, the element type given on the CONNECTIVITY model definition option and the

ELEMENTS parameter is a negative number. This parameter can be used repeatedly to define different

element types.

For a thermo-mechanically coupled analysis, a user-defined element for the stress pass can be associated

with a regular Marc element or a user-defined element for the heat transfer pass. In the latter case, note

that USER parameter should be defined for all the user-defined stress elements first followed by USER

parameters for the associated heat transfer elements in the same order.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

can be 0.

26-30

5th

31-35

6th

36-40

7th

41-45

8th

46-50

9th

51-55

10th

56-60

11th

0 = Pipe

1 = Truss

9 = Fourier

2 = Shell

3 = Plate

11 = Axisymmetric shell

4 = Plane stress

USER 146

Create User-defined Element

5 = Plane strain

14 = Membrane

7 = Axisymmetric solid

15 = Gap

61-65

12th

0 = Stress element

1 = Heat transfer element

66-70

13th

Associated heat transfer element if this is a stress element and the analysis

is coupled. This can be a positive normal Marc element type or another

negative user element type.

71-75

14th

Conventional Marc Topology Classes

51 = 6-node pentahedral

52 = 15-node pentahedral

multiplier)

multiplier)

33 = 6-node quadrilateral

63 = 12-node hexahedral

147 USER

Additional Flags for Various Analyses

er 2:

Para

meter

s

CENTROID 148

State Storage at Centroid Only

CENTROID

Description

This parameter is used for calculation and storage of stress and strain (or, for heat transfer, temperature)

at the centroid of each element only.

The CENTROID parameter reduces the storage requirements, and the computational costs. However, it is

not recommended for nonlinear analysis because it reduces the accuracy of the solution. If this parameter

is used, the residual load correction should be switched off by using the NO LOADCOR parameter.

Note:

The POST option may be used to specify that output is at the CENTROID while insuring

an accurate analysis.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

State Storage at All Points

ALL POINTS

Description

This parameter is used for calculation and storage of stress and strain (or, for heat transfer, temperature)

at all integration points of all elements. Output is obtained for each integration point of each element. For

the integration point locations of Marc elements, see Marc Volume B: Element Library.

If this parameter is switched off by the use of the CENTROID parameter, the state at each integration point

of the element is set equal to the value at the centroid of the element. This is not important in small

displacement elastic solutions and might not be significant where the mesh is very fine. However, the

utility of the sophisticated elements lies in the use of integration point data with relatively few elements.

Use of this parameter is recommended for any nonlinear analysis, particularly nonlinear shell and large

displacement analysis. If this parameter is turned off, the residual load correction should be switched off

(using the NO LOADCOR parameter) since an accurate stress distribution is necessary for this correction

to be effective. In general, use of this feature increases the run time; however, this parameter allows the

use of a coarser mesh, which can result in a lower overall cost for the analysis. Storage requirements are

also higher. This also can affect THERMAL LOADS or CHANGE STATE input requirements.

Note:

This parameter has the default value of on in the K2 and subsequent versions. This

parameter has the default value of off in all versions previous to K2.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

Residual Load Correction

LOAD COR

Description

This parameter is used to ensure that the nonlinear solution is always in equilibrium. In versions

subsequent to K2, this was the default option. It is recommended that the ALL POINTS parameter always

be used in conjunction with residual load correction. The residual correction depends on integrating

stress over the elements, and this can only be accurate if stresses are stored at all points.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

151 NO LOADCOR

Suppression of Load Correction

NO LOADCOR

Description

Residual load correction is automatically included for any analysis. This parameter is used to override

any automatic setting. This parameter should be the last parameter given before the END parameter.

Note:

Certain parameters (DYNAMIC and LARGE DISP) override this parameter and always turn

the load correction on. The use of this parameter should be limited to linear

elastic problems.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

SCALE 152

Scaling to First Yield

SCALE

Description

This parameter causes scaling of the linear-elastic solution to first yield in the highest stressed element,

for small displacement elastic-plastic analysis where element properties are not temperature dependent.

Using this parameter causes all aspects of the initial solution (displacements, strains, stresses,

temperature changes, loads) to be scaled. Thus, subsequent incrementation is built onto the scaled

solution; for example, the PROPORTIONAL INCREMENT history definition set proportions the

scaled load.

Note:

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

This entry automatically switches on the load correction. This flag is

ignored if large displacement or dynamic analysis is flagged.

153 THERMAL

Thermal Stress Analysis

THERMAL

Description

This parameter specifies the use of thermal loading or temperature-dependent material properties in the

analysis. See THERMAL LOADS, CHANGE STATE, INITIAL TEMP, POINT TEMP, and TEMPERATURE

EFFECTS or TABLE model definitions in this document for more information.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

ISTRESS 154

Define Initial Stress

ISTRESS

Description

This parameter allows you to input an initial set of stresses. It is your responsibility to input a

self-equilibrating set of stresses. These stresses should not produce any material nonlinearity. The

stresses are input through the UINSTR user subroutine or through the INIT STRESS model

definition option.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

1: Initial stress in preferred material coordinate system

155 LUMP

Lumped Mass or Specific-Heat Matrix

LUMP

Description

This parameter lumps the mass matrix (for dynamics) or specific heat matrix (for heat transfer) into a

diagonal matrix.

Note:

LUMP can also be used for acoustics. However, it tends to lower the eigenfrequencies.

Use of this parameter is not recommended for second order elements (8-node quadrilateral

or 20-node brick elements) or for shell type elements.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-4

1st

5-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

If greater than zero, does not add mass to rotational degrees of freedom of

the following shell elements: 22, 75, 138, 139, 140.

APPBC 156

Application of Boundary Conditions

APPBC

Description

The APPBC parameter specifies that the application of boundary conditions is performed by row-column

elimination, forcing re-assembly if there are any nonzero applied displacements. If this option is not

included, boundary conditions are applied using the penalty method. The penalty factor is entered

through the PARAMETERS option.

This option has no effect when the CASI iterative solver is used.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

157 ACCUMULATE

Accumulation of Strain and Displacements

ACCUMULATE

Description

This parameter reserves workspace for the storage of accumulated total strains, plastic strains, creep

strains, and total displacements. Such accumulated values can be used for purposes of extrapolation in

nonlinear creep and/or plasticity analysis. In particular, it can be used in analysis of cyclic loading

problems, where from one complete cycle the accumulated strains and displacements can be extrapolated

to cover multiple loading cycles.

Note:

This parameter must be used with extreme care. Because of the nature of extrapolation, the

results can only be considered to be an estimate of the values that would have otherwise

been obtained with complete analysis. After an extrapolation, the analysis can be continued

in the usual way. See the ACCUMULATE and EXTRAPOLATE options in the history

definition section of this manual for more information.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

ALIAS 158

Define Aliases

ALIAS

Define Aliases

Description

In many cases, you might wish to enter a different element type identification to the library element type

given on the ELEMENTS parameter when the mesh is read from the CONNECTIVITY model definition

set. A common example is the use of the same mesh for heat transfer and stress analysis. The library

element code on the ELEMENTS parameter must be changed, but you might not wish to change the

library code on the CONNECTIVITY option. This parameter defines the aliases corresponding to the

library element types in this analysis. For example, if a heat transfer analysis is to be done with 4-node,

axisymmetric quadrilateral (library code 40) but the mesh has been generated with element code type 10

(the corresponding stress analysis element) the alias is set up as 10 for library code type 40.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

11-15

2nd

Number of aliases to be entered. More than one alias can be used for any

one element library code.

16-20

3rd

Alias for element library code (the type given on the CONNECTIVITY

option).

21-25

4th

Actual library code for the above alias (the type given on the ELEMENTS

parameter and the one to be used in the analysis).

Etc.

Note:

Alias correspondence pairs are continued in fields of I5 to column 75. Continuation blocks,

if needed, are given in 16I5 format.

159

Program Function and I/O Controls

er 2:

Para

meter

s

NEW 160

Use New Format

NEW

Description

This parameter can be used to switch from input in extended format to the default width or vice-versa.

Input is interpreted to be in the format defined here until another NEW option is encountered.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 if the default width of the data fields is used for input. This

overrides the EXTENDED parameter.

Enter 2 if the double width of the data fields is used for input.

161 TABLE

Indicate How Tables are to be used

TABLE

Description

This option defines how many tables are included in the input data, and how are they to be used.

Tables may currently be used for defining nonlinear material behavior, and boundary conditions and

contact data.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

FIXED DISP, etc.

POINT LOAD, etc.

DIST LOADS, etc.

FOUNDATION or FILMS option

FIXED DISP, etc.

POINT LOAD, etc.

DIST LOADS, etc.

FOUNDATION or FILMS option

21-25

5th

ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC, MOONEY, OGDEN,

FOAM, HYPOELASTIC, GENT, ARRUDBOYCE options.

ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC, ANISOTROPIC, MOONEY, OGDEN,

FOAM, HYPOELASTIC, GENT, ARRUDBOYCE options.

26-30

6th

Enter 1 if new style input is used for CONTACT option.

31-35

7th

36-40

8th

Enter 1 if a zero table reference value has to remain zero.

COMMENT 162

Define Comment

COMMENT

Define Comment

Description

The COMMENT parameter is used to enter informative comments. This parameter can be used as often

as desired within the model definition and history definition options. Use of this parameter does not affect

the analysis.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-80

2nd

User-entered comment.

Alternate Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-1

1st

3-80

2nd

User-entered comment.

163 PRINT

Debug Printout

Debug Printout

Description

This parameter allows printout of various items for debugging; however, the amount of output is

increased accordingly. Default is no check printout. Multiple print flags can be set using columns 11

to 80.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

11-80

2nd

Enter 1 for output of element stiffness matrices (this also prints out the

shell surface metric for doubly curved shells 4, 8, and 24), consistent mass

matrix, and equivalent nodal loads.

Caution: This produces significant output.

Enter 2 for output of the matrices used in tying. (See TYING, SERVO LINK,

UFORMS.)

Enter 3 to force the solution of a nonpositive definite matrix. This is only

recommended for the AUTO INCREMENT option to pass collapse points

in the collapse analysis. This can be entered on the CONTROL option.

Enter 5 to obtain additional information concerning gap convergence. In

contact analysis, set to 5 to obtain information concerning nodes touching

or separating from surfaces and also to print out the maximum residual and

reaction forces.

Enter 6 to obtain output of nodal value array during rezoning.

Enter 7 to obtain tying information in CONRAD GAP option and fluid

element numbers in CHANNEL option which is used to define fluid

channel input data in heat transfer analysis.

Enter 8 to obtain incremental displacements in local system in

contact problems.

Enter 9 to obtain latent heat output.

Enter 10 to obtain the stress-strain relation in the local coordinate system.

Enter 11 to obtain additional information on the interlaminar

stress calculation.

Enter 12 to output the right-hand side and solution vector.

Caution: This produces significant output.

PRINT 164

Debug Printout

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter 13 to obtain additional information regarding CPU resources used.

Enter 14 to obtain information regarding the mesh adapting process.

Enter 15 to obtain additional information regarding surface

energy balances.

Enter 16 to obtain additional information regarding pyrolysis calculation.

Enter 17 to obtain additional information regarding creation

of streamlines.

Enter 18 to obtain information about rezoning when using ADAPT

GLOBAL option.

Enter 21 to obtain information about application of kinematic boundary

conditions when table input is used.

Enter 22 to obtain information about distributed loads, point loads, films,

foundations, and initial conditions when table input is used.

Enter 23 to obtain information about ablation deformation.

Enter 24 to print internal heat generated in coupled analysis.

Enter 25 to print additional information regarding remeshing

during ablation.

Enter 26 to print additional information regarding sink points.

Enter 27 to obtain reaction forces at tied nodes.

Enter 28 to obtain additional information about convective terms in heat

transfer and fluid analysis.

Enter 29 to obtain additional information on the internal created domains

(not supported yet).

Enter 30 to obtain information on cavity pressure loading.

Enter 31 to obtain information about the welding process. The total weld

heat input for each weld flux and the filler element creation history

are printed.

Enter 33 to obtain nodes and elements that are cut.

Enter 34 to print a description of what independent variables may be used

with a physical quantity.

Enter 35 to obtain detailed information on every call to a coupling region

API routine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines,

Chapter 12: Code Coupling Interface)

Enter 36 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has the least details).

165 PRINT

Debug Printout

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter 37 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has more details).

Enter 38 to obtain CASI solver debug information (has the most details).

Enter 39 to obtain detailed information about memory allocation.

Enter 40 to obtain information about Marc-Adams integration.

Enter 42 to create a step on the post file containing the rezoned model

before the next increment of the analysis.

Enter 43 to obtain information about VCCT.

Enter 44 to obtain information during progressive failure.

Enter 46 to obtain information as to what subroutine caused the fatal error.

STOP 166

Exit following Workspace Allocation

STOP

Description

For large problems, you might desire to see the exact sizing requirements for running a job without

actually executing the analysis. The insertion of this parameter causes Marc to exit normally following

workspace allocation. The solution space allocated is based on the optimized bandwidth if you request

the OPTIMIZE option in the model definition section. This is not the total memory required in the case of

the hardware provided solver (solver type 6), the CASI iterative solver (solver type 9), the Pardiso solver

(type 11), or the MUMPS solver (type 12).

Format

Format

Fixed

1-4

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

167 NOTES

Print Notes and Updates

NOTES

Description

This parameter provides detailed, updated information about Marc (manual update, new program

features, etc.)

Format

Format

Fixed

1-5

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

Specify Device for Model Definition Data

INPUT TAPE

Description

This parameter allows specification of a storage device which contains previously generated

CONNECTIVITY and COORDINATES model definition data.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Default is unit 5. For larger problems, involving out-of-core options, you

should avoid using unit 2, 3, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 for mesh input.

169 ELSTO

Out-of-Core Storage of Elements

ELSTO

Description

This parameter is used to save core storage for large problems. All element quantities, strains, stresses,

etc. are stored on an auxiliary storage device. If the number of words actually required is less than the

buffer specified below, this option is turned off by Marc.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

This stores element arrays on unit 3.

11-15

2nd

The default is 40960 words. This buffer size is usually adequate unless

shell elements are used with a large number of layers.

OOC 170

Out-of-core Solver

OOC

Out-of-core Solver

Description

This parameter is used to indicate that the global stiffness matrix is assembled using auxiliary disk space

and will not reside in memory. This is available for solver types 0, 2, 4, 8, and 9 only. It can be used to

save memory. Additionally, for solver types 0 and 4, this parameter controls the decomposition of the

matrix. Normally, Marc automatically switches to the out-of-core solver only when it is unable to

dynamically allocate any more space, and the system is unable to fit into the real/virtual memory

available. For solver type 8, Marc automatically switches to the out-of-core assembly when there is

inadequate memory for the decomposition.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

type 8. In this case, the memory needed for the nodal vectors will be partly

used by the direct solver. Furthermore, the memory for the direct solver

will be limited to almost the minimum needed by that solver. This will

reduce the memory but might increase the I/O time.

171 IBOOC

Out-of-core Storage of Incremental Backup Data

IBOOC

Description

During the Newton-Raphson iteration process, Marc makes a second copy of the solution space. Marc

normally does this in memory unless sufficient memory is not available; in which case, it uses auxiliary

disk space. This option can be used to force it to use disk space (file jobname.t29). This is often useful

for large problems when the sparse solver (type 0) or the multifront sparse solver (type 8) is used, as this

back-up copy is allocated before the decomposition memory is allocated. If the solver has insufficient

memory to perform its function, the job fails prematurely.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

NO ECHO 172

Suppress Echo

NO ECHO

Suppress Echo

This parameter is used to limit echoing of certain input data to the output file during reading. Different

codes are used to suppress different things.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-7

1st

11-80

2nd

Enter 1 to suppress echo on node and element lists. Only one line and a

summary of the number of lines read are printed.

Enter 2 to suppress echo of boundary condition summary. Only the

number of boundary conditions is printed.

Enter 3 to suppress echo of NURBS data.

Enter 4 to suppress information about coordinate systems.

173 INCLUDE

Insert File into the Input File

INCLUDE

Description

Inserts an external file into the input file. The include statement may appear in either the parameter,

model definition, or history definition section. In Marc, an include file may reference another include

file up to a level of 10 deep. The total length of the file name, including the directory path is limited to

240 characters.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-80

2nd

Physical filename.

If the file name is specified without a path, the file should be in the same

directory as the input file. If a path is given, the file should be in the path

relative to the current working directory. Also, note that the file name is

case sensitive and blanks should not be included in the name.

Modifying Default Values

Chapter 2: Parameters

Define Number of State Variables

STATE VARS

Description

This parameter allows consideration of state variables in addition to that of temperature. The number of

predefined state variables stored at each point of the structure can be increased from the default of one

(temperature for heat transfer and lubricant pressure for bearing analysis) by the use of this parameter. In

addition, additional storage can be allocated for user-defined global scalar quantities.

For more information, see THERMAL LOADS, INITIAL STATE, or CHANGE STATE model definition

data in this document and INITSV or NEWSV user subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and

Special Routines.

Note:

In bearing analysis, the first state variable equals the lubricant pressure. For this reason, the

number of state variables must be set to 2 if viscosity varies with temperature in this type

of analysis.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

Distributed Loads or Point Loads

DIST LOADS

Description

This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of different lists of distributed loads, the

maximum number of elements in any particular distributed load list, and the maximum number of nodes

with point loads applied.

This parameter is only necessary if the number of different lists of distributed loads, or the maximum

number of elements per list, or the number of point loads is increased in the history definition section.

Note:

This parameter is not required if the table driven boundary conditions are used.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

177 FLUXES

Distributed Fluxes or Point Fluxes

FLUXES

Description

This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of different lists of distributed fluxes, the

maximum number of elements in a particular distributed flux list, and the maximum number of nodes

with point fluxes applied.

This parameter is only necessary unless the number of different lists of distributed fluxes, or the

maximum number of elements per list, or the number of point fluxes is increased in the history

definition section.

Note:

This parameter is not required if the table driven boundary conditions are used.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

FILMS 178

Film Coefficients

FILMS

Film Coefficients

Description

This parameter allows for the input of the maximum number of elements that have films. This parameter

is only needed if the number of elements with films is increased in the history definition section.

Note:

This parameter is not required if the table driven boundary conditions are used.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

179 RESTRICTOR

Restrictor Input in Lubrication Analysis

RESTRICTOR

Description

This parameter must be included to allow the use of restrictors in lubrication analysis. See the

RESTRICTOR model definition option section of this document for more information.

Note:

This parameter is not required if the table driven boundary conditions are used.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

WELDING 180

Welding Analysis

WELDING

Welding Analysis

Description

This parameter can be used to define the maximum number of weld fluxes in the model and other related

maximum quantities for welding processes. This parameter is recommended, in general, for any welding

analysis, but is particularly required if the number of weld fluxes, weld paths, weld fillers and other

related quantities are increased in the history definition section.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

Enter an upper bound to the number of elements associated with any weld

heat source.

21-25

4th

26-30

5th

31-35

6th

weld filler.

36-40

7th

Enter an upper bound to the number of curves associated with any weld

path. This is set to 1 by the program if left undefined.

41-45

8th

Enter an upper bound to the number of points associated with any weld

path curve. This is set to 2 by the program is left undefined.

Specify Maximum Number of Boundary Conditions to be Defined

BOUNDARY CONDITIONS

Conditions to be Defined

Description

This option allows the user to specify the maximum number of boundary conditions (FIXED DISP., etc.,

DIST LOADS, etc., POINT LOAD, etc., FILMS or FOUNDATION) labels to be given. If all boundary

conditions are specified before the END OPTION, this is not necessary. This is only necessary if the table

driven style input is used for defining boundary conditions.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Define Number of Layer Through Shell Thickness

SHELL SECT

Description

By default, all the shell and beam-in-a-plane elements in Marc use a Simpson rule for integration through

the cross section. This numerical integration allows any material behavior at each layer; for example, the

yielding of a nonlinear elastic-plastic shell can be followed through the section, from a fully elastic to a

fully plastic section. The density of integration points through the thickness is chosen with this parameter.

For purely linear material behavior, 1 point (the minimum) is required for exact integration across the

section. For most nonlinear problems, 7 points are sufficient to describe the nonlinear material response

exactly. For extremely nonlinear response, such as elastic-plastic dynamic problems, 11 points might be

needed. The default if this parameter is not used is 11 points.

If the COMPOSITE option is used for a group of elements, it controls the number of layers used, and the

integration is performed using the trapezoidal rule. This option (4th field) may be used to control the

procedure which can improve computational performance but limit materials selection.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

stresses. The default is 11; minimum is 1. Must be an odd number.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 if you are going to perform your own integration through the

shell/beam thickness. This requires you to input a generalized stress-strain

law through the GENSTR user subroutine.

21-25

4th

composite shell elements. If a value is given on the COMPOSITE option,

it will be used for that particular material.

Enter 1 (default) for conventional procedure, which supports all material

behavior available for composite elements.

Enter 2 if stiffness is to be fast-integrated through the thickness based

upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements and

computational costs for elastic shells. Thermal strains and temperature

dependent properties are not supported.

Enter 3 if stiffness is to be fast-integrated through the thickness based

upon classical laminate theory. This reduces the memory requirements and

computational costs for elastic shells. This procedure uses more memory

and computational time than method 2.

183 TSHEAR

Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185

TSHEAR

Transverse Shear for Elements 22, 45, 75, 140, and 185

Description

The default distribution of transverse shear strain through the thickness for thick shell element types 22,

75, and 140, and for thick beam 45, is a constant. With the inclusion of the TSHEAR parameter, a more

parabolic beam-like distribution derived from a strength-of-materials approach is used. This distribution

is exact for beam 45 but is only approximate for shells 22, 75, or 140 since it is based on the assumption

that the stresses in perpendicular directions are independent of each other.

For unstacked solid shell element, type 185, and 3D composite brick elements, type 149 and 150, the

inclusion of the TSHEAR parameter results in an improved transverse shear distribution. For solid shell

elements, if not used as a composite material, the shear correction factor should be entered in the

GEOMETRY option.

The interlaminar shear is printed only if the PRINT ELEMENT option is used.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

TIE 184

Define Tying Data

TIE

Description

This allocates storage for tying data. See TYING and SERVO LINK model definition options in Chapter

3 of this manual. Also see the UFORMSN user subroutine in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and

Special Routines.

This parameter is necessary only if TYING CHANGE is used to increase the number of constraints.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

Maximum number of retained nodes plus one involved in any tying type

or servo link constraint.

26-30

5th

185 MPC-CHECK

Multi-point Constraint Checking Parameter

MPC-CHECK

Description

This parameter allows the user to specify the amount of checking and ordering done by the program

during the application of multi-point constraints arising from the model definition options: CONTACT,

CYCLIC SYMMETRY, INSERT, RBE2, RBE3, SERVO LINK, and TYING.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

1. MPCs obtained from SERVO LINK option.

2. MPCs obtained from INSERT option.

3. MPCs obtained from TYING, RBE2, or RBE3 options (the actual

order follows from the order of these options in the model

definition block of the data file).

4. MPCs obtained from CYCLIC SYMMETRY option.

5. MPCs obtained from CONTACT option.

Print a warning message if a tied degree of freedom is being used by a

subsequent MPC.

2: Same as 1, but instead of warning, a fatal error message is printed and

the analysis will stop with exit 2011.

3: Try to rearrange the MPCs in such a way that a tied degree of freedom

will not be used in a subsequent MPC. If this reordering cannot

successfully be completed, print a fatal error message and stop the

analysis with exit 2011.

If the MPC-CHECK parameter is not present in the input file:

For Version 10 or earlier, default is 1.

For Version 11, default is 3.

AUTOMSET 186

Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes

AUTOMSET

Description

Without this option, a tied degree of freedom cannot be used as a tied degree of freedom in other tying

constraints nor can it be used as a fixed degree of freedom in a single point constraint (for example,

FIXED DISP/FIXED TEMPERATURE).

When this option is used, the above is allowed as long as the number of constraints is not larger than the

number of degrees of freedom. The program re-writes the tying constraint equation so that one of the

retained degrees of freedom becomes the tied degree of freedom.

If this option is activated, the MPC-CHECK parameter is ignored.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

1-10

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

Examples

Example 1

X displacement of node 3 is tied to X displacements of node 1 and node 2:

Ux(3) = 0.5 * Ux(1) + 0.5 * Ux(2)

X displacement of node 3 is fixed to be 0.1:

Ux(3) = 0.1

Without the AUTOMSET option, this is not allowed; with the AUTOMSET option, these two constraints

are rewritten as:

Ux(1) = 2*Ux(3) - Ux(2)

Ux(3) = 0.1

Example 2

X displacement of node 3 is tied to X displacement of node 1 and node 2:

Ux(3) = 0.5 * Ux(1) + 0.5 * Ux(2)

X displacement of node 3 are tied to X displacement of node 4:

Ux(3) = Ux(4)

X displacement of node 3 is fixed to be 0.1:

Ux(3) = 0.1

187 AUTOMSET

Modify Relationship Between Tied and Retained Nodes

Without the AUTOMSET parameter, this is not allowed; with the AUTOMSET parameter, these two

constraints are rewritten as:

Ux(1) = 2*Ux(3) - Ux(2)

Ux(4) = Ux(3)

Ux(3)=0.1

The parameter is effective for constraints generated by the following options:

TYING

SERVO LINK

RBE2

RBE3

RROD

CONRAD GAP

INSERT

CONTACT

INERTIA RELIEF

AUTOSPC 188

Automatically Apply Constraints to Eliminate Rigid Body Modes

AUTOSPC

Description

The AUTOSPC option applies a constraint to multiple degrees of freedom to eliminate rigid body modes

in the structure. This procedure can only be used with the direct solvers type 0, 4, and 8.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

189 IO-DEACTIVATE

Deactivate Element if it goes Inside-out

Chap

IO-DEACTIVATE

Description

This parameter will result in the simulation continuing even if an element goes inside-out due to large

deformation or material instability. The element that has gone inside-out will be deactivated from the

model. This option is intended for use with damage models where the reduced stiffness of the element

may result in these difficulties. It should be used with caution in the simulation, and it should be

recognized that this will result in a decrease in mass in the system.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-10

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

Defining Cross-sections of Beam Elements

er 2:

Para

meter

s

Beam Section Definition

BEAM SECT

Description

This parameter is used to define the sectional properties of beam sections used in the analysis. The format

and exact data entered depends upon which elements are used. Formats for all available Marc beam

elements are shown below. This parameter must be included if element 13, 77, or 79 is used, if 14, 25,

31, 76, or 78 is used with a noncircular section, or if element 52 or 98 is used with a nonprismatic section

or if element 52 or 98 is used with numerical section integration. See Marc Volume B: Element Library

for more information about individual elements.

If used, the BEAM SECT parameter must directly follow the SIZING and ELEMENTS parameters. Each

beam section used in the analysis must then be described. A LAST statement must follow the last beam

section description to complete the BEAM SECT parameter definition.

There are four methods in this option to define the beam cross section properties:

a. For thin section open and closed beams

b. Elastic non-integrated element types 31, 52, and 98

c. Numerically integrated standard solid section

d. Numerically integrated non-standard solid section

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

For all beam elements, use the 1st and last data blocks described below.

1st data block

1-10

1st

.

.

.

Last data block

1-10

1st

Method A

For elements 13, 14, 25, and 76 to 79, use data blocks 2a, 3a, 4a, 5a to define each beam section:

2a data block

1-10

1st

Beam Section Definition

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Etc.

Etc.

Etc.

Note that a beam section consisting of one straight branch has no stiffness against rotation along the

branch direction.

Data blocks 4a and 5a are given one pair per branch. (X, Y, and S are coordinates on the cross-section

face.) See Marc Volume B: Element Library.

Note that a branch with zero thickness does not contribute to the stiffness but is used to ensure that the

branches form a connected path for open section beams.

4a data block

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

61-70

7th

71-80

8th

5a data block

1-10

1st

Length of branch.

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

Method B

For elastic non-integrated element types 31, 52, or 98, use data blocks 2b and 3b formats to define each

beam section.

2b data block

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

Enter 0.

6-15

2nd

16-25

3rd

Beam Section Definition

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

26-35

4th

36-45

5th

EK

--------------------21 +

46-55

6th

A xs

56-65

7th

31 and 98).

Default A ys = A.

A ys

Method C

For elements 52 and 98 using the standard numerically integrated sections, use data blocks 2c, 3c, 4c,

and 5c to define the beam section:

2c data block

1-10

1st

3c data block

1-5

1st

trapezoidal, or hexagonal).

6-15

2nd

Enter N sec t for the cross-section type. The negative value indicates the

section is numerically integrated. The value is entered as a real number.

16-25

3rd

N sec t

N sec t

N sec t

N sec t

if N sec t = -1: a is the diameter of the circle or the length of the ellispe in

local x.

if N sec t = -2: a is the length of the square or the rectangle in local x.

if N sec t = -3: a is the width of the trapezoid in local x on minus local y side.

if N sec t = -4: a is the width of the hexagon in local x at y = 0.

Beam Section Definition

Format

Fixed

26-35

Free

4th

Data

Entry Entry

F

when blank or zero.

if N sec t = -1: b is the height of the ellipse in local y.

if N sec t = -2: b is the height of the rectangle in local y.

if N sec t = -3: b is the height of the trapezoid in local y.

if N sec t = -4: b is the height of the hexagon in local y.

36-45

5th

Enter c, the third dimension defining the cross section. The default is zero

when blank.

if N sec t = -1: c is not used. Leave blank or enter 0.

if N sec t = -2: c is not used. Leave blank or enter 0.

if N sec t = -3: c is the width of the trapezoid in local x on the plus local

y side.

if N sec t = -4: c is the width of the hexagon in local x on either local y side.

4c data block

1-5

1st

direction. The default is 3.

For a rectangular or trapezoidal section, enter the order of the integration

rule used in local x-direction. If the number is positive and odd, a Simpson

rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes rule is

used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is 5 and

the order cannot be larger than 10.

For a hexagonal section, enter the order of the integration rule used in local

x-direction over each trapezoidal half. If the number is positive and odd, a

Simpson rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes

rule is used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is

5 and the order cannot be larger than 10.

6-10

2nd

circumferential direction of a 90 sector. The default is 2.

For a rectangular or trapezoidal section, enter the order of the integration

rule used in local y-direction. If the number is positive and odd, a Simpson

rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes rule is

used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is what

was entered in the first field and the order cannot be larger than 10.

Beam Section Definition

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

For a hexagonal section, enter the order of the integration rule used in local

y-direction over each trapezoidal half. If the number is positive and odd, a

Simpson rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes

rule is used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is

half the order in x-direction plus 1 and the order cannot be larger than 10.

For non-Gauss rules, the points in the top row of the lower trapezoid

coinciding with the points in the bottom row of the upper trapezoid (i.e.,

the points coinciding at y = 0) are merged together.

11-15

3rd

default, when blank or zero, is not to treat it as a pre-integrated section and

use numerical integration throughout the analysis. If a one is entered in

this field, the input in the 1st and the 2nd field of this data block is ignored.

16-20

4th

21-30

5th

31-40

6th

41-50

7th

61-70

8th

71-80

9th

51-60

10th

Entered stiffness factors must be positive

5c data block

1-10

1st

For a uniform change in cross section, enter the effective Poissons ratio.

The default is zero when left blank. This datum is not used at this time and

its value will be ignored.

Not more than 100 integration points can exist in any cross section. Note that pre-integrated sections do

not allow746+5 stress and strain output in section integration points; only generalized stresses and

strains can be requested for output.

Method D

For elements 52 and 98 using the more general numerically integrated sections that use quadrilateral

segments as building blocks, use data blocks 2d, 3d, 4d, and 5d to define the beam section.

2d data block

1-10

1st

Beam Section Definition

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

3d data block

1-5

1st

The negative number indicates the section is solid.

6-10

2nd

Enter the order of the integration rule used for each quadrilateral shaped

segment in parametric -direction. If the number is positive and odd, a

Simpson rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes

rule is used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is

5 and the order cannot be larger than 10.

11-15

3rd

Enter the order of the integration rule used for each quadrilateral shaped

segment in parametric -direction. If the number is positive and odd, a

Simpson rule is used. If the number is positive and even, a Newton-Cotes

rule is used. If the number is negative, a Gauss rule is used. The default is

the same rule and order as in parametric -direction and the order cannot

be larger than 10.

16-20

4th

default, when blank or zero, is not to treat it as a pre-integrated section and

use numerical integration throughout the analysis. If a 1 is entered in this

field, the input in the 2nd and the 3rd field of this data block is ignored.

21-30

5th

31-40

6th

41-50

7th

61-70

8th

71-80

9th

51-60

10th

Entered stiffness factors must be positive

Enter the 4d data block N seg times as follows (i.e., one data block for each quadrilateral segment.

4d data block

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

Beam Section Definition

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

51-60

6th

61-70

7th

71-80

8th

The corners are given in counterclockwise order with respect to the local x-y axis.

5d data block

1-10

1st

For a uniform change in cross section, enter the effective Poissons ratio.

Default is zero when left blank. This data is not used at this time and its

value will be ignored.

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 to have the principal axis associated with the largest area moment

of inertia to be aligned with the local x-axis.

Enter 2 to have the principal axis associated with the smallest area moment

of inertia to be aligned with the local x-axis.

Enter 3 to have the x-axis of the coordinate system for which the section

is being defined to be aligned with the local x-axis is given in the

GEOMETRY option.

Default is 3 when left blank or zero.

16-25

3rd

Enter the x-coordinate of a point that, when projected, lies on the positive

side of the local x-axis. If the principal moments of inertia are equal, this

defines the x-coordinate of a point on the positive local x-axis. This

coordinate defaults to X cg + 1 , where X cg is the x-coordinate of the center

of gravity of the section in the coordinate system in which the section was

entered. The default is used when this field is blank or zero or when the

user point coincides with the center of gravity.

26-35

4th

Enter the y-coordinate of a point that, when projected, lies on the positive

side of the local x-axis. If the principal moments of inertia are equal, this

defines the y-coordinate of a point on the positive local x-axis. This

coordinate defaults to Y cg , where Y cg is the y-coordinate of the center of

gravity of the section in the coordinate system in which the section was

entered. The default is used when this field is blank or zero or when the

user point coincides with the center of gravity.

Not more than 100 integration points can exist in any cross section. Note that pre-integrated sections do

not allow stress and strain output in section integration points; only generalized stresses and strains can

be requested for output. A section not pre-integrated cannot have more than 100 segments; using single

point integration each. For pre-integrated sections, there is no limit on the number of segments.

Page

1270

ACOUSTIC

1271

ACTUATOR

297

ADAPT GLOBAL

263

ADAPTIVE

255

ANISOTROPIC (Mechanical)

768

ANISOTROPIC (Thermal)

1136

1236

1218

ANISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)

761

1133

786

ARRUDBOYCE

790

ATTACH EDGE

290

ATTACH FACE

291

ATTACH NODE

288

AXITO3D

537

Page

B2GG, B2PP

383

BACKTOSUBS

385

1389

1356

BLOCKS

216

BOUNDARY

220

BSQUEAL

375

BUCKLE INCREMENT

CASE COMBIN

CAVITY DEFINITION

1041

396

1159

CAVITY

532

CFAST

344

CHANGE PORE

990

988

CHANGE STATE

566

562

CHANNEL

COEFFICIENT

COHESIVE (with TABLE Input - Thermal)

COHESIVE (with TABLE Input)

1154

389

1138

919

COHESIVE

1140

COHESIVE

922

COIL CURRENT

COMPOSITE

1334

913

CONM1

1030

CONM2

1036

CONN FILL

237

CONN GENER

238

CONNECT

226

CONNECTIVITY

235

CONRAD GAP

1153

CONSTRAINT

223

CONTACT (2-D)

646

CONTACT NODE

718

Page

CONTACT TABLE

703

694

632

659

CONTROL (Electromagnetostatic)

1393

CONTROL (Fluid)

1418

CONTROL (Fluid-Solid)

1421

1150

CONTROL (Hydrodynamic)

1249

CONTROL (Magnetostatic)

1362

CONTROL (Mechanical)

482

CONUDS

494

CONVERT

1152

COORD SYSTEM

301

COORDINATES

241

CORNERING AXIS

COUPLING REGION

529

1397

874

CRACK DATA

876

999

CREEP

1002

CURE RATE

1169

CURE SHRINKAGE

1175

CURVES

275

CWELD

349

CYCLIC SYMMETRY

310

CYLINDRICAL

252

DAMAGE

905

DAMPING

1018

DEACT GLUE

719

DEACTIVATE

392

217

DEFINE (Sets)

232

DELAMINATION

601

Page

DENSITY EFFECTS

953

474

480

DESIGN OBJECTIVE

471

478

476

DESIGN VARIABLES

472

1376

1285

1308

1373

1282

1305

1372

1205

1330

1369

1202

1327

DIST FLUXES

1059

1056

DIST LOADS

506

501

1227

1264

1261

DMIG

378

DMIG-OUT

370

ELEMENT SORT

465

EMISSIVITY

1162

EMWINDING

1336

END OPTION

1427

ERROR ESTIMATE

393

EXCLUDE

720

Page

FACE IDS

511

877

FAIL DATA

891

FILMS

1053

1049

FIXED ACCE

1028

1401

499

495

1276

1273

1320

1318

1367

1280

1325

1304

1364

1278

1322

1301

1259

1256

1225

1044

FIXED TEMPERATURE

1047

1403

FIXED VELOCITY

1406

1209

FIXED VOLTAGE

1211

FLOW LINE

427

FLUID DRAG

530

FLUID SOLID

1020

813

FOAM

817

Page

FORCDT

586

FORMING LIMIT

833

FOUNDATION

590

587

FOURIER

591

FXORD

244

GAP DATA

912

GASKET

820

GENERATE

229

793

GENT

797

GEOMETRY

292

GLK

541

GLOBALLOCAL

542

GRAIN SIZE

903

GRID FORCE

452

523

HOLD NODES

525

HYPERMESH

438

772

HYPOELASTIC

774

INCLUDE

243

INERTIA RELIEF

526

1172

INIT CURE

1174

546

INIT STRESS

548

1194

1021

INITIAL DISP

1024

570

INITIAL FICTIVE

572

Page

979

INITIAL PC

981

552

554

983

INITIAL PORE

985

969

INITIAL POROSITY

971

1223

INITIAL PYROLYSIS

1192

INITIAL STATE

556

559

1122

580

INITIAL TEMP (with TABLE Input - Thermal Stress)

1119

578

1025

INITIAL VEL

1027

974

976

INSERT

330

IRM

429

ISLAND REMOVAL

603

ISOTROPIC (Acoustic)

1269

ISOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)

1382

ISOTROPIC (Electrostatic)

1296

ISOTROPIC (Fluid)

1410

1126

ISOTROPIC (Hydrodynamic)

1252

ISOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)

1349

ISOTROPIC (Stress)

745

1268

1232

1212

1289

Page

1380

1295

1408

1250

1343

1341

ISOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)

J-INTEGRAL

JOULE

K2GG, K2PP

LATENT HEAT

737

1124

593

1201

381

1141

LOADCASE

423

LORENZI

594

M2GG, M2PP

382

MANY TYPES

218

MAP TEMP

574

MAPPER

222

MASSES

1029

MATERIAL DATA

902

MATUDS

493

MERGE

224

MERGE SELECTIVE

225

MESH2D

215

MIXTURE

916

MNF UNITS

386

MODAL INCREMENT

1039

776

MOONEY

782

MPCOUT

377

Page

NEW

231

NLELAST

807

NO ELEM SORT

467

NO NODE SORT

470

NO PRINT

447

NO PRINT CONTACT

451

NO PRINT SPRING

449

NO SUMMARY

464

NODAL THICKNESS

296

NODE CIRCLE

247

NODE FILL

248

NODE GENER

249

NODE MERGE

250

NODE SORT

468

800

OGDEN

804

OPTIMIZE

402

ORIENTATION

935

850

1145

ORTHOTROPIC (Electrical)

1299

ORTHOTROPIC (Electromagnetic)

1387

ORTHOTROPIC (Magnetostatic)

1354

ORTHOTROPIC (Mechanical)

757

ORTHOTROPIC (Thermal)

1131

1234

1214

1291

1384

1297

1345

1350

ORTHOTROPIC (with TABLE Input - Thermal)

751

1128

Page

P2G

384

PARAMETERS

489

PBUSH

336

PERMANENT (Electromagnetic)

1391

PERMANENT (Magnetostatic)

1360

1358

PFAST

347

PHI-COEFFICIENTS

1007

PIEZOELECTRIC (Piezoelectric)

1315

1312

PIN CODE

329

1311

1286

1309

POINT CHARGE

1288

1208

1333

1206

1331

1377

POINT CURRENT-CHARGE

1379

POINT FLUX

1063

1060

POINT LOAD

520

516

1230

1267

1265

POINT TEMP

584

582

POINTS

274

972

POST

404

943

POWDER

949

Page

PRE STATE

533

PRESS FILM

996

993

PRINT CHOICE

440

PRINT CONTACT

450

PRINT ELEMENT

442

PRINT NODE

445

PRINT SPRING

PRINT STREAMLINE

448

1198

PRINT VMASS

454

PRTCONNECT

227

PSHELL

925

PWELD

357

1064

RAD-CAVITY

1157

RADIATING CAVITY

1156

RBE2

323

RBE3

325

REAUTO

455

REBAR

928

RECEDING SURFACE

1189

REGION (Fluid)

1396

956

RELATIVE DENSITY

958

RESPONSE SPECTRUM

1038

RESTART LAST

460

RESTART

457

1246

RESTRICTOR

1248

ROTATION A

528

RROD

328

Page

SDRC

435

SERVO LINK

321

864

SHAPE MEMORY

870

SHELL TRANSFORMATION

308

SHIFT FUNCTION

1014

1054

959

SOIL

965

SOLVER

398

SPECIFIC WEIGHT

982

SPECIFIED NODES

221

SPLINE

710

SPRINGS

332

START NUMBER

219

STIFSCALE

STRAIN RATE (Fluid)

STRAIN RATE (Material Properties)

STREAM DEFINITION

388

1412

831

1196

STRING

286

SUMMARY

463

367

SUPERELEM

365

SURFACE ENERGY

1183

SURFACES

280

SWLDPRM

359

SYMMETRY

228

TABLE

823

1415

843

1142

1253

THERMAL CONTACT (2-D)

838

1093

Page

1110

1085

1099

THERMAL LOADS

576

THERMO-PORE

1178

1243

THICKNESS

1245

THROAT

1191

TIME-TEMP

TRACK STREAMLINE

860

1199

TRACK

426

TRANSFORMATION

298

TYING

313

UDUMP

462

UFCONN

240

UFRICTION

715

UFXORD

251

UHTCOEF

716

UHTCON

717

UMOTION

714

USDATA

394

UTRANFORM

309

VCCT

597

1167

VELOCITY (Hydrodynamic)

1241

1165

1239

VIEW FACTOR

1155

VISCEL EXP

1016

VISCELFOAM

1013

VISCELMOON

1011

VISCELOGDEN

1012

VISCELORTH

1009

VISCELPROP

VOID CHANGE (with TABLE Input)

WEAR

Page

1008

977

721

WELD FILL

1082

WELD FLUX

1072

1068

WELD PATH

1076

WORK HARD

835

WRITE

254

Marc Volume C: Program Input

MESH2D

Mesh Definition

Program Control

Mechanical Analysis

Contact

Material Properties

Rate Effects

Dynamic Analysis

Diffusion Analysis

Acoustic Analysis

Electrostatic Analysis

1272

Piezoelectric Analysis

1300

Magnetostatic Analysis

Electromagnetic Analysis

Fluid Analysis

214

230

395

481

604

723

997

1017

1200

1222

1255

1394

1317

1363

1238

The model definition input consists of a series of optional blocks of data. These blocks define the

geometry of the mesh, material properties, boundary conditions, and analysis controls.

These options are read in by activating the respective option with an alphanumeric code word

(a keyword), followed by sets of data. In this document, both fixed format and free input are described.

This code word is given in capital letters at the top of each block of data in the following section. An END

OPTION is used to signify the end of all the model definition input data. Note that each option can be

exercised more than once.

In general, there is no specific order required in reading the options; however, you should be aware that

the same option flags can appear in different blocks and that the last data read controls that flag. The

exceptions are as follows:

1. If the FXORD or UFXORD option is used, it must come after the COORDINATES option when it

uses data read in the COORDINATES option;

2. If postprocessor and restart files are being used, the results are order dependent. See the POST

option for more details.

3. If the MESH2D option is used, it must follow the END parameter. If the MESH2D option is used

to write a mesh file containing connectivity, coordinates and optional boundary conditions, the

file needs to be read in sequential order. The CONNECTIVITY option must appear before the

COORDINATES option followed by BOUNDARY conditions if stored on mesh file. Other options

can be in any sequence and the above options can be repeated in any sequence to read data from

other files or data input.

Information given in the last option overwrites any previous information, thus facilitating any minor

corrections to the data. Any option not needed should be left out.

MESH2D

MESH2D

Two-dimensional Mesh Generator

This two-dimensional mesh generator generates a mesh composed of either triangular or quadrilateral

elements. The results of the mesh generation are output on a specified file. This file can then be used as

input for Marc. A detailed description of the capabilities of the MESH2D generation is contained in Marc

Volume A: Theory and User Information.

The call to the mesh generation feature is initialized by a block with MESH2D in the first six columns.

This is followed by a series of optional sets of blocks; each of which has an alphanumeric keyword. The

keywords are:

BLOCKS (Required as first set)

DEFINE

MANY TYPES

START NUMBER

BOUNDARY

SPECIFIED NODES

MAPPER

CONSTRAINT

MERGE

MERGE SELECTIVE

CONNECT

PRTCONNECT

SYMMETRY

GENERATE

BLOCKS must be the first set input. GENERATE must terminate the mesh generation. BLOCKS defines the

parameters and the working space for the mesh generation. GENERATE tells Marc to start generating the

mesh, and then returns control to Marc. You should note that the generated mesh is written out on the

specified file and must be read in from this file using the appropriate model definition data options

(CONNECTIVITY and COORDINATES) described in a following section before plotting or optimization

of the mesh can proceed.

When using the MESH2D option, divide the geometry into simpler regions called blocks. Marc meshes

each block into nodes and elements, and finally combines the blocks to form the complete mesh.

The MESH2D option can be used more than once in an analysis. Simply place the second group to be

included after the previous GENERATE.

215 MESH2D

Define a Two-dimensional Mesh

MESH2D

Description

This option starts the call to the two-dimensional mesh generation feature. This data must follow the END

of the parameters.

Format

Format

Fixed

1-6

Free

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

BLOCKS 216

Define Working Size

BLOCKS

Description

This option defines the parameters and the sizes of the working space for mesh generation.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

1-5

1st

Number of blocks.

6-10

2nd

Note that principal nodes should be continuous in their numbering.

11-15

3rd

Code number of element type for use with Marc series of programs.

16-20

4th

Set to 0 for triangles.

Set to 2 for 8-node quads.

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

31-35

7th

Local file on which the output is written; to be used by the Marc series

of programs.

Not used. Enter 0.

SYMMETRY option.

36-40

8th

generation. Default is 100.

41-45

9th

Number of degrees of freedom for each node. The default is two degrees

of freedom.

46-50

10th

51-55

11th

Define Block Type

Description

This option allows the block type and the nodal number of the boundary points to be specified.

Note:

Volume A: Theory and User Information for correct specification of boundary node number

order when a distributed load has to be applied to any surface of the block.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

One per block.

1-5

1st

Type of block: 1, 2, 3, or 4.

6-10

2nd

between the first and second boundary nodes.

11-15

3rd

Number of intervals in the second direction (P2 - P3). M=N for a type 3

triangular block.

Number of increments between second and third boundary nodes.

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

31-35

7th

of 12 is possible and these must follow the order defined in Marc Volume

A: Theory and User Information.

Etc.

Define Multiple Elements

MANY TYPES

Description

This option allows you to specify different element types per block. Default is that all elements are of the

same type specified in the BLOCKS option.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Etc. for all blocks.

Specify Starting Element

START NUMBER

Description

This option allows you to give a lowest element number and node number for this MESH2D sequence.

This option can be used more than once; for example, if MESH2D is used more than one time in a single

run. Default is that Marc starts generation with element 1 and node 1.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Enter

1-12

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

BOUNDARY 220

Define Boundary Nodes

BOUNDARY

Description

This allows the coordinates of the boundary nodes to be read in.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-8

1st

Boundary node coordinates, one per node; NNO series.

1-5

1st

6-15

2nd

First (X or Z) coordinate.

16-25

3rd

Second (Y or R) coordinate.

Specify Node Coordinates

SPECIFIED NODES

Description

This option allows the coordinates of certain nodes of the generated mesh to be specified.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-15

1st

(maximum 100).

1-5

1st

One per specified node.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

MAPPER 222

Invoke User Subroutine MAP2D

MAPPER

Description

This option invokes the MAP2D user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special

Routines) for boundary node coordinate generation or modification. It is used when it is more convenient

to program the boundary node coordinates rather than reading them in.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

This invokes the MAP2D user subroutine. If the coordinates input on the

BOUNDARY parameter are to be modified, this option must follow the

BOUNDARY parameter.

223 CONSTRAINT

Generate Boundary Condition Constraints

CONSTRAINT

Description

This feature allows boundary conditions to be generated for a particular degree of freedom for all the

nodal points on one side of a block. At the present time, there is no method available for setting boundary

conditions on those nodes generated via the SYMMETRY option.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-25

4th

Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes

Description

This allows a minimum distance between nodes to be specified. Any nodes separated by less than the

minimum distance is automatically merged into a single node.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

1-10

1st

Specify Minimum Distance Between Nodes by Block

MERGE SELECTIVE

Description

This option, used in conjunction with the CONNECT option, allows you to define which nodes are to be

merged in mesh blocks that border each other. This is especially useful if gaps are to be defined between

the blocks.

As with the MERGE option, you specify a minimum distance and a list of block numbers in which nodes

are to be merged. Nodes which are separated by less than the minimum distance specified are considered

duplicates, and merged into a single node if they lie within the same or connected blocks. Nodes located

within the specified minimum distance on unconnected blocks (those disconnected using the CONNECT

option) are not merged.

For more information about connecting blocks, see the description of the CONNECT option in

this document.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-15

1st

Enter the number of sets of data to be used to enter merge distance and

block numbers.

1-5

1st

Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each data set.

3rd data block

1-10

1st

Enter a list of block numbers.

CONNECT 226

Connect or Disconnect Mesh Blocks

CONNECT

Description

This option is used to connect or disconnect two blocks during the generation of the final mesh. Default

is that two blocks are connected if they join the same boundary points in the DEFINE option. It is

especially useful to disconnect two blocks if gaps are to be defined in between the blocks. The MERGE

SELECTIVE option must be used in combination with this option.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-7

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Unit number for input of 3rd data block; defaults to data input.

One per continuation.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Set to 0 to connect the two blocks; set to 1 to disconnect the two blocks.

227 PRTCONNECT

Print Out Block Connections

PRTCONNECT

Description

This option gives a printout of the current BLOCKS connection information.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

SYMMETRY 228

Define Axis of Symmetry

SYMMETRY

Description

This allows symmetry axes to be defined so that further mesh blocks can be generated by reflection about

the axes. Be sure that enough space is allocated in the BLOCKS option.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-8

1st

1-5

21st

One per symmetry axis.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

229 GENERATE

End of Mesh Generation Data

GENERATE

Description

This signifies the end of the mesh generation data and instructs Marc to proceed with the mesh

generation. When the mesh has been generated, Marc proceeds to the next option found in the model

definition options. If you wish to stop without proceeding to plotting or analysis, a blank block should

immediately follow the GENERATE option. This causes Marc to stop on an illegal data exit. Provisions

should be made to save the mesh on permanent file by appropriate control blocks if only mesh generation

is desired.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-8

1st

Mesh Definition

er 3: This section describes the geometry input required to describe the object to be analyzed. The finite

mesh can be generated using MESH2D, Mentat, Patran, or some other preprocessor. The element

Mode element

topology and coordinates can be processed using a variety of options. This final set of connectivity and

coordinates can be written to an auxiliary file through the WRITE option. Additional geometric quantities

l

can be input through the GEOMETRY or NODAL THICKNESS options; see Marc Volume B: Element

Defini Library for the data required for particular element types. The ROTATION A option is used to give the axis

for the calculation of centrifugal loads. The degrees of freedom associated with nodes can be transformed

tion

from their natural system (see Marc Volume B: Element Library for the definition for each particular

Optio element) to a user-defined local system. Kinematic constraints can be imposed between degrees of

freedom using either the TYING or SERVO LINK option. Finally, springs can be defined using the

ns

SPRINGS option.

The NEW parameter can be used to specify a change in format.

Use New Format

Description

This option can be used to switch from input with extended format to the default width or vice-versa.

Input is interpreted to be in the format defined here until another NEW option is encountered. This option

must not appear embedded inside any model definition option.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 if the default width of the data fields is used for input. This

overrides the EXTENDED parameter.

Enter 2 if the double width of the data fields is used for input.

Define Sets

DEFINE (Sets)

Define Sets

Description

This option allows you to define a setname and to associate members to the set. These sets can be used

wherever a list of items is requested. Multiple numbers of sets can be used by repeating this model

definition block. In defining the members of a set, any of the conventions in the Input of List Items in

Chapter 1 Introduction can be used. A previously defined set can be used to describe a set. If the input

version is 10 or greater, the set can be 32 characters in length.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

The rest of this data block is free format beginning with the third field.

11-20

2nd

ELEMENT set of elements

ELSQ

NODE

set of nodes

NDSQ

INT

LAYER

DOF

INCS

POINT

set of points

CURVE

set of curves

BODY

EDGE

FACE

EDGEMT

Marc Mentat convention.

FACEMT

Mentat convention.

Define Sets

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

ORNSUR

in Marc convention

1 top surface

2 bottom surface.

ORNCUR

Marc convention:

1 top surface

2 bottom surface.

MNORSU

in Marc Mentat convention:

0 top surface

1 bottom surface.

Marc Mentat convention:

0 top surface

1 bottom surface.

ELNODE

21-30

3rd

relative_node is 1 or 2 for 2-node beam element.

Enter the word OSET for an open set (see Note 4).

31-62

4th

1-80

Notes:

1st

Enter a list of items that are of the type defined to be members of the set

whose name is given.

(1) A setname cannot be used in a list unless it has been previously defined.

(2) For unsorted set types DOF, ELSQ, and NDSQ, the verbs EXCEPT and INTERSECT

cannot be used in the list of items.

(3) EDGE, EDGEMT, FACE, FACEMT, ORNSUR, MNORSU, ORNCUR, MNORCU can only be

used with the table input format.

(4) When an open set is requested, nodes or elements not defined elsewhere are not

automatically created.

(5) If this option is used to define domains associated with the DDM procedure, the name

of the set should be DOMAINi where i is the domain number.

Define Sets

Example

The example below defines a set to be called WALL consisting of nodes 1, 3, 5, 7, 19.

DEFINE NODE SET WALL

1 TO 20 BY 2

The example below defines a set to be called LOADIT consisting of edge 2 of elements 1, 3, 5, 7, ... 19.

DEFINE EDGE SET LOADIT

1:2 TO 20:2 BY 2

235 CONNECTIVITY

Specify Element Connectivity

CONNECTIVITY

Description

This series gives the element connectivity; for example, the nodal points for each element. Data can be

input from data or an external file by exercising the appropriate option. For two-dimensional elements,

the nodal points must be given in a counterclockwise sequence. Several blocks of connectivity data can

be input. For example, one block can be read in from file while additional ones are read from data blocks,

each block starting with the word CONNECTIVITY.

In a coupled thermal-stress analysis, the element type (second field, 3rd data block) should be a stress

type element if both a structural and thermal analysis is required. If a heat transfer element type is given,

the element is considered rigid in the stress analysis.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-12

1st

In many cases, when the whole mesh is in a file, just CONNECTIVITY and a blank should be included

here and the INPUT TAPE parameter must be used.

2nd data block

1-5

1st

number of elements in the mesh.

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number for input of connectivity; defaults to unit number

specified on the INPUT TAPE parameter.

11-15

3rd

this option.

Element connectivity array. This data block is repeated once for each element given in data block 2.

1-5

1st

Element number.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Nodal point.

CONNECTIVITY 236

Specify Element Connectivity

Format

Fixed

16-20

21-25

Free

4th

Data

Entry Entry

I

Nodal point.

Repeat until all nodes of the element have been defined. The required

ordering of the nodes is given in Marc Volume A: Theory and

User Information.

Continuation for elements with more than 14 nodes/element (for example,

library element 21, 35, 57, etc.) is in format 16I5.

Specify Element Connectivity Interpolator

CONN FILL

Description

This option completes the filling of connectivity lists by generating midside nodes in between the corner

nodes provided. At the same time, it generates coordinates for the new node created. The coordinates are

formed by averaging the coordinates of the end nodes of the respective side on the connectivity list. It is

used for converting linear displacement elements to quadratic displacement elements. The option works

for 4-node quadrilaterals and 8-node bricks. You must remember to turn on the bandwidth optimization

option after using this option and before an analysis.

Note:

This does not calculate the coordinates correctly if going from element 4 to element 22

or 24.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 to set the node count to the maximum node number used in

this option.

11-15

3rd

Default is 1.

16-20

4th

Give the end of the element list for this option. Default is number of

elements specified in the analysis.

Copy Element Connectivity Data

CONN GENER

Description

This input performs the function of an incremental mesh generator by copying the pattern of the

connectivity data for previously defined elements. If the new elements are to be connected to the

master elements, a common node A needs to be given. The position of node A in the connectivity list of

the new element and its position in the connectivity list of the master element needs to be given. Marc

then numbers all the other nodes in the new element by making the algebraic difference between the

numbers of all the nodes in the new element the same as that of the corresponding nodes in the element

being copied.

This option copies the connectivity from a series of elements defined by a starting and end element

number and uses it to calculate the connectivity for a new series of elements. The new series of elements

is defined by the input of a starting and end element number. When the list of the elements being copied

from is ended, the recently generated elements will take its place as the elements to be copied from. This

is repeated until the list defined for the new elements is exhausted.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

Number of the first element for which the connectivity is being generated.

6-10

2nd

Number of the last element for which the connectivity is being generated.

All the elements between the first and last element will be generated.

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

element. Node A can belong to a master element. If there is no common

node between the generated and the master elements, enter 1.

26-30

6th

Give the position of node A in the connectivity list of the master element.

If there is no common node, enter 1.

Copy Element Connectivity Data

Format

Fixed

31-35

Free

7th

Data

Entry Entry

I

Enter 2 for decrease of 2 elements per series of master elements. The two

element decrease is restricted to use with three-node triangular elements.

36-40

8th

generated and master elements. This defines an increment to each of the

nodes in the master element which then gives the connectivity list of the

generated element.

UFCONN 240

Invoke the UFCONN User Subroutine

UFCONN

Description

This option calls the UFCONN user subroutine to generate or modify element connectivity (see Marc

Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.) The option can be repeated as often as necessary.

This option must follow the CONNECTIVITY option. The user subroutine is called as soon as this option

is encountered.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Dat

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

Enter a list of elements for which the UFCONN user subroutine is called.

241 COORDINATES

Enter Node Coordinates

COORDINATES

Description

This option defines the coordinates of each nodal point. The nodal data can be input in several blocks.

The latest data input for a particular nodal point is used. Like the element connectivity data, this data can

be input from an external file since this coordinate data can be automatically generated by a mesh

generator. Local corrections can be made to the generated mesh by input of the modified nodal

coordinates from data blocks.

Usually for the general shell elements (4, 8, and 24), the FXORD option and the UFXORD user subroutine

can help with input of coordinates.

In Marc, the nodes need not be numbered sequentially.

In most cases, when all the coordinates are input by file, just the coordinates and a blank are required here

and the INPUT TAPE parameter must be used.

If the COORD SYSTEM, CYLINDRICAL, or FXORD options are used, the coordinate positions entered

here are with respect to coordinate system entered in these options.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-11

1st

1-5

1st

node; defaults to the number of coordinates per node. Repeated

COORDINATES blocks need not have the same value in this field.

6-10

2nd

Enter the number of nodal points read-in in this option; (optional) default

to the number of nodes in the mesh.

11-15

3rd

Enter the unit number for input of coordinates; defaults to the file number

specified on the INPUT TAPE parameter.

16-20

4th

option input.

One data line per nodal point.

1-5

1st

6-15

2nd

Coordinate 1.

16-25

3rd

Coordinate 2.

COORDINATES 242

Enter Node Coordinates

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

26-35

4th

Coordinate 3.

36-45

5th

Coordinate 4.

Etc.

Etc.

See library element description in Marc Volume B: Element Library for the

definition of coordinates for a particular element.

Input 6 coordinates per data line; continuation data lines in format 6E10.5.

Insert File into the Input File

Description

Inserts an external file into the input file. The include statement may appear in either the parameter,

model definition, or history definition section. In Marc, an include file may reference another include

file up to a level of 10 deep. The total length of the file name, including the directory path is limited to

240 characters.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-80

2nd

Physical filename.

If the file name is specified without a path, the file should be in the same

directory as the input file. If a path is given, the file should be in the path

relative to the current working directory. Also, note that the file name is

case sensitive and blanks should not be included in the name.

FXORD 244

Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates

FXORD

Description

This option is used to generate coordinates for Elements 4, 8, or 24. (Refer to Marc Volume B: Element

Library and Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information for further information on the use of this

block). This can be used for mapping of certain types of standard shell geometries such as cylinders,

spheres, etc. It can also be used to transform cylindrical coordinates into Cartesian coordinates.

The CYLINDRICAL or COORD SYSTEM options are more powerful for cylindrical coordinates.

Note that when a continuous surface has a line of discontinuity in 1 or 2 (the surface coordinate) such

as a complete cylinder has at = 0 and 360, two nodes must be placed at each nodal location on the

line to allow the distinct coordinate input, and tying type 100 used to join degrees of freedom. In general,

different surfaces coming together must also use the intersecting shell tyings.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

11-12

2nd

Enter the word NO if coordinates after FXORD are not to be printed out.

1-5

1st

Data blocks 3, 4, 5, and 6 are provided once for each consecutive series of nodes with a different shell

geometry specification.

3rd data block

1-5

1st

Identification number of surface type. See Table 3-1 and Marc Volume A:

Theory and User Information.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

to the global (x,y,z) set. If so, data blocks 4, 5 and 6 must be input to define

the transformation. If not, data blocks 4, 5 and 6 are omitted.

245 FXORD

Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of the origin of the local (x,y,z) system in which the shell surface

is generated.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of a point on the positive x-axis of the local system.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

Enter the global (x,y,z) coordinates of a point on, or near to, the positive y-axis of the local system. This

point defines the local (x,y) plane in the global system.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

Table 3-1 describes the1,2 directions for the FXORD option contained in Marc.

FXORD 246

Coordinate Generation and Transformation Coordinates

Table 3-1

Input to FXORD

Nodal Data Input

(See Marc Volume A:

Input

Code

Type

User Information

Surface

Description

General Surface

Surface

x3=x3(x1, x2)

unless specified otherwise

All 11 Coords. for El. 8

All 14 Coords. for El. 4

2

x 3 x 3 x 3

x 1 x 2 x 3 -------- -------- ----------------x 1 x 2 x 1 x 2

Surface

Coordinates

used in

program

(1, 2)

1, 2,

NonCartesian

Coordinate

s

YES

x1, x2

YES

YES

element type 4)

2

Axisymmetric shell

(about x3 axis)

R

R ------

(in radians)

dR

length------- in ------------------units

d

radians

General Cylinder

dx 1 dx 2

s x 3 x 1 x 2 -------- -------ds ds

s, x3

NO

Circular Cylinder

q, x3, R: in degrees

NO

(about x3 axis)

R, , x3

(R, in length

measure)

x1, x2

x1, x2

NO

Curved Pipe

, r, R: , in degrees

r and R at 1st node only

r, , R,

(both in length

measure)

YES

(elbow)

7

Cylindrical

r, , x3

x1, x2, x3

NO

Spherical

r, ,

x1, x2, x3

NO

Generate Coordinates for Circular Arcs

NODE CIRCLE

Description

This option generates the coordinates of a series of nodes which lie on a circular arc. The coordinates of

the first node on the arc must be previously given. The circle must lie in the x-y plane.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

the second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is

used for 8 node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is

entered in this field.

21-25

5th

100 percent is used.

26-35

6th

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Coordinate Interpolation for Incremental Mesh Generation

NODE FILL

Description

This option performs the function of an incremental mesh generator for nodes. It achieves this by

interpolation. In its simplest form, it takes the coordinates defined by two end nodes and divides the line

between them into a specified number of equally spaced nodes. Additional data can be input to vary the

distances between the generated nodes in a geometric ratio. This option is often used with the UFXORD

user subroutine to obtain a warped curve in space.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

Number of the first node in the series. The coordinate data for this node

must have been previously defined.

6-10

2nd

Number of the last node in the series. The coordinate data for this node

must have been previously defined.

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is used for

8-node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is entered in this

field.

21-25

5th

default of 100 percent is used.

26-30

6th

Number of times that the series will be repeated. You should ensure that

all starting and ending nodes in the series have been defined previously.

This repeat feature defaults to 1 series.

31-35

7th

Print flag is set equal to 1, nodal coordinate printout is omitted. If set equal

to 2, only the generated coordinates are printed. If set equal to 0 or left

blank, all coordinates are printed.

36-40

8th

Increment in first and last nodes in the series if the series is repeated more

than once. Defaults so that the next series will start from the node after the

last node in the preceding series.

Generate Node Coordinates

NODE GENER

Description

This option performs the function of an incremental mesh generator for nodes. It is used when elements

such as the quadratic 8-node elements require different spacing in successive nodal rows. It achieves this

by using a list of nodes as the master pattern. It then creates a new set of nodes by giving the new set of

nodes the same coordinate spacing as the list of nodes. Additional optional data allows the spacing to be

changed as a percentage of the spacing between the nodes. When the list of nodes is used up, the newly

generated nodes takes its place on the list and the process is repeated until the number of nodes to be

generated has been completed.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

Number of the first node for which coordinates are being generated. This

coordinate data for this node must have been previously defined).

6-10

2nd

Number of the last node in the series. (This coordinate data for this node

must have been previously defined.)

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

Increment in the node numbers of the two node series above. A default

value of 1 is used.

26-30

6th

second increment alternates the increment in node numbers and is used for

8-node quadrilaterals. It is only used if a nonzero number is entered in this

field.

31-35

7th

of 100 percent is used.

36-40

8th

Enter 2 for a decrease of 2 nodes per series.

41-45

9th

If set equal to 2, only the generated coordinates are printed.

If set equal to 0 or left blank, all coordinates are printed.

Merge Duplicate Nodes

NODE MERGE

Description

This option searches through all the nodes and merges all nodes which are closer to each other than a

minimum-specified distance. The default minimum distance is 0.001

The merge provision only alters the node numbers defined by the COORDINATES and CONNECTIVITY

options. Loading and boundary conditions must be applied to the new node numbers after nodal merge.

The node merge command cannot be used with shells or beam elements.

The WRITE option can be used to save the new mesh.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

Set to 1 to set the node count to the minimum number found after the use

of this option.

6-10

2nd

Default is 1.

11-15

3rd

Set to last node number for nodal merge. Default to total number of nodes

specified in SIZING parameter.

16-25

4th

26-30

5th

251 UFXORD

Invoke the UFXORD User Subroutine

UFXORD

Description

This block invokes the call to the UFXORD user subroutine to generate or modify nodal coordinates (see

Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines). The block can be repeated as often as

necessary. This option must follow the COORDINATES option.

If the nodes are specified in the CYLINDRICAL or COORD SYSTEM options, the coordinates defined in

the user subroutine are with respect to the local coordinate system.

The user subroutine is called as soon as this option is encountered.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

Enter a list of nodes for which the UFXORD user subroutine is called.

CYLINDRICAL 252

Define Cylindrical Coordinate System

CYLINDRICAL

Description

This option allows for the input of a cylindrical coordinate system such that both the nodal input and

output of a group of nodal points are treated in this cylindrical coordinate system. For nodes listed in this

option, nodal input (that is, COORDINATES, POINT LOAD, FIXED DISP, INITIAL DISP, INITIAL VEL,

etc.) and nodal output (that is, incremental and total displacements, etc.) are to be given in the cylindrical

coordinate system defined here.

Note:

All coordinate systems defined with this option are based upon the original model and they

are not updated during the analysis.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

coordinates and nodal transformations after the END OPTION option.

3rd data block coordinates of origin

1-10

1st

defining origin of cylindrical coordinate system.

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

1-10

1st

such that vector from origin to this point defines the z axis of cylindrical

coordinate system.

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

253 CYLINDRICAL

Define Cylindrical Coordinate System

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Note:

they are reset to (0., 0., 1.). This is the default for

two-dimensional cylindrical coordinates.

1-10

1st

point such that a vector from the origin to this point defines the axis from

which is measured in planes perpendicular to the z-axis.

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

Note:

they are reset to (1., 0., 0.).

Point 1

Origin

Y

X Point 2

Enter a list of nodes using this cylindrical coordinate system. Marc

assumes that the coordinates of these nodes are given in cylindrical

coordinates with respect to the cylindrical axes defined in data blocks 3,

4 and 5. Coordinates are entered as r, theta, z, where theta is in degrees.

Marc also calculates nodal transformations for these nodes such that

all nodal input and output is given with respect to the cylindrical

coordinate system attached to these nodes.

WRITE 254

Write Connectivity and Coordinates

WRITE

Description

This option allows you to write the final connectivity and coordinates to an auxiliary file. The values

written are those after all internal mesh generations (MESH2D, FXORD or incremental generators) and

all external (UFXORD, UFCONN) transformations have been performed. The coordinates are output in

the global system, not in the local coordinate system specified in either the CYLINDRICAL or COORD

SYSTEM options. All node numbers are in the user system; that is, nonoptimized.

Note:

The connectivity and coordinates data are written to the auxiliary file in the format (default

or extended) based on the last related valid option (see the EXTENDED parameter as well

as the NEW (model and history definition options).

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

255 ADAPTIVE

Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

ADAPTIVE

Description

This model definition set controls the error criteria for local adaptive meshing. The ADAPTIVE parameter

must also be included.

The capability can be used for lower-order elements, 3-node triangular solids and shells, 4-node

quadrilateral solids and shells, 4-node tetrahedrals, 8-node hexahedral elements, and the 8-node

solid-shell elements. Local adaptive meshing cannot be used with the triangular and tetrahedral

Herrmann elements, type 155 - 157.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-8

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

every increment.

16-20

4th

Enter the unit number to which the adaptive mesh data will be written.

21-25

5th

which is attached to a curve or surface is subdivided. By default, the new

nodes are projected to the curve or surface.

Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated in pairs for each criteria selected.

3rd data block

1-5

1st

1: Mean Strain Energy

Subdivide element if:

element strain energy > f1 * total strain

energy/NUMEL

f2 to f6 is not used

ADAPTIVE 256

Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

2: Zienkiewicz-Zhu Error Criterion

The error norm is defined as

dV

----------------------------------------------------------2

2

dV + dV

2

E E dV

----------------------------------------------------------2

2

E dV + E E dV

2

or

X =

dV

and Y = E E dV

2

AES = f2 * X/NUMEL + f3 * X * f1//NUMEL

The allowable element strain energy error is

AEE = f4 * Y/NUMEL + f5 * X * f1//NUMEL

where

NUMEL is the number of elements in the mesh.

If f2, f3, f4, f5 are input as zero, f2 = 1.0.

If stress error testing is to be performed, f1 0

and f2 and/or f3 0, f4 = 0, f5 = 0.

The element will be subdivided when:

> f1 and Xel > AES.

If strain energy error testing is to be performed,

f1 0 and f2 = 0, f3 = 0, f4 0, and/or f5 0.

The element will be subdivided when:

> f1 and Yel > AEE

The default is f2 = 1.0 if f2, f3, f4, f5 are input

as 0.0.

It is advisable that f2 + f3 1 or f4 + f5 1.0.

3: Stress Discontinuity (not yet implemented)

257 ADAPTIVE

Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

4: Node within Box

Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes:

f1 < x < f2 and f3 < y < f4 and f5 < z < f6

The coordinates of the box may be moved at the end of each

increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the box may be

automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields of

the 3rd data block.

-4: Node location within box

Subdivision criteria is the same as Type 4.

If all nodes of element leave the box, the subdivided elements are

merged together.

The coordinates of the box may be moved at the end of each

increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the box may be

automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields of

the 3rd data block.

5: Node in Contact

Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes is in contact or

belongs to a segment which is contacted

f1 to f6 are not used, enter 0 or blank

6: Aspect Ratio (not yet implemented)

7: Skewness Ratio (not yet implemented)

8: Thermal Gradient (used for heat transfer and coupled analysis)

Subdivide element if:

gradient > maximum gradient * f1

or gradient > f2

and temperature > f3 (if given)

typical value of f1 = 0.75 (f1 must be < 1.0)

f4 to f8 are not used, enter 0 or blank

9: Equivalent stress, strain

Subdivide element if:

von Mises stress > f1 * maximum von

Mises stress

or

ADAPTIVE 258

Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

von Mises stress > f2

Equivalent strain > f3 * maximum equivalent strain

or

Equivalent strain > f4

Equivalent plastic strain > f5 maximum equivalent plastic strain

or

Equivalent plastic strain > f6

Equivalent creep strain > f7*maximum equivalent creep strain

or

Equivalent creep strain > f8.

10: User subroutine UADAP

Subdivide element if:

user/maximum user > f1 or user > f2

f3 to f6 are not used, enter 0 or blank

user is defined in user subroutine UADAP

11: Previously Defined Mesh

Use the refined mesh from a previous analysis as the starting point

to this analysis.

(see 4th data block).

12. Zienkiewicz-Zhu plastic strain error criterion:

2

p 2

* dV

= ------------------------------------------------------------p2

p* p 2

dV + dV

p

A =

p*

p 2

dV

A/NUMEL + f3 * A * f1//NUMEL

The element will be subdivided when: > f1 and Ae > AEPS.

NUMEL is the number of elements in the mesh.

259 ADAPTIVE

Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

13. Zienkiewicz-Zhu creep strain error criterion:

c 2

* dV

------------------------------------------------------------c2

c* c 2

dV + dV

c

B =

c*

c 2

dV

+ f3 * B * f1//NUMEL

The element will be subdivided when:

> f1 and Bel > AECS.

NUMEL is the number of elements in the mesh.

14: Pressure Gradient (used only for diffusion analysis)

gradient > maximum gradient * f1

or gradient > f2

and pressure > f3 (if given)

typical value of f1 = 0.75 (f1 must be < 1.0)

15: Electrical Potential Gradient (used only for electrostatic analysis)

Subdivide element if:

gradient > maximum gradient * f1

or gradient > f2

and potential > f3 (if given)

typical value of f1 = 0.75 (f1 must be < 1.0)

16: Magnetic Potential Gradient (used only for magnetostatic analysis)

Subdivide element if:

gradient > maximum gradient * f1

or gradient > f2

and potential > f3 (if given)

typical value of f1 = 0.75 (f1 must be < 1.0)

17. Elements in cutter path. This criterion can only be used for analysis

of NC Machining problems.

ADAPTIVE 260

Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

18. Angle between shell elements.

Subdivide element if the change in the angle between neighboring

shell elements is larger than f1.

19: Node location within a Cylindrical Region

Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes is in the region

defined by a cylinder:

f1 = radius

f2 = x-coordinate of first point on axis

f3 = y-coordinate of first point on axis

f4 = z-coordinate of first point on axis

f5 = x-coordinate of second point on axis

f6 = y-coordinate of second point on axis

f7 = z-coordinate of second point on axis

The coordinates of the box may be moved at the end of each

increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the box may be

automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields of

the 3rd data block.

-19: Node location within a Cylindrical Region

Subdivision criteria is the same as Type 19.

If all nodes of element leave the cylinder, the subdivided elements

are merged together.

The coordinates of the cylinder may be moved at the end of each

increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the cylinder

may be automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th

fields of the 3rd data block.

20: Node location within a Spherical Region

Subdivide element if at least one of the nodes:

f1 = radius

f2 = x-coordinate of center

f3 = y-coordinate of center

f4 = z-coordinate of center

261 ADAPTIVE

Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

The coordinates of the box may be moved at the end of each

increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the box may be

automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields of

the 3rd data block.

-20: Node location within Spherical Region

Subdivision criteria is the same as Type 20.

If all nodes of element leave the sphere, the subdivided elements

are merged together.

The coordinates of the sphere may be moved at the end of each

increment using the UADAPBOX user subroutine or the sphere may

be automatically created and moved based on the 3rd and 4th fields

of the 3rd data block.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

follow weld pool.

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

Not used.

26-30

6th

Not used.

31-63

7th

Enter the name of the element set that will use this criteria. Default

is to apply the adaptive criteria to all elements.

Fields 3 and 4 are currently only used for the NODE IN BOX criterion in conjunction with a welding

analysis. Weld pool dimensions should be specified in the WELD FLUX option. Box dimensions

specified in the 4th data block below are not used.

4th data block (except for criteria type 11)

1-10

1st

First parameter f1

11-20

2nd

Second parameter f2

21-30

3rd

Third parameter f3

31-40

4th

Fourth parameter f4

41-50

5th

Fifth parameter f5

ADAPTIVE 262

Define Error Criteria Used in Adaptive Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

51-60

6th

Sixth parameter f6

61-70

7th

Seventh parameter f7

71-80

8th

Include the data file written by the previous analysis (the unit number was specified on the second

data block).

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

ADAPT GLOBAL (Model Definition) Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Description

This model definition set provides control parameters used for the global adaptive remeshing. The

REZONING parameter must also be included in the parameter section.

The ADAPT GLOBAL model definition option can also be used to support boundary conditions assigned

to the remeshing body for 2-D, 3-D solid (tetrahedral) and 3-D shell. When applying boundary

conditions, the new table style input format is preferred.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-8

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Not used.

The 3rd through 5th data blocks are repeated as a set for each body to be remeshed.

3rd data block

1-5

1st

Enter 3 for Delaunay 2-D mesher.

Enter 4 for 2-D Overlay mesher.

Enter 5 for 3-D Overlay Hexahedral mesher.

Enter 6 for Delaunay 3-D tetrahedral mesher.

Enter 7 for Relax mesh generator.

Enter 8 for Stretch mesh generator.

Enter 9 for Shave mesh generator.

Enter 10 for quadtree mesher. (Simufact externally supplied)

Enter 11 for MD Patran 3-D tetrahedral meshers.

Enter 12 for triangular shell mesh generator.

Enter 18 for reading new mesh from .mesh file.

Note:

remeshing body number and jobid is the job name.

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter 19 for quadrilateral shell mesh generator.

6-10

2nd

Enter 2 if first relax mesh; if that fails, do full remeshing.

Enter 3 if relax mesh only.

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Note:

ELEMENTS parameter.

21-25

5th

26-30

6h

31-35

7th

0 Default; no message print out.

1 Some message print out.

100 Prints out more messages and saves all the meshing input files. For

details about these files, see Appendix I: 3-D Remeshing Files.

Repeat the 4th block for each criteria (5th field, 3rd data block).

4th data block

1-5

1st

Enter 2 if element distortion is used (2-D only).

Enter 3 if angle based.

Enter 4 if aspect ratio based.

Enter 5 if strain change.

Enter 6 if penetration based.

Enter 7 if force remeshing at next opportunity.

Enter 8 if recession distance based.

6-10

2nd

11-20

3rd

For criteria 3, enter maximum change in angle from the reference angle

for quadrilaterals. Default is 40. The reference angle is the angle of the

current mesh without deformation. For 3-D analysis, enter minimum

volume ratio for hexahedral element. Default is 0.1.

For criteria 4, enter the maximum aspect ratio allowed. Default is 10.0.

For criteria 5, enter maximum change of equivalent strain allowed before

remeshing occurs.

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Default is 0.4.

For criteria 6, enter the penetration limit; default is 2*contact tolerance.

For criteria 8, enter the maximum element side reduction fraction before

remeshing occurs.

If current length divided by the original length < tolerance, remeshing

will occur.

21-30

4th

For criteria 3, enter maximum change in angle from the reference angle

for triangles. Default is 40. The reference angle is the angle of the current

mesh without deformation.

For 3-D analysis, enter minimum volume ratio for tetrahedral element.

Default is 0.1.

For criteria 8, enter the total amount of recession before remeshing occurs.

Two-dimensional Advancing Front All Quadrilateral or Mixed Mesher - Mesher type = 2

1-5

1st

Enter 1 for mixed quadrilateral/triangular mesh.

Enter 2 for all triangular mesh.

6-15

2nd

16-25

3rd

Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments. (Default = 120)

26-30

4th

control.

If both the 2nd and 4th fields are default, the number of elements in the

previous mesh are used.

31-35

5th

Enter number of divisions of line segments to fit a curvature circle.

Default = 36.

Enter -1 to obtain uniform outline points.

36-45

6th

46-55

7th

56-65

8th

Default means no such control. Total of five remeshing trials will be used

to create the mesh to meet the requirement. Not to be used for the

remeshing with the automatic stop-and-restart option.

66-75

9th

76-80

10th

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Two-dimensional Delaunay Triangular Mesher - Mesher type = 3

1-5

1st

6-15

2nd

16-25

3rd

Enter outline vertex angle of the two adjacent segments (default 120).

26-30

4th

control.

31-35

5th

Enter number of divisions of line segments to fit a curvature circle.

Default = 36.

Enter -1 to obtain uniform outline points.

36-45

6th

46-55

7th

56-65

8th

Default means no such control. Total of five remeshing trials will be used

to create the mesh to meet the requirement. Not to be used for the

remeshing with the automatic stop-and-restart option.

66-75

9th

76-80

10th

Two-dimensional Overlay Quadrilateral Mesher - Mesher type = 4

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

if necessary.

Enter 2 if elements on the boundary in contact are to be refined two levels

if necessary.

16-20

3rd

at a time will be merged.

21-25

4th

control.

26-30

5th

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

31-40

6th

41-50

7th

51-60

8th

Default means no such control. Total of five remeshing trials will be used

to create the mesh to meet the requirement. Not to be used for the

remeshing with the automatic stop-and-restart option.

Three-dimensional Delaunay Tetrahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 6

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

A value of 1 means that all element edges between elements not in the

same plane will be considered a hard edge.

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

Gap distance.

51-55

6th

56-60

7th

Relax Mesh Generator - Mesher type = 7

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-20

3rd

Enter the sweep distance, nodes closer than this distance will be swept

together.

Stretch Generator - Mesher type = 8

1-5

1st

Enter the first corner node number, if zero, then the second field gives the

streamline region that is used to define the stretching orientation.

6-10

2nd

region number.

11-15

3rd

Enter the contact body which if nodes contact, they should not be

adjusted, if zero all nodes will be adjusted.

16-20

4th

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

31-35

7th

Shave Mesh Generator - Mesher type = 9

This 5th data block is not required.

5th data block

Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 11

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Minimum element edge length; default 1/3 of the element edge length.

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-55

6th

56-60

7th

61-65

8th

cycle. Default = 0 (no such control).

66-70

9th

Default = 0 (no such control).

71-80

10th

Default = 3*element edge length.

Three-dimensional Triangular Shell Mesher - Mesher type = 12

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Minimum element edge length; default 1/3 of the element edge length.

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-55

6th

56-60

7th

61-65

8th

cycle. Default = 0 (no such control).

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format

Fixed

66-70

Free

9th

Data

Entry Entry

I

Default = 0 (no such control).

71-80

10th

Default = 3*element edge length.

Three-dimensional Triangular Shell Mesher - Mesher type = 19

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Minimum element edge length; default 1/3 of the element edge length.

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-55

6th

56-60

7th

61-65

8th

66-70

9th

Default = 0 (no such control).

71-80

10th

Default = 3*element edge length.

Reading .mesh file - Mesher type = 18

1-10

1st

Enter 1 for mesh file in .t18 format

Enter 2 for mesh file in .feb format

Enter 3 for mesh file in .dat format (Marc input format)

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher - Mesher type = 5

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

Enter edge parameter (value is between 0.0 and 1.0). A value of 1 means

that all element edges between elements not in the same plane will be

considered a hard edge.

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

41-50

5th

Minimum edge length. If an edge length is less than this value, it will not

be considered as a hard edge.

51-60

6th

Minimum edge angle. If the angle between element faces is less than this

value, the common edge will not be considered as a hard edge.

61-70

7th

Gap distance.

71-75

8th

Enter 1 if grid-based template

Enter 2 if mesh-based template.

Enter 3 if kernel-based template.

76-80

9th

Two-dimensional Advancing Front or Delaunay Mesher [if refinement boxes are used]

Repeat for each box (6th field, 5th data block)

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

0 = refinement in box.

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-30

5th

31-40

6th

41-50

8th

51-60

9th

Three-dimensional MD Patran Tetrahedral Mesher [if refinement boxes are used]

Repeat for each box (6th field, 5th data block)

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

0 = refinement in box.

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-30

5th

31-40

6th

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

41-50

7th

51-60

8th

61-70

9th

71-80

10th

Two-dimensional Quadtree Mesher or 3-D Hexahedral Mesher

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

Enter 1 to allow wedge elements.

Enter to split hexahedral elements.

31-35

7th

(default).

Enter 2 to avoid shuffle.

36-40

8th

accuracy, but increases the cost.

41-45

9th

46-50

10th

51-55

11th

Type of enhancement.

56-60

12th

Edge detection:

Enter 0 to detect new edges and use contact data.

Enter 1 to use contact data only.

Enter 2 to detect new edges.

Enter 3 to not use edge information.

Enter 4 to use previously detected edges, new edges, and contact

information.

Enter 5 to use contact data and previous edges.

Enter 6 to use user edges previously detected and new edges.

Enter 7 to use previous edge information only.

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher only

1-5

1st

Grid type:

Enter 1 for Cartesian (default).

Enter 2 for cylindrical.

Enter 3 for user defined.

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 for axis aligned with x-direction.

Enter 2 for axis aligned with y-direction.

Enter 3 for axis aligned with z-direction.

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only [Version 11 only]

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher Only And Template-based Mesh Requested

1-32

1st

Define Meshing Parameters Used in Global Remeshing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Three-dimensional Overlay Hexahedral Mesher [if refinement boxes are used]

One can either specify that refinement is in a box based upon coordinate positions or between

two bodies.

Repeat for each box (1st field, 6th data block)

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

0 = refinement in the box.

1 = minimum number of elements in x-direction between bodies.

2 = minimum number of elements in y-direction between bodies.

3 = minimum number of elements in z-direction between bodies.

4 = exact number of elements in x-direction between bodies.

5 = exact number of elements in y-direction between bodies.

6 = exact number of elements in z-direction between bodies.

11-15

3rd

rigid body

16-20

4th

rigid body

21-30

5th

31-40

6th

41-50

7th

51-60

8th

61-70

9th

71-80

10th

POINTS 274

Define Geometric Points

POINTS

Description

These geometrical entities are used with the ADAPTIVE, ADAPT GLOBAL, or for prescribing boundary

conditions. Finite elements entities are associated with these geometric entities using the ATTACH NODE

options. The use of POINTS with these options has the following consequences:

1. ADAPT GLOBAL, ATTACH NODE

If a node is attached to a point entity, then this point is considered a hard point. Upon remeshing,

a new node will always be located at this point. This facilitates the application of fixed

displacements, point loads, etc.

2. ATTACH NODE and all nodal based boundary conditions

If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the point,

then all nodes attached to the point will have the boundary condition applied.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

1-5

1st

Point identifier

6-15

2nd

X-coordinate of point.

16-25

3rd

Y-coordinate of point.

26-35

4th

Z-coordinate of point.

275 CURVES

Define Geometric Curves

CURVES

Description

These geometrical entities are used with the ADAPTIVE, ADAPT GLOBAL, or for prescribing boundary

conditions. Finite elements entities are associated with these geometric entities using the ATTACH NODE

or ATTACH EDGE options. The use of CURVES with these options has the following consequences:

1. ADAPTIVE, ATTACH NODE, ATTACH EDGE, ELASTIC

If the nodes of an element edge (2-D) are attached to a curve then if this element is subdivided,

the newly created node will be placed on the curve. If ATTACH NODE or ATTACH EDGE are not

used, the newly created nodes are placed midway between the original nodes of this edge (face).

2. ATTACH EDGE and all boundary condition options

Distributed loads, foundations, and films may be applied to curves. All finite elements that have

edges attached to these curves will be appropriately loaded.

3. ATTACH NODE and all nodal based boundary conditions

If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the curve,

then all nodes that are attached to the curve will have the boundary condition applied.

4. ADAPT GLOBAL

If boundary conditions are applied to a curve, then, when a new mesh is created using ADAPT

GLOBAL, the edges are reattached to the curves automatically and the boundary conditions are

correctly applied.

5. CAVITY

The CAVITY option may use curves defined here as symmetry surfaces.

You can either directly enter the coordinates/dimensions of the curves or define geometric point entities

and then reference these point entities using negative curve types. In the following pages, this is called

relational input and is available for 2-D Polylines, Circular Arc, Circle, 2-D NURBS (internally

generated). This is the preferred input style.

Orientation

A curve has an orientation associated with it. This has three consequences:

1. If a table has an independent value of arc length and elements are attached to this curve. The

arc length is a monotonically increasing function which has a value of zero at the beginning of

the curve.

CURVES 276

Define Geometric Curves

2. If an axisymmetric shell or 2-D beam is attached to the curve, and a distributed boundary

condition is applied to the curve, then

for mechanical loads:

a. a positive load on the top surface is in the direction opposite to the normal,

b. a positive load on the bottom surface is in the direction of the normal.

for thermal loads:

a. a positive load on the top surface is a flux added to the first degree of freedom,

b. a positive load on the bottom surface is a flux added to the last degree of freedom.

3. A radiating cavity has an orientation based upon the normal to the surface.

The normal to a curve is based upon the right-hand rule relative to the direction of the curve.

When specifying the top and bottom surfaces of a curve, the following format is used in the ATTACH

EDGE, DIST LOADS, FILMS, FOUNDATION, EMISSIVITY, and CAVITY options.

Marc

Mentat

top

bottom

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

1-5

1st

Curve identifier

6-10

2nd

1: 3-D Polyline

2: 2-D Circular Arc

3: 2-D Circle

4: 2-D NURBS Curve (full description)

277 CURVES

Define Geometric Curves

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

5: 2-D NURBS Curve (internally generate)

6: 3-D Trimming Curve

If the curve type is a negative number, it uses relational input format.

For nonrelational input, use data block series 4a and 5a. For relational input, use data block 4b.

4a data block

1-5

1st

Enter the coordinate points, one per line.

1-10

1st

X-coordinate.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate.

Enter a list of point identifiers making up the polyline.

B. CURVE TYPE 2 FOR 2-D CIRCULAR ARC (in x-y plane)

4a data block (nonrelational input)

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-30

4th

41-50

5th

X-coordinate of center.

51-60

6th

Y-coordinate of center.

61-70

7th

Radius.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

4a data block (nonrelational input)

1-10

1st

X-coordinate of center.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of center.

21-30

3rd

Radius.

CURVES 278

Define Geometric Curves

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

4th data block

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter NPU homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The

homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.

6th data block

Enter (NPU plus NOU) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The

components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.

7a data block (nonrelational input)

Enter the physical coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (3 coordinates). There should

be NPU lines.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

Enter NPU point identifiers in I5 format (16 per line); use as many lines as necessary.

E. CURVE TYPE 5 FOR 2-D NURBS - INTERNALLY GENERATED

For nonrelational input, use data block series 4a and 5a. For relational input, use data block 4b

4a data block

1-5

1st

5a data block

Enter the physical coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (3 coordinates). There should

be NPU lines.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

4b data block

Enter a list of control point identifiers; minimum number is four.

279 CURVES

Define Geometric Curves

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

4th data block

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter NPU homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The

homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.

6th data block

Enter (NPU plus NOU) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as necessary. The

components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.

7a data block (nonrelational input)

Enter the physical parametric and coordinates of control points - 1 control point per line (5 coordinates).

There should be NPU lines.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

30-40

4th

Enter first parametric coordinate with respect to the surface that this curve

trims.

41-50

5th

For point identifiers and parametric coordinates with respect to the surface that this curve trims. There

should be NPU lines.

1-5

1st

6-15

2nd

Enter first parametric coordinate with respect to the surface that this

curve trims.

SURFACES 280

Define Geometrical Surfaces

SURFACES

Description

These geometrical entities are used with the ADAPTIVE, ADAPT GLOBAL, or for prescribing boundary

conditions. Finite elements entities are associated with these geometric entities using the ATTACH NODE

or ATTACH FACE options. The use of CURVES with these options has the following consequences:

1. ADAPTIVE, ATTACH NODE, ATTACH FACE, ELASTIC

If the nodes of an element face (3-D) are attached to a surface then if this element is subdivided,

the newly created node will be placed on the surface. If ATTACH NODE or ATTACH FACE are

not used, the newly created nodes are placed midway between the original nodes of this face.

2. ATTACH FACE and all boundary condition options

Distributed loads, foundations, and films may be applied to surfaces. All finite elements that have

faces attached to these surfaces will be appropriately loaded.

3. ATTACH NODE and all nodal based boundary conditions

If a nodal boundary condition such as a point load or fixed displacement is applied to the surface,

then all nodes that are attached to the surface will have the boundary condition applied.

4. The CAVITY option may use surfaces defined here to define symmetry surfaces.

You can either directly enter the coordinates/dimensions of the surfaces or define geometric point entities

and then reference these point entities, use negative surface types. In the following pages, this is called

relational input and is available for Plane, Sphere, Cylinder, 3-D NURBS (internally generated), and

Polysurface. This is the preferred input style.

Orientation

A curve has an orientation associated with it. This has three consequences:

1. If a table has an independent value of arc length and elements are attached to this curve. The arc

length is a monotonically increasing function which has a value of zero at the beginning of the

curve.

2. If an axisymmetric shell or 2-D beam is attached to the curve, and a distributed boundary

condition is applied to the curve, then

for mechanical loads:

a. a positive load on the top surface is in the direction opposite to the normal,

b. a positive load on the bottom surface is in the direction of the normal.

for thermal loads:

a. a positive load on the top surface is a flux added to the first DOF,

b. a positive load on the bottom surface is a flux added to the last DOF.

3. A radiating cavity has an orientation based upon the normal to the surface.

281 SURFACES

Define Geometrical Surfaces

The normal to a curve is based upon the right hand rule relative to the direction of the curve.

When specifying the top and bottom surfaces of a curve, the following format is used in the ATTACH

FACE, DIST LOADS, FILMS, FOUNDATION, EMISSIVITY, and CAVITY options.

Marc

Mentat

top

bottom

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

1-5

1st

Surface identifier

6-10

2nd

1: Plane

2: Sphere

3: Cylinder

4: NURBS Surface (full description)

5: NURBS Surface (internally generate)

6: 3-D Polysurface

If the surface type is a negative number, it uses relational input format.

4a data block (nonrelational input)

Enter coordinates at four points; one point per line.

1-10

1st

X-coordinate.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate.

SURFACES 282

Define Geometrical Surfaces

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

4a data block (nonrelational input)

1-10

1st

X-coordinate of center.

11-20

2nd

Y-coordinate of center.

21-30

3rd

Z-coordinate of center.

31-40

4th

Radius.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius.

4a data block (nonrelational input)

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

61-70

7th

71-80

8th

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius at

the start point.

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Enter the point identifier of a point whose first coordinate is the radius at

the endpoint.

283 SURFACES

Define Geometrical Surfaces

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

4th data block

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

Enter NPU times NPV homogeneous coordinates in E10 format (8 per line); use as many lines as

necessary. The homogeneous coordinates are between 0 and 1.

6th data block

Enter (NPU plus NOU) plus (NPV plus NOV) knot vectors in E10 format (8 per line); use as many

lines as necessary. The components of the knot vector are between 0 and 1.

7a data block (nonrelational input)

Enter the physical coordinates of NPU times NPV control points 1 control point per line

(3 coordinates). There should be NPU times NPV lines.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

Enter NPU times NPV point identifiers of the control points in I5 format

(16 per line); use as many lines as necessary.

8th data block

Enter NTRIM curve identifiers in I5 format (16 per line); use as many

lines as necessary. Note these curves should have previously defined

using the CURVES model definition option with a curve type of six.

E. SURFACE TYPE 5 FOR 3-D NURBS INTERNALLY GENERATED

4th data block

1-5

1st

Minimum is 4.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Minimum is 4.

SURFACES 284

Define Geometrical Surfaces

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter the physical coordinates of NPU times NPV control points 1 control point per line

(3 coordinates). There should be NPU times NPV lines.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

Enter NPV lists of control point identifiers. Each list must have

NPU points.

F. SURFACE TYPE 6 FOR 3-D POLYSURFACE

For 3-D polysurface, use the 4a, 5a, and 6a data blocks for nonrelational input.

For 3-D polysurface, use the 4b and 5b data blocks for relational input.

4a data block

1-5

1st

Number of Polygons.

6-10

2nd

5a data block

The 5a data block is repeated for each polygon.

1-5

1st

Polygon ID.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

6a data block

The 6a data block is repeated for each vertex point.

1-5

1st

Vertex ID.

6-15

2nd

16-25

3rd

26-35

4th

Number of polygons.

4b data block

1-5

1st

285 SURFACES

Define Geometrical Surfaces

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

5b data block

The 5b data block is repeated for each polygon.

1-5

1st

Polygon ID.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

If zero, this polygon is a triangle.

STRING 286

Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation

STRING

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the

TABLE parameter to activate this input option.

Description

This option allows the user to associates a number of curves together, in a fixed order so that a continuous

arc length may be created. This arc length could be used as an independent variable in the TABLE option.

Note that the curves themselves do not need to match coordinates at their endpoints. The STRING option

indicates that they are topologically continuous.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

1-5

1st

3rd data block

1-5

1st

1-80

1st

As an example; given three parts with six curves, the string option could be used.

287 STRING

Define Curves Forming a String for Arc Length Calculation

String

2,

1,

1,3,5,

2,

2,4,6,

For the outer surface (string number 1), the cap has a radius r = 1.0, so for points along curve 1, the

arc length goes from 0. to 1.5708, along curve 3 from 1.5708 to 2.5708, and along curve 5 from 2.5708

to 3.0707.

Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces

ATTACH NODE

Description

This option allows you to attach nodes to a point, curve, or surface. This option is used for ADAPTIVE

meshing and/or application of boundary conditions. When used in conjunction with adaptive mesh

analysis, if two points on an edge of an element are attached to a curve or surface, any new points created

by the adaptive procedure are placed on the curve. This improves the geometric modeling.

Note:

In the case of Updated Lagrange or if no surface is defined, the new nodes are placed

midway between the previous nodes.

When used with boundary conditions if a nodal load (POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc.) is applied to a

point/curve/surface, the nodes attached to this point/curve/surface will all receive this same load.

If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a

point/curve/surface, the nodes attached to this point/curve/surface will be constrained to satisfy

this condition.

To utilize this option for the application of boundary conditions, the table driven boundary condition

input must be used. See the TABLE parameter on how to activate this input option.

Note that nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of the

nodes attached to the curve have local systems, the user may need to exercise caution.

A node can be attached to as many as three surfaces; any additional surfaces are ignored.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Repeat the third and possibly the fourth data block as often as necessary. You can enter a point ID, curve

ID, or a surface ID on the 3rd data block.

3rd data block

1-5

1st

Enter the node number if a zero is entered, the 4th data block will be used.

6-10

2nd

Define the Nodes Attached to Surfaces

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Enter a list of nodes which are attached to this curve or surface.

Define the Element Edges which are attached to Curves

ATTACH EDGE

Description

This option allows you to attach an element edge to a curve. This option is used in conjunction with the

CURVES option.

To utilize this option, the table driven boundary condition input must be used. See the TABLE parameter

on how to activate this input option.

When used with boundary conditions if a nodal load (POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc.) is applied to a

curve, the nodes which define the edge that are attached to the curve will all receive this same load.

If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a curve, the

nodes which define the edges that are attached to the curve will be constrained to satisfy this condition.

When a distributed load (DIST LOADS, DIST FLUXES, etc.) is applied to a curve, the distributed load

will be applied to the element edges attached the curve.

Note:

Nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of

the nodes which define edges that are attached to the curve have local systems, the user

may need to exercise caution.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Enter 1, if face given using Marc Mentat convention.

1-5

1st

Enter a list of element: edge pairs which are attached to this curve.

1-80

1st

Define the Element Faces which are attached to Surfaces

ATTACH FACE

Description

This option allows you to attach an element face to a surface. This option is used in conjunction with the

SURFACES option.

To utilize this option, the table driven boundary condition input must be used. See the TABLE parameter

on how to activate this input option.

When used with boundary conditions if a nodal load (POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc.) is applied to a

surface, the nodes which define the faces that are attached to the surface will all receive this same load.

If a kinematic boundary condition (FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc.) is applied to a surface,

the nodes which define the faces that are attached to the surface will be constrained to satisfy

this condition.

When a distributed load (DIST LOADS, DIST FLUXES, etc.) is applied to a surface, the distributed load

will be applied to the element faces attached the surface.

Note that nodal boundary conditions are always applied in the transformed system, hence if some of

the nodes which define faces that are attached to the surface have local systems, the user may need to

exercise caution.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Enter 1, if face given using Marc Mentat convention.

1-5

1st

Enter a list of element: face pairs which are attached to this surface.

1-80

1st

GEOMETRY 292

Specify Geometrical Data

GEOMETRY

Description

The element geometry is specified in distinct sets. The information required varies from one element type

to another. As a rule, the thickness of shell elements is given in the first defined variable (EGEOM1). The

geometry for a particular element can be defined repeatedly and only the last data is used. This feature is

designed for local variations of geometric data.

The GEOMETRY option is unnecessary if the element description does not require either EGEOM1,

EGEOM2, or EGEOM3. (See Marc Volume B: Element Library).

Notes:

The NODAL THICKNESS model definition option can also be used for the input of

beam/shell thickness.

For beam elements, the eighth data variable (EGEOM8) is used to indicate the use of offsets,

pin codes, and coordinate system to define local x-axis. Activating this flag requires the

input of additional data blocks (4 and/or 5a).

For shell elements, the eighth data variable (EGEOM8) is used to indicate shell offsets.

Activating this flag requires the input of the 5b data block.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-8

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Element geometries. The 3rd through 6th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each distinct data set.

1-10

1st

EGEOM1

11-20

2nd

EGEOM2

21-30

3rd

EGEOM3

31-40

4th

EGEOM4

41-50

5th

EGEOM5

51-60

6th

EGEOM6

61-70

7th

EGEOM7

293 GEOMETRY

Specify Geometrical Data

Format

Fixed

71-80

Free

8th

Data

Entry Entry

F

EGEOM8

For beam and shells, EGEOM8 is the negative of the sum of three numbers

= -(ioffset + iorien + ipin)

ioffset

0 no offsets.

1 offsets with beams; include the 5a data block.

2 offsets with shells; include the 5b data block.

iorien

beam axis given in 4th through 6th field in global

system.

10 the local beam orientation is given with respect to the

coordinate system of the first beam node.

ipin

100 pin codes are used; include the 4th data block.

Notes:

Element Library for the meaning of EGEOM1, etc. for each element type.

4th data block

Necessary only if ipin = 100

1-5

1st

Enter the pin code associated with the first node of the beam.

6-10

2nd

Enter the pin code associated with the second node of the beam.

The degrees of freedom are defined in the elements coordinate system and

the pin flags are applied at the offset ends of the beam.

The pin code is a packed integer of up to five unique integers 1 through 6

with no embedded blanks.

5a data block

Necessary only if ioffset = 1

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

GEOMETRY 294

Specify Geometrical Data

Format

Fixed

61-65

66-70

71-75

Free

7th

8th

9th

Data

Entry Entry

I

0

vector at midside node set to 0.).

0

0

5b data block

Necessary only if ioffset = 2

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-45

5th

46-50

6th

0

specify offset magnitudes at corner nodes.

offset magnitudes at corner nodes.

Enter a list of elements to which the above geometry is applied.

295 GEOMETRY

Specify Geometrical Data

Notes:

For elements 7, 10, 11, and 19, enter 1 in the EGEOM2 field to activate the constant dilatation

option. This improves the behavior of the element for nearly incompressible analysis. See

Marc Volume B: Element Library for further details.

For elements 3, 7, and 11, enter 1 in the EGEOM3 field to activate the assumed strain

formulation. This improves the element bending behavior. This is an alternative to the

ASSUMED STRAIN parameter.

For elements 109 and 110, the penalty factor used to add the constraint for the vector

potential (Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information) to the set of equations for

magnetostatic calculations can be set in the EGEOM2 field.

In 3-D magnetostatic analyses, a penalty factor can be set which controls an extra

constraint in the vector potential formulation (Marc Volume A: Theory and User

Information). Use EGEOM7 for linear elements (109, 110, 181, and 204) and EGEOM8 for

quadratic elements (182, 205, and 206).

For element 185, enter a value greater than 0 and less than 1 in the EGEOM5 field to scale

down the transverse shear modulus for homogenous material (a common value is 5/6).

Beam offset capability is possible for elements 5, 14, 25, 36, 45, 52, 65, 76, 77, 78, 79, 98.

Enter -1 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4a data block. See Marc

Volume B: Element Library for further details.

The components of the local x-axis for beam elements are entered in the EGEOM4-EGEOM6

fields. These components can be entered in the global Cartesian coordinate system

(default) or in a local coordinate system. In the latter case, the local coordinate system used

to define the beam x-axis is flagged through the EGEOM8 field and is taken to be the

coordinate system defined at the first nodal point of the beam element using the

TRANSFORMATION, CYLINDRICAL, or COORD SYSTEM options. Enter -10 or -11 in the

EGEOM8 field to indicate that the fields EGEOM4-EGEOM6 are in the local coordinate system.

If EGEOM8 is -11, it further indicates that the beam elements are offset and that the nodal

offset vectors are provided via the 4a data block.

Shell offset capability is possible for elements 1, 22, 50, 75, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 138, 139,

140. Enter -2 in the EGEOM8 field and the offset information via the 4b data block. See Marc

Volume B: Element Library for further details.

Define Nodal Thickness

NODAL THICKNESS

Description

This option allows you to specify beam or shell thicknesses on a nodal basis. Interpolation to the element

integration points is automatically taken care of using the element displacement shape functions as

discussed for each element in Marc Volume B: Element Library.

Notes:

If you specify element thicknesses for an element using the GEOMETRY model definition

option, that data is used instead of the NODAL THICKNESS data input here. Also note that

for composite elements, if you give the actual layer thicknesses, the sum of these layer

thicknesses overrides both GEOMETRY data and NODAL THICKNESS data. If you input

percentages of total thickness in the COMPOSITE data, then GEOMETRY data (or, if no

GEOMETRY, then NODAL THICKNESS data from this option) is used.

Since the NODAL THICKNESS option allows input of only one thickness per node,

thickness discontinuities must be input using GEOMETRY.

See Marc Volume B: Element Library for elements which use nodal thicknesses.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

Number of data sets used to input nodal thickness values. The UTHICK

user subroutine can be used for modifying NODAL THICKNESS values.

6-10

2nd

input deck.

Data blocks 3 and 4 are repeated as pairs, one for each data set.

3rd data block

1-10

1st

Enter a list of nodes associated with the nodal thickness given above.

297 ACTUATOR

Define the Length of the Actuator Link

ACTUATOR

Description

This option can be used in conjunction with the truss element type 9 to simulate an actuator. This is often

used in mechanism analyses to allow the prescription of the relative distance between two points. This

option should be used with the LARGE DISP parameter whenever large rotations of the actuator or large

displacements are anticipated.

The original length of the actuator is given in the fourth field of the GEOMETRY option. The actuator is

treated as an elastic link.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Defaults to input.

Repeat for each actuator to be modified.

1-5

1st

6-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

TRANSFORMATION 298

Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation

TRANSFORMATION

Description

This option defines nodal coordinates for calculation of a direction cosine matrix, which is then used for

transforming the global degrees of freedom of a specified node to a new local coordinate system.

This block can be used to set up local coordinate systems at a number of flagged nodes, for application

of boundary conditions in a transformed system, or for printout purposes. Five points should be noted:

1. The displacements and loads or reactions are output in the transformed system at such nodes.

2. The transformation is done on all Cartesian displacements. Thus, for the shell elements, the

derivative degrees of freedom become the derivative of the transformed displacements with

respect to the original surface coordinate system.

3. Transformations are assumed to be orthogonal.

4. All kinematic conditions such as boundary conditions, initial displacements, initial velocity and

ties at that node must be input in the transformed system.

5. All concentrated nodal loads must be applied in the transformed system.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-14

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each distinct data set.

3rd data block

1-5

1st

6-15

2nd

16-25

3rd

26-35

4th

Node number. Enter 0 to read a list of nodes. See 4th data block.

Global coordinates of a first point A such that the vector from this point

to the node is direction 1 of the local coordinate system. (See Figure 3-1a.)

299 TRANSFORMATION

Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

36-45

5th

46-55

6th

56-66

7th

Global coordinates of a second point, such that this point, the first point,

and the node define the 1-2 plane of the local coordinate system.

Direction 2 of the local coordinate system will be constructed

perpendicular to direction 1 such that this second point has a positive 2

coordinate in the local 1-2 plane.

See Figure 3-1b Three-dimensional Analysis). Direction 3 of the

local coordinate system is given by a cross product of direction 1 with

direction 2.

Include only if the first field in the 3rd data block is 0.

Enter a list of nodes for which the above transformation is applied.

Note that for elements in a plane (for example,; 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 15,

16, 17, 19, etc.) only the first two coordinates of the first point (cols. 6-15

and 16-25) need be supplied.

See Figure 3-1.

TRANSFORMATION 300

Define Nodal Coordinates for Transformation

TRANSFORMATION

1,

Local 1

Local 2

N,xA,yA,xB,yB

Point B

Node N

Point A

X

(a) Two-dimensional Analysis

Plane defined by Node N,

Point A, and Point B

TRANSFORMATION

1,

N,xA,yA,zA,xB,yB,zB

Point B

Local 2

Local 1

Node N

Y

Local 3 (= Local 1 x Local 2)

Point A

X

(b) Three-dimensional Analysis

Figure 3-1

Transformation Option

Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

COORD SYSTEM

Degrees of Freedom

Description

This option allows you to specify that the coordinates of a node are with respect to a local coordinate

system. This is consistent with the CP identification number on the MD Nastran GRID Bulk Data Entry.

This option also allows you to specify the nodal coordinate system of the degrees of freedom. This is

consistent with the CD identification number on the MD Nastran GRID Bulk Data Entry. The coordinate

systems defined here are similar to the MD Nastran CORD1R, CORD1C, CORD1S, CORD2R, CORD2C,

and CORD2S options. Note that the data entered here should not be changed upon restart. Similar to the

use of the TRANSFORMATION option, the following points should be noted:

1. The displacements and loads or reactions are output in the transformed system at such nodes.

2. The transformation is done on all Cartesian displacements. Thus, for the shell elements, the

derivative degrees of freedom become the derivative of the transformed displacements with

respect to the original surface coordinate system.

3. All kinematic conditions such as fixed displacement, initial displacements, initial velocity and ties

at that node must be input in the transformed system.

4. All concentrated nodal loads must be applied in the transformed system.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-12

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

1-6

1st

CORD1C

CORD1R

CORD1S

CORD2C

CORD2R

CORD2S

Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

Format

Fixed

11-15

Free

2nd

Data

Entry Entry

I

Enter 0 if coordinate data is not transformed based on this

coordinate system.

16-20

3rd

coordinate system.

Enter 0 if degrees of freedom are not to be transformed.

21-25

4th

nodes G1A, G2A, and G3A for coordinate systems CORD1C, CORD1R,

and CORD1S.

This option should only be used with table-driven boundary conditions.

4a data block

Used if coordinate system type is CORD1C, CORD1R, or CORD1S; see Remarks.

1-5

1st

MD Nastran CIDA.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Repeat 4b, 5th, 6th, and 7th data block for each CORD2:coordinate system

4b data block

Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S; see Remarks.

1-5

1st

MD Nastran CID.

6-10

2nd

Enter the coordinate system that points given below are with respect to.

Default is the global coordinate system. This is the same as MD

Nastran RID.

Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

Format

Fixed

Data

Entry Entry

Free

Used if coordinate system type is CORD2C, CORD2R, or CORD2S.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

Enter a list of node numbers to which this system is to be applied.

Remarks

CORD1C

z

uz

G2

G3

u

P

G1

ur

R

Figure 3-2

CORDIC Definition

1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with definitions that do not involve the coordinate

system being defined. The first point is the origin, the second lies on the z-axis, and the third lies

in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not

coincident.

2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-2) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , Z) where

is measured in degrees.

3. The displacement coordinate directions at P are dependent on the location of P as shown above

by u r u u z .

4. It is recommended that points on the z-axis only have their z-displacement directions defined in

this coordinate system.

Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

CORD1R

z

uz

G2

P

G3

uy

G1

ux

y

X

Figure 3-3

CORD1R Definition

1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with definitions that do not involve the coordinate

system being defined. The first point is the origin, the second lies on the z-axis, and the third lies

in the x-z plane. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not coincident.

2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-3) in this coordinate system is given by (X, Y, Z).

3. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown above by u x u u u z .

CORD1S

z

G2

ur

P

G3

G1

x

y

Figure 3-4

CORD1S Definition

1. GiA must be defined in coordinate systems with a definition that does not involve the coordinate

system being defined. The first point is the origin, the second lies on the z-axis, and the third lies

in the plane of the azimuthal origin. The three grid points GiA must be noncolinear and not

coincident.

2. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-4) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , ) where

and are measured in degrees.

Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

3. The displacement coordinate directions at P are dependent on the location of P as shown above

by u r u u .

4. It is recommended that points on the z-axis only have their z-displacement directions defined in

this coordinate system.

CORD2C

z

uz

u

P

C

A

ur

Figure 3-5

CORD2C Definition

1. The three points [(A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), (C1, C2, C3)] must be unique and noncolinear.

Noncolinearity is checked by the geometry processor. The first point defines the origin. The

second point defines the direction of the z-axis. The third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin.

The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.

2. If RID is zero or blank, the basic coordinate system is used.

3. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-5) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , Z), where

is measured in degrees.

4. The displacement coordinate directions at P are dependent on the location of P as shown above

by u r u u z .

5. It is recommended that points on the z-axis only have their z-displacement directions defined in

this coordinate system.

Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

CORD2R

z

uz

uy

C

A

ux

y

X

Figure 3-6

CORD2R Definition

1. The three points [(A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), (C1, C2, C3)] must be unique and noncolinear.

Noncolinearity is checked by the geometry processor. The first point defines the origin. The

second defines the direction of the z-axis. The third point defines a vector which, with the z-axis,

defines the x-z plane. The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.

2. If RID is zero or blank, the basic coordinate system is used.

3. The location of a grid point (P in the Figure 3-6) in this coordinate system is given by (X, Y, Z).

4. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown by u x u y u z .

CORD2S

z

B

ur

C

A

x

y

Figure 3-7

CORD2S Definition

1. The three points [(A1, A2, A3), (B1, B2, B3), (C1, C2, C3)] must be unique and noncolinear.

Noncolinearity is checked by the geometry processor. The first point defines the origin. The

second point defines the direction of the z-axis. The third lies in the plane of the azimuthal origin.

The reference coordinate system must be independently defined.

2. If RID is zero or blank, the basic coordinate system is used.

Define Coordinate System for Nodal Coordinates and Degrees of Freedom

3. The location of a grid point (P in Figure 3-7) in this coordinate system is given by (R, , ), where

and are measured in degrees.

4. The displacement coordinate directions at P are shown above by u r u u .

5. It is recommended that points on the z-axis not have their displacement directions defined in this

coordinate system.

Define Shell Transformation

SHELL TRANSFORMATION

Description

This option allows you to transform the global degrees of freedom of (doubly curved) shells or beams to

local degrees of freedom. It facilitates the input of boundary conditions, point loads and bending

moments. A more detailed description of this capability is given in Marc Volume A: User Information.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-20

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.

3rd data block

1-5

1st

Transformation type 1 is used for beam elements 15, 16, and 17.

Transformation types 2 to 4 are used for shell elements 4, 8 and 24.

6-15

2nd

needed for transformation types 2 and 4.

16-25

3rd

needed for transformation types 2 and 4.

Enter a list of nodes to which the above displacements are applied.

309 UTRANFORM

Invoke User Subroutine UTRANS

UTRANFORM

Description

This option allows you to transfer the global degrees of freedom to local degrees of freedom. This is done

through the UTRANS user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).

Note:

This option should not be used on boundary nodes which can come into contact with rigid

surfaces in a contact analysis.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-9

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Defaults to input.

The 3rd data block is entered once for each data set.

3rd data block

Enter list of node numbers to which user transformations are applied.

Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure

CYCLIC SYMMETRY

Description

This option is used to define data for a structure possessing cyclic symmetry, which means that the

geometry and the loading vary periodically around a symmetry axis. This type of structure can be

effectively analyzed by modeling only one section and applying the proper multipoint constraint

equations to account for the cyclic symmetry. By defining the symmetry axis and the sector angle, the

Marc program sets up the constraint equations automatically. Additionally, the rigid body rotation around

the symmetry axis can be automatically suppressed.

Note:

a. valid for only the continuum elements. However, the presence of beams and shells is

allowed, but there is no connection of shells to shells, so the shell part can, for example,

be a turbine blade and the volume part can be a turbine rotor. The blade is connected

to the rotor and if there are 20 blades, 1/20 of the rotor is modeled and one complete

blade.

b. valid for nonlinear static analysis including remeshing as well as coupled analysis.

c. invalid for pure heat transfer.

d. valid for all analysis involving contact. This option can be combined with the

CONTACT option. In this case, both sides of the cyclic symmetry sectors need to

belong to the same contact body.

Note:

If used with contact and the element is not in a contact body, it is not

detected as being on a symmetry surface.

e. valid also for: eigenvalue analysis such as buckling or modal analysis, harmonic

analysis, and transient dynamic analysis. However, there are restrictions in the case of

modal analysis which are described in more detail in Marc Volume A: Theory and User

Information, Chapter 9, Cyclic Symmetry.

f. valid only if used in a non-contact analysis with a mixture of element types. If a

combination of beam, shell, linear continuum and/or quadratic continuum elements is

present and contact is not used in the model, exit 61 is issued. To overcome this

problem, two different contact bodies must be defined: one consisting of only the

linear continuum elements and one consisting of only the quadratic continuum

elements. Shell and/or beam elements do not have to be a part of any contact body (see

a. above). Only the elements belonging to the cyclically symmetric sector need to be

in a contact body. In order to prevent unwanted contact items (CPU due to unneeded

contact search, unwanted contacting nodes, etc.), turn off the normal Marc contact

calculations by defining an empty contact table. In this case, both sides of every cyclic

symmetry sector should belong to the same body, so that it is impossible to model one

side with linear continuum elements and the other side of the sector with quadratic

continuum elements.

Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure

Note (cont.): g. When using CYCLIC SYMMETRY in 3-D, tetrahedral elements must be used if the

body is to be remeshed.

h. If used with the SPLINE option, the ' continuity is not applied between across the

symmetry planes.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

element size.

Enter:

1-5

1st

This automatic suppression is applied to a single node only. So if

there are multiple unconnected groups of elements having a rigid

body rotation around the axis of symmetry, it is the users

responsibility to define a sufficient number of kinematic boundary

conditions.

0 To have no suppression.

>0 To suppress at node number given.

Enter Data for a Cyclic Symmetric Structure

Format

Fixed

6-10

Free

2nd

Data

Entry Entry

I

quadratic elements:

1 The outer boundary of the structure is described based on the

corner nodes only. Multipoint constraints due to cyclic symmetry

are not assigned to midside nodes. Instead, they are linearly tied

to the corresponding corner nodes.

-1 The outer boundary of the structure is described using a quadratic

field. Due to cyclic symmetry, full quadratic multipoint

constraints are set up; they are assigned both to corner and

midside nodes.

The default value is 1.

11-15

3rd

0 Multipoint constraint equations (default).

1 Augmented Lagrangians.

16-20

4th

Augmentation method (used only if the 3rd field of this data block is 1):

0 No augmentation (default).

1 Augmentation procedure based on a constant penetration field for

linear elements and a bi-linear field for quadratic elements.

2 Augmentation procedure based on a constant penetration field.

3 Augmentation procedure based on a bi-linear penetration field.

21-30

5th

Penalty factor (only used if the 3rd field of this data block is 1).

31-40

6th

(only used if the 3rd field of this data block is 1).

313 TYING

Define Tying Constraints

TYING

Description

This option is used to define homogeneous constraints. Constraints are defined by specifying a tied node

and one or more associated retained nodes. Further details are provided in Marc Volume A: User

Information. Special types of tying can be obtained using the UFORMSN user subroutine (see Marc

Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines).

A rigid link for either small deformation or large deformation can be implemented by using tying type

80 or using RBE2.

To obtain tying constraint based on updated current coordinates, add 1000 to tying type code. For tying

type associated with user derived tying (UFORMSN), subtract 1000 from tying type code.

Tying type 100 may be used to constrain all degrees of freedom of one node to another node. This may

be used for heat transfer shells as well.

In a coupled thermal-mechanical analysis during the heat transfer subincrements, tying type 1 is used for

all tying types except 31, 32, 33, 34, and 69.

It is possible to have a tying constraint equation to be active for only selective passes in a

multiphysics analysis.

A tying constraint always consists of a tied node (removed from the system) and one or more retained

nodes (which remain in the system). Each tying constraint is specified by a series of two data blocks (data

blocks 3 and 3a).

If a sequence of similar tying types must be specified, a list of nodes for tied nodes (3b) and

corresponding retained nodes (3c - 3d) must be given.

If the constraint equations utilize the same node numbers, either the AUTOMSET or the MPC-CHECK

parameter should be invoked.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

TYING 314

Define Tying Constraints

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Data blocks 3 and 3a or 3 and 3b, 3c, 3d, are given once for each constraint equation set.

1-5

1st

Enter the code for tying type. See Table 3-2 and Marc Volume A: User

Information for definition of default types and user-defined routines.

6-10

2nd

3b.

Enter a node number to indicate an individual node to be tied.

11-15

3rd

Number of retained nodes for this tying type. If a standard Marc tying type

is used this does not need to be entered.

16-20

4th

Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be active

using:

1 stress pass.

2 heat pass.

4 electrical pass in Joule analysis.

5 diffusion pass.

6 electrostatic pass

7 - Magnetostatic pass

8 - Electromagnetic pass

For example, 24 means tie is active only in heat and electrical pass, but is

not active in structural pass.

3a data block

If the number of a node is entered in the second field of the 3rd data block (above), use data block 3a

to list the retained nodes.

1-80

1st

3b data block

If no tied node is entered in the second field of the 3rd data block (that is, 0 is entered), use data blocks

3b, 3c, and 3d to enter a list of nodes to be tied.

Enter an unsorted list of nodes to be tied.

3c data block

Enter an unsorted list of nodes which will be the first retained nodes

associated with tied nodes given in data block 3b.

315 TYING

Define Tying Constraints

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

3d data block

Same as 3c except second retained nodes, etc.

Note:

Table 3-2

List verbs EXCEPT, INTERSECT and sorted node sets are illegal

in these lists.

Tying

Code

Number of

Retained Nodes

Purpose

I < NDEG

at the tied node to the Ith

degree of freedom at the

retained node

100

the tied node to the

corresponding degrees of

freedom at the retained node

23

to axisymmetric-shell

(element

type 1) node

15 Number of retained

nodes is 1 less than

the number of shell

nodes in the z-r plane

of the section

Remarks

must be transformed to local

system. TRANSFORMATION

option must be invoked. (See

Marc Volume A: User

Information, Table 9-17)

bend element 17 to remove

rigid body modes (see

Volume B: Element Library)

in the z-r plane of the bend element 17 to remove

section

rigid body modes (see

Volume B: Element Library)

17

bend element 17 to couple

bend section into pipe line

(see Volume B: Element

Library)

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

TYING 316

Define Tying Constraints

Table 3-2

Tying

Code

Number of

Retained Nodes

18

Purpose

Remarks

boundaries of intersecting

shell, element type 4, 8, or 24.

Fully moment carrying joint.

retained node. Neither node can

be transformed (see Marc

Volume A: User Information,

Table 9-15)

28

element type 4, 8, or 24.

Pinned joint.

retained node (see Marc Volume

A: User Information,

Table 9-15)

19

stiffener on shell elements 4

or 8. Tied node is beam node:

First retained node

is shell node, second is beam

node again. Beam node

should be on, or close to, the

normal to the shell at the shell

node.

20

Create an extra node in a shell Always use after tying type 21.

type 8 element tied to the

interpolation function of the

shell. Use in conjunction with

tying type 21 to tie a beam

element 13 or a stiffener

across a shell element.

21

beam to an interpolated shell

node not as a vertex of an

element element type 8

only. Must be followed by

type 20 to tie the interpolated

shell node into the shell

mesh.

type 20.

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

317 TYING

Define Tying Constraints

Table 3-2

Tying

Code

Number of

Retained Nodes

Purpose

Remarks

24

beams, element type 15-17.

retained node. Neither node can

be transformed. Tying is

necessary only when there is a

large angle between the two

plates.

25

beam (type 15 or 16).

retained node.

26

axisymmetric shell (type 1 or

89).

transformation needed. Tied

node is also second to retained

node.

27

shell (type 90).

retained node.

31

(linear displacement)

elements in 2-D.

side to corner nodes on coarse

side.

32

(quadratic displacement)

elements in 2-D.

side to the edge of an element

on the coarse side.

33

side to the 4 corner nodes of an

element face on the coarse side.

The retained nodes must be

entered in the same or opposite

order as they occur in the

element connectivity.

34

bricks

side to the 8 (4 corner, 4

midside) nodes of an element

on the coarse side. The retained

nodes must be entered in the

same or opposite order as they

occur in the

element connectivity.

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

TYING 318

Define Tying Constraints

Table 3-2

Tying

Code

Number of

Retained Nodes

44 2 is 2-D or

axisymmetric

lower-order element

edge

Purpose

Rigidly tie a node with

displacements and rotations

to a surface patch. This is

internally used for CWELD

and CFAST option.

Remarks

The number of retained nodes

is required. This tying type

fully supports large

deformation/rotations. No

transformations are required.

3 is 2-D or

axisymmetric

higher-order

element edge

3 if 3-D lower-order

triangular face

4 if 3-D lower-order

quadrilateral face

6 if 3-D higher-order

triangular face

8 if 3-D higher-order

quadrilateral face

52

25, or 52.

53

for beam types 14, 25, or 52.

13

under an arbitrary angle.

retained node.

Fully moment carrying joint.

>100

of type

< NDEG.

freedom multiplied by 100

added to the last degree of

freedom; that is, 209 means tie

2nd to 9th d.o.f. at tied node to

resp. 2nd and 9th degrees of

freedom at retained node.

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

319 TYING

Define Tying Constraints

Table 3-2

Tying

Code

Number of

Retained Nodes

Purpose

Remarks

69

overlaps between two parts

of a model either by

prescribing the total force on

the nodes on either side of the

gap or overlap or by

prescribing the size of the gap

or overlap.

control node of the tying. The

force on this node is equal to the

total force on the tied nodes of

all tyings that share this control

node. The displacement of the

node is equal to size of the gap

or overlap between the parts. In

non-mechanical passes, the

tying reduces to tying type 100

between the tied and the first

retained node.

80

tied node and retained node.

This works for either small or

large deformation. If a rigid

region is to be modeled, use

multiple ties of type 80, with

the tied node of each link

being a different node, and

use the same common node

as the retained node.

extra node which contains the

rigid body rotation. Therefore,

it may not be connected to any

elements in a model.

85

Tying of temperatures

between shell and solid

elements in heat transfer

analysis

(linear/quadratic/new

composite temperature

distribution in the thickness

direction of shell elements).

two retained nodes are nodes of

the solid element. Order of the

retained nodes follows the shell

node degrees of freedom. The

assumption here is that the shell

and brick have the

same thickness.

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

TYING 320

Define Tying Constraints

Table 3-2

Tying

Code

Number of

Retained Nodes

Purpose

Remarks

86

Tying of temperatures

between shell and solid

element in heat transfer

analysis (quadratic/new

composite temperature

distribution in the thickness

direction of shell element).

three retained nodes are nodes

of the solid element. Order of

the retained nodes follows shell

node degrees of freedom. Tied

node should not have linear

temperature distribution. The

assumption here is that the shell

and brick have the

same thickness.

87

Tying of temperatures

between two shell elements

in a heat transfer analysis

(linear/quadratic/new

composite temperature

distribution).

shell nodes. The tied node

should have more or equal

number of degree of freedom

than the retained node. The

assumption here is that the tied

shell and retained shell have

equal thickness.

TYPES 13, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, OR 80.

Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints

SERVO LINK

Description

This option uses homogeneous linear constraint capability (TYING) to input simple constraints of

the form:

ut = a1 ur1 + a2 ur2 + . . .

where ut is a degree of freedom to be constrained.

ur1, ur2 etc., are the other retained degrees of freedom in this structure.

a1, a2 etc., are constants provided in this option.

If the constraint equations utilize the same node numbers, either the AUTOMSET or the MPC-CHECK

parameter should be invoked.

For more information, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. Note that more complex

constraints can be entered via the TYING model definition set and the UFORMSN user subroutine.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

the TIE parameter.

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

Enter 1 if the 4th data block is being used to define in which pass of a

multiphysics analysis the servo link should be active.

Data blocks 2, 3, and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each servo link.

2nd data block

1-5

1st

Number of retained nodes (must not exceed the value given in the TIE

parameter, fourth field).

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Tied node.

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

Input Homogeneous Linear Constraints

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

26-30

6th

31-35

7th

Etc. (Continuation data in 16I5 format).

One set of this data block goes with each set from data block 2.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Etc.

Needed only if 4th entry on the 1st data block is set to 1.

1-5

1st

(default).

Enter a packed number indicating which passes the servo link should be

active using:

1 stress pass.

2 heat pass.

4 electrical pass in Joule analysis.

5 diffusion pass.

6 electrostatic pass.

7 - Magnetostatic pass

8 - Electromagnetic pass

For example, 24 means servo link is active only in heat and electrical pass,

but is not active in structural pass.

323 RBE2

Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element

RBE2

Description

The RBE2 option defines a rigid kinematic link between a single retained node with dependent degrees

of freedom specified at an arbitrary number of tied nodes. The distance between the tied nodes to the

retained node must be greater than zero.

To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP parameter. If the updated Lagrange

option is set, then the large rotation formulation is automatically used. If all degrees of freedom of the

tied nodes are tied, then RBE2 simulates rigid body motion. This is similar with tying 80. But RBE2 is

more general than tying 80. For example, when the rotations are not tied, then RBE2 simulates spherical

link or it can be used to simulate slider connection. The degrees of freedom of the tied nodes are

co-rotated with the rotation of the retained node.

If the constraint equations utilize the same node numbers, either the AUTOMSET or the MPC-CHECK

parameter should be invoked.

For more information, see Marc Volume A: User and Theory Information.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

1-5

1st

(two translations and one rotation about the global z-axis) and six degrees

of freedom in 3-D (three translations and three rotations). Note that this

may require the use of the RBE parameter.

6-10

2nd

example, the first and the third degree of freedom must be constrained,

enter 13. Put blank or zero if all translational and rotational degrees of

freedom are constrained.

11-15

3rd

RBE2 324

Define MD Nastran RBE2 Element

Format

Fixed

16-20

Free

4th

Data

Entry Entry

I

Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be

active using:

1 stress pass.

2 heat pass.

4 electrical pass in Joule analysis.

5 diffusion pass.

6 electrostatic pass.

7 - Magnetostatic pass

8 - Electromagnetic pass

For example, 24 means tie is active only in heat and electrical pass, but is

not active in structural pass.

21-25

5th

4a data block

Sequence of tied nodes in (1615) format.

325 RBE3

Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element

RBE3

Description

The RBE3 option defines the motion at a reference node as the weighted average of the motion at a set

of other nodes. The distance between the reference node to the retained nodes must be greater than zero.

This option is a powerful tool to distribute applied loads in a model. Forces and moments applied to

reference nodes are distributed to a set of independent degrees of freedom based on the RBE3 geometry

and local weighting factors.

By defaults, the reference node is considered as a tied node. It is also possible to specify the subset of the

retained nodes as tied nodes. In this case, the total number of degrees of freedom specified for every tied

node must be the same as the degrees of freedom specified for the reference node. In this way, it possible

to use the reference node as tied node for other tyings. If the choice of the tied nodes is not done properly,

a singularity may occur during the internal manipulation of the tying matrix, user should modify their

input file.

To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP parameter. If the updated Lagrange

option is set, then large rotation formulation is automatically used. The degrees of freedom of the

reference node are not co-rotated.

The constrained degrees of freedom of all retained nodes on an RBE3 option must be adequate to define

its rigid body motion, otherwise, A-matrix is singular and an error message is issued. It is recommended,

that for most applications, only the translation components be used for the degrees of freedom of the

retained nodes. An exception is the case where the retained nodes are colinear. A rotation component may

then be added to one node to stabilize its associated rigid body mode.

If the constraint equations utilize the same node numbers, either the AUTOMSET or the MPC-CHECK

parameter should be invoked.

For more information, see Marc Volume A: User and Theory Information.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

RBE3 326

Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

Reference node. This node has three degrees of freedom in 2-D (two

translations and one rotation about the global z-axis) and six degrees of

freedom in 3-D (three translations and three rotations). Note that this may

require the use of the RBE parameter.

6-10

2nd

the first and the third degree of freedom must be constrained) enter 13. Put

blank or zero if all translational and rotational degrees of freedom are

constrained.

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

subset of retained nodes entered on the 5th data block are also tied nodes

given on the 6th data block.

21-25

5th

Enter a packed number indicating which passes the tie should be

active using:

1 stress pass.

2 heat pass.

4 electrical pass in Joule analysis.

5 diffusion pass.

6 electrostatic pass

7 - Magnetostatic pass

8 - Electromagnetic pass

For example, 24 means tie is active only in heat and electrical pass, but is

not active in structural pass.

The 4th and 5th data blocks are repeated as pairs, one for each weighting factor.

1-10

1st

Weighting factor.

11-15

2nd

16-20

4th

Enter the number of tied nodes with this weighting factor. The nodes are

entered in the 5th data block.

Sequence of retained nodes in (1615) format.

327 RBE3

Define MD Nastran RBE3 Element

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Required only if 4th field of 3rd data block is nonzero. The listed tied nodes must be a subset of the

retained nodes. The total number of tied degrees of freedom must be the same as the number of degrees

of freedom specified for the reference node.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

etc.

RROD 328

Rigid 2-node Constraint

RROD

Description

This option defines a 2-noded rigid constraint that has the similar characteristics as the MD Nastran

RROD element. The constraint is applied using equation elimination like tying or servolinks. The link

must have finite length and may undergo large rotations.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

degree of freedom in the global coordinate system (MD Nastran CMA).

21-25

5th

degree of freedom in the global coordinate system (MD Nastran CMB).

Note:

Define Pin Code for Beam Element

PIN CODE

Description

The PIN CODE option is used to remove connections between the node and selected degrees-of-freedom

of the beam. The degrees of freedom are defined in the elements coordinate system and the pin codes

are applied at the offset end of the beam.

By default, a new internal node is generated for every pinned node, and constraints are setup between

these two nodes. When FEATURE, 6901 is activated, Marc condenses out the pinned degrees of freedoms

instead of creating a new node.

To activate large rotation formulation, users can use the LARGE DISP, LARGE STRAIN, or

UPDATE parameter.

Note:

The degrees of freedom listed in the 3rd data block are with respect to an element

coordinate system defined by the beam cross section axis.

For more information, see Marc Volume A: User and Theory Information.

Format

Format

Fixe

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter the unit number for input of PIN CODE; defaults to input.

first and the third degree of freedom are to remain free (unconstrained),

enter 13.

1-5

1st

List of element:node pairs. For example, 100:1 means the first node of

element ID 100. The node value must be 1 or 2. For 3-node beam

elements, only the end nodes can be flagged with pin code.

INSERT 330

Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted

INSERT

3

Model

Definiti

on

Option

s

Description

This option allows the definition of host bodies and lists of elements or nodes to be inserted in the host

bodies. The degrees of freedom of the nodes in the inserted node list or element list are automatically tied

using the corresponding degrees of freedom of the nodes in host body elements based on their

isoparametric location in the elements.

This option can be used to place reinforcing cords or rods, such as 2-D rebar membrane elements, into

solid elements.

This option can be used to apply point loads in some specific locations other than element nodes. It also

can be used to link two different meshes.

After local adaptive meshing or global meshing, the constraint equation is reformulated. In this way, one

can apply a point load in a region and it will continue to be applied in the correct location after remeshing.

If a node to be inserted is also a node of a host body element, no tying is applied to the node.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry

1-6

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

3rd data block

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

be inserted.

11-20

3rd

distance between the element and the node is smaller than the tolerance

times average edge length of the element, unless the node is actually

inside another host element. Default is 0.05.

21-25

4th

Enter a 1 if a list of contact bodies defines the host body.

331 INSERT

Define Host Bodies and List of Elements or Nodes to be Inserted

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry

Enter a list of elements or contact bodies which define the host body.

5th data block

If the second field of the 3rd data block is 1, enter a list of elements to

be inserted.

Otherwise, enter a list of nodes to be inserted.

SPRINGS 332

Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)

SPRINGS

Description

This data set is used to input any linear or nonlinear springs. For dynamic analysis, a dashpot capability

is offered as well. The spring can be used for mechanical, thermal, and electrical analysis. Note that for

input files that have the VERSION,10 or later parameter, two data blocks are needed to define each linear

or nonlinear spring.

The force in a linear mechanical spring/dashpot is given by:

F = K u 2 u 1 + C u 2 u 1

where K is the spring stiffness, C is the damping coefficient, u 2 is the displacement of the degree of

freedom at the second end of the spring (third and fourth fields), and u 1 is the displacement of the degree

of freedom at the first end of the spring (first and second fields).

During heat transfer or electrical analysis (regular heat transfer analysis, Joule heating analysis, or

the thermal part of a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis), the spring acts like a link. The dashpot is

not active.

During a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis, springs can act in only the stress part (only 5th field of the

2nd data block is nonzero), or can act in only the thermal part (only 8th field of the 2nd data block is

nonzero), or in both stress and thermal parts (both 5th and 8th fields of the 2nd data block are nonzero).

In the last case, care should be taken to ensure that the degrees of freedom specified are uniformly valid

for both the stress and thermal parts of the coupled run.

If the degrees of freedom are specified as zero for a mechanical run, the spring acts along the line joining

the two nodes. This line direction is updated during an incremental stress analysis only if large

displacement is flagged. If the thermal conduction or electrical conduction is specified for a true direction

spring, the associated degrees of freedom for the spring are assumed as one.

If the second node is specified as zero, the spring is assumed to be fixed to ground along the specified

degree of freedom. The displacement of the ground along the specified degree of freedom is assumed to

be zero. In the thermal part, the temperature of the ground is assumed to be zero. In the electrical part,

the voltage of the ground is assumed to be zero.

Note that for degree of freedom springs, the spring force is positive if the displacement of node 2 along

the specified degree of freedom is greater than the displacement of node 1 along the specified degree of

freedom. Note also that for degree of freedom springs, if user nodal transformations are used for one or

both nodes, the spring force is calculated based on the local transformed degree of freedom. For springs

connected to the ground, the displacement of node 2 along the appropriate degree of freedom is always

zero. For true direction springs, the spring force is positive if the spring is in tension and negative if the

spring is in compression and is independent of any nodal transformations.

333 SPRINGS

Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)

For a nonlinear spring/dashpot (mechanical, thermal or electrical analysis), the spring stiffness can be

specified in one of three ways:

a. Nonlinear Spring Force: This is defined using the TABLE parameter and TABLE model

definition option. The spring force computed from the multi-variate table is scaled by the

corresponding reference value provided in the 5th, 6th, 8th or 9th field of the 2nd data block.

The gradient of the table is internally calculated and used for the spring stiffness. To facilitate

the gradient calculation, the spring force needs to be specified as a function of: relative

displacement for mechanical springs (type 38), relative velocity for dashpots (type 22),

relative temperature for thermal links (type 12), relative voltage for electrical links (type 31).

In addition, the spring force can be optionally varied as a function of: time (type 1),

normalized time (type 2), increment number (type 3), or normalized increment number (type

4). In thermo-mechanical coupled analysis, the mechanical spring force and damping force

can also be specified as a function of the average temperature of the spring (type 12). In Jouleheating analysis, the electrical conduction can also be specified as a function of the average

temperature of the spring (type 12). If the value of any independent variable falls beyond its

minimum or maximum value in the table, the last force value associated with that independent

variable is used by default and can be linearly extrapolated by the user if desired. For more

general nonlinearities, option (c) (USPRNG) can be used independently or in conjunction

with option (a).

b. Nonlinear Spring Stiffness: This is defined using the TABLE parameter and TABLE model

definition option. The stiffness value computed from the multi-variate table is scaled by the

corresponding reference value provided in the 5th, 6th, 8th or 9th field of the 2nd data block.

The stiffness can be varied as a function of time (type 1), normalized time (type 2), increment

number (type 3), or normalized increment number (type 4). The spring stiffness can also be

varied as a function of relative displacement for mechanical springs (type 38), relative

velocity for dashpots (type 22), relative temperature for thermal links (type 12), relative

voltage for electrical links (type 31). In thermo-mechanical coupled analysis, the mechanical

spring stiffness and dashpot damping can also be specified as a function of the average

temperature of the spring (type 12). In Joule heating analysis, the electrical conduction can

also be specified as a function of the average temperature of the spring (type 12). If the value

of any independent variable falls beyond its minimum or maximum value in the table, the last

stiffness value associated with that independent variable is used by default and can be linearly

extrapolated by the user if desired. For more general nonlinearities, option (c) (USPRNG) can

be used independently or in conjunction with option (b).

c. The nonlinear spring stiffness can also be specified with the USPRNG user subroutine with

the general relation:

F = F u 2 u 1 u 2 u 1

See Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines for details.

SPRINGS 334

Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-7

1st

Enter one data block per spring/dashpot.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

be attached.

Enter 0 for a spring/dashpot acting in the direction from the first to the

second node (this also requires a 0 on the 4th field).

11-15

3rd

Enter 0 if the spring goes from the first end to the ground.

16-20

4th

Enter 0 if the spring goes from the first end to the ground.

Enter 0 for a spring/dashpot acting in the direction from the first to the

second node (this also requires a 0 on the 2nd field).

21-30

5th

table.

31-40

6th

relative velocity table (for dynamic analysis only).

41-50

7th

51-60

8th

temperature table.

61-70

9th

versus relative voltage table.

71-75

10th

Spring ID

76-80

11th

335 SPRINGS

Input Linear or Nonlinear Spring (Dashpot)

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Only required if input version is 10 or greater.

Enter one data block per spring/dashpot

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

relative displacement table is entered.

1 mechanical stiffness is obtained from direct values. Stiffness versus

relative table is entered.

26-30

6th

relative velocity table is entered.

1 dashpot damping is obtained from direct values. Damping coefficient

versus relative velocity is entered.

31-35

7th

relative temperature table is entered.

1 thermal conduction is obtained from direct values. Thermal

conduction versus temperature table is entered.

36-40

8th

versus relative voltage table is entered.

1 electrical conduction is obtained from direct values. Electrical

conductivity versus voltage table is entered.

PBUSH 336

Input Data for Cbush Elements

PBUSH

Description

This data set is used to input all relevant data for cbush elements (2-D - type 194 and 3-D - type 195).

The definition of the cbush coordinate system, cbush nodal offsets and coefficients for stiffness,

damping, mass, stress and strain recovery, thermal and electrical behavior can be provided through these

data blocks. The connectivity for the cbush elements are specified through the CONNECTIVITY model

definition option.

Some details for each of the data specifications are provided herein. The reader is referred to Marc

Volume A: Theory and User Information, Chapter 9 for more details.

Cbush Coordinate System

Options are provided to define the local cbush coordinate system along the element, in the global

coordinate system or in a user-defined coordinate system.

For the element coordinate system, the x axis is defined along the element length and forms a

perpendicular triad with the local y and z axes. For 3-D cbush elements, an extra node or an orientation

vector is specified to define the local y-z plane. For large displacement analysis, this local coordinate

system attached to the element is constantly updated.

Alternately, the element coordinate system can be defined along global Cartesian coordinates or in a usercoordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM model definition option. In these options, the

coordinate system remains fixed through the analysis and is not updated for large displacement analysis.

Cbush Nodal Offsets

Options are provided for locating an offset point along the cbush element axis, in the global coordinate

system, or in a user-defined coordinate system. In the first option, the offset point is located along the

line joining the two end nodes of the cbush element. The distance of the offset point along this line from

the first end node is user defined. Alternately, the offset point position can be defined in the global

Cartesian coordinate system or in a user-coordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM model

definition option.

For all options, the offset vectors from each cbush end node are internally calculated, and for large

displacement analysis, these offset vectors are updated based on the respective rotations at each end node.

Cbush Properties

Mechanical stiffness and damping properties are defined in the local cbush coordinate system. Stiffness

properties can be specified in coefficient form or through force-displacement curves. Damping properties

are specified as nominal damping either in coefficient form or force-velocity curves, and structural

damping in the form of coefficients. For 2-D cbush elements, up to three coefficients can be specified

and for 3-D cbush elements, up to six coefficients can be specified.

337 PBUSH

Input Data for Cbush Elements

F = K u 2 u 1 + C u 2 u 1

where F is the force vector in the local coordinate system of the cbush element, K is a diagonal

matrix of the cbush stiffness coefficients, C is a diagonal matrix of the cbush damping coefficients,

u 2 is the vector of displacement degrees of freedom in the local cbush coordinate system at the second

end of the cbush, and u 1 is the vector of displacement degrees of freedom in the local cbush coordinate

system at the first end of the cbush. C includes the contributions of nominal damping, structural

damping, and stiffness proportional damping. If the second node is specified as zero, the cbush element

is assumed to be fixed to ground with all the ground degrees of freedom taken as zero.

Note that for cbush elements defined in the global coordinate or user-coordinate system, the cbush force

for a particular degree of freedom is positive if the displacements of node 2 along the specified degrees

of freedom is greater than the displacement of node 1 along the specified degrees of freedom. For cbush

elements defined in the element coordinate system, the cbush force is positive if the cbush is in tension

and negative if the cbush is in compression.

Field Analysis

During heat transfer or electrical analysis (regular heat transfer analysis, Joule heating analysis, or the

thermal part of a coupled thermo-mechanical analysis), the cbush element acts like a link. The dashpot

is not active. For the ground cbush element in the thermal part, the temperature of the ground is assumed

to be zero and in the electrical part, the voltage of the ground is assumed to be zero.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of PBUSH data (default to standard input).

11-15

3rd

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter 0 if no stiffness.

Enter 1 if stiffness is entered in coefficient form.

Enter 2 if stiffness is specified via force-displacement tables.

PBUSH 338

Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format

Fixed

11-15

Free

3rd

Data

Entry Entry

I

Enter 0 for no damping.

Enter 1 if nominal damping is entered in coefficient form.

Enter 2 if nominal damping is specified via force-velocity tables.

Enter 3 if structural damping coefficients are entered.

Enter 4 if both nominal damping and structural damping are specified in

coefficient form.

Enter 5 if nominal damping is specified via force-velocity tables and

structural damping is entered in coefficient form.

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

Enter -1 if element coordinate system is used. For 3-D, either G0 or Xi can

be used to define the local y-z plane.

Enter 0 if global coordinate system is to be used.

Enter > 0 if user-defined coordinate system given via COORD SYSTEM

option is to be used.

26-35

6th

Enter X1.

36-45

7th

Enter X2.

46-55

8th

Enter X3.

Note:

The local y-z plane for each 3-D cbush element are defined through either G0 or Xi. Xi are

the components of an orientation vector measured from the first end-node GA in the

displacement coordinate system at node GA. Node ID G0 is an alternate method to supply

this orientation vector. The G0 method supersedes the Xi method. The orientation vector is

measured from end GA to G0.

To use either of them, CID (field 5) should be set to -1.

of G0 or Xi

CID 0

1-5

1st

Enter -2 if no offsets are to be provided.

Enter -1 if offset point is located on the line joining the two nodes. The

value of offset is provided by the 2nd field.

339 PBUSH

Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter 0 if offset point coordinates in fields 3 - 5 are given in the global

coordinate system.

Enter > 0 if offset point coordinates in fields 3 - 5 are given in a userdefined coordinate system defined through the COORD SYSTEM option.

6 - 15

2nd

Enter the value of S for the location of the cbush spring-dashpot along the

line joining the two end-nodes.

16-25

3rd

Enter S1

26-35

4th

Enter S2

36-45

5th

Enter S3

Notes:

measured from end GA. (1-S) is the distance from end GB.

Si in fields 3 - 5 are used with OCID 0 in field 1. They refer to the components of the

vector measured from the origin to the offset point.

OCID = -2 is set when no offsets are to be provided. It is commonly used when only the

local x stiffness is defined along the cbush element and effectively behaves like a

true-direction spring. This is also the equivalent of the CBUSH1D element in

MD Nastran.

Enter 5th and 6th data blocks if field 2 of 3rd data block (method to enter stiffness) is 1.

5th data block

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

PBUSH 340

Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter 7th and 8th data blocks if field 2 of the 3rd data block (method to enter stiffness) is 2.

7th data block

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

1-5

1st

Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the first direction.

6-10

2nd

second direction.

11-15

3rd

third direction.

16-20

4th

fourth direction.

21-25

5th

Enter table ID associated with force vs. displacement in the fifth direction.

26-30

6th

sixth direction.

Notes:

Up to six coefficients and table IDs can be provided in data blocks 5 - 8. Note that for

the tables referenced in data blocks 6 and 8, the stiffness or force can be a function of up

to four independent variables. For data block 8, a mandatory independent variable type is

displacement. Other independent variables in the tables referenced by data blocks 6 or 8

can be time, normalized time, increment number, normalized increment number, x, y, z

original and current position coordinates, frequency (for harmonic analysis), temperature.

For 3-D cbush elements, the first three directions refer to x, y and z translations while the

4 - 6 directions refer to x, y and z rotations. For 2-D cbush elements, the first two

directions refer to x and y translations while the 3rd direction refers to z rotation.

Enter 9th and 10th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 1 or 4.

9th data block

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

341 PBUSH

Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

Enter 11th and 12th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 2 or 5.

11th data block

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

1-5

1st

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the

first direction.

6-10

2nd

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the

second direction.

11-15

3rd

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the

third direction.

16-20

4th

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the

fourth direction.

21-25

5th

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the

fifth direction.

26-30

6th

Enter table ID associated with nominal damping force vs. velocity in the

sixth direction.

PBUSH 342

Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter 13th and 14th data blocks if field 3 of 3rd data block (method to enter damping) is 3, 4 or 5.

13th data block

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

Notes:

Up to six coefficients and tables can be provided in data blocks 9- 14. These coefficients

and associated table IDs are used for transient dynamic analysis. Data blocks 9, 10, 13,

and 14 can also be used for harmonic analysis with complex-valued damping. Note that

for the tables referenced in data blocks 10, 12, and 14, the damping coefficient or force

can be a function of up to four independent variables. For data block 12, a mandatory

independent variable type is velocity. Other independent variables in the tables

referenced by data blocks 10, 12, or 14 can be time, normalized time, increment number,

normalized increment number, x, y, z position coordinates, frequency (for harmonic

analysis), temperature.

For 3-D cbush elements, the first three directions refer to x, y and z translations while the

four - six directions refer to x, y and z rotations. For 2-D cbush elements, the first two

directions refer to x and y translations while the third direction refers to z rotation.

1-10

1st

(default = 0).

11-20

2nd

= 0).

21-30

3rd

(default = 0).

31-40

4th

(default = 0).

343 PBUSH

Input Data for Cbush Elements

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

Note:

Fields 5 and 6 refer to the lumped mass values at each end-node. They are used for

dynamic/harmonic analysis.

Enter 16th and 17th data blocks only for analyses where heat transfer plays a role (e.g., thermal

analysis, thermo-mechanical coupled, Joule heating, etc.)

16th data block

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter a list of elements associated with this PBUSH ID.

CFAST 344

Shell Patch Fastener Connection

CFAST

Description

The CFAST option defines a flexible connection between two surface patches. The surfaces may be either

shell elements or faces of continuum elements in 3-D applications and truss, beam, axisymmetric shell

elements or edges of continuum elements in 2-D applications. The PFAST option is used in conjunction

with the CFAST option to define the characteristics of the connection which behaves like a generalized

spring. This option internally creates a bushing element (element type 194 or 195 for 2-D or 3-D analysis,

respectively) and a set of tyings to connect the bushing nodes to the parts of the structure that are to

be connected. For more information about the geometric definition of the flexible connector, see Marc

Volume A, Chapter 9, Mesh Independent Connection Methods.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

1-5

1st

created identifier.

6-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

Enter the value of GS, the node number of the CFAST location.

If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 7, 8, and 9.

GS is ignored if GA in field 5 and GB in field 6 are both nonzero.

26-30

5th

If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A.

If not blank and GB in field 6 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.

31-35

6th

If blank, GS is used for the projection on side B.

If not blank and GA in field 5 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.

345 CFAST

Shell Patch Fastener Connection

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

36-45

7th

46-55

8th

56-65

9th

66-75

10th

Enter the name of the CFAST. This name is only used for output purposes.

If left blank, a default name is given as cf followed by the order number

of the CFAST in the input sequence left-padded with zeros to obtain a

ten-character string.

For the PROP method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:

4th data block

1-5

1st

Not used.

6-10

2nd

Not used.

1-32

1st

Enter the set name of SetA containing the items to search from for the first

patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto an element from this set, and

all the elements comprising the patch are automatically selected from the

set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set entered in the 2nd

field of this data block, but the search procedure is facilitated if it is.

33-64

2nd

Enter the set name of SetB containing the items to search from for the

second patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto an element from this

set, and all the elements comprising the patch are automatically selected

from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set entered

in the 1st field of this data block, but the search procedure is facilitated

if it is.

For the ELEM method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:

4th data block

1-5

1st

For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 3rd field of this

data block to fully identify the patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto

this element/face, and the elements comprising the patch are

automatically selected. GS or GA must have a projection onto this

element/face.

6-10

2nd

For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 4th field of this

data block to fully identify the patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto

this element/face, and the elements comprising the patch are

automatically selected. GS or GB must have a projection onto this

element/face.

CFAST 346

Shell Patch Fastener Connection

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

11-15

3rd

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 1st field

of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell

elements).

16-20

4th

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 2nd field

of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell

elements).

Enter the set name of SetA containing the items to search from for the first

patch. The node GS or GA is projected onto the master element specified

in the 1st field of the 4th data block and all further elements comprising

the patch are automatically selected from the set.

1-32

1st

This entry is required for continuum elements, but is not required for

shells.

33-64

2nd

Enter the set name of SetB containing the items to search from for the

second patch. The node GS or GB is projected onto the master element

specified in the 2nd field of the 4th data block and all further elements

comprising the patch are automatically selected from the set.

This entry is required for continuum elements, but is not required for

shells.

347 PFAST

CFAST Fastener Property

PFAST

Description

Defines the CFAST fastener property values.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

1-5

1st

6-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

Enter -1 to use element connectivity to define x-axis. Value in 4th field

is ignored.

Enter 0 to use global x-axis as the element x-axis (default).

Enter n to use the x-axis of the users defined coordinate system to define

the element x-axis.

30-35

4th

Enter 0 for relative (default). The element y- and z-axis is determined

internally. For more details, refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and User

Information.

Enter 1 for absolute. It is only valid when the value in the 3rd field is

greater than -1. The selected coordinate system is used for the element.

36-45

5th

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

PFAST 348

CFAST Fastener Property

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

349 CWELD

Weld or Fastener Element Connection

CWELD

Description

This option allows the CWELD connector information to be specified. A and B refer to the two surfaces

(shell elements or solid element faces), that are to be connected by the CWELD. Patch-to-patch

connections can be shell-to-shell, shell-to-solid, and solid-to-solid. Point-to-patch connections can be

point-to-shell or point-to-solid. For each CWELD connection, a complete set of data is entered. The first

data block contains:

EWID, METHOD, PWID, MCID, BTYPE, TTYPE, , WGHT, IPROJ, CWNAME

EWID is the connector beam element number and it may be left blank. In that case, Marc

automatically generates the element, but its end nodes GA and GB can still be entered. If GA

and/or GB are not specified, Marc automatically generates the missing nodes as well. If EWID is

not blank, the element may be defined in the CONNECTIVITY option, but this is not required. If

it is not defined in the CONNECTIVITY option, the nodes GA and/or GB are automatically

generated if they were left blank. If the element is defined in the CONNECTVITY option, its

definition must be made after the CWELD option in order to take effect. In that case, the element

is redefined in terms of its type and its nodes. METHOD defines the connection method and is

one of PARTPAT, ELPAT, ELEMID, GRIDID, or ALIGN. PWID is the identification number

of a corresponding PWELD property entry. BTYPE is the beam element type used for the

connector element. The orientation of the beam cross section is computed by using the

GEOMETRY or PWELD input data. Alternatively the orientation of the beam cross section can be

specified by MCID, the identification number of a coordinate system defined in the

COORD SYSTEM option. The value is the angle over which the beam cross section is rotated

about the beam axis to obtain its final orientation. TTYPE specifies the connection type for the

auxiliary nodes. WGHT is the exponent used in computing distance weight factors for RBE3

constraints. IPROJ is a flag to control the projection of auxiliary nodes to their respective

patches. CWNAME is an optional CWELD name (character string) used only in the output file to

reference the CWELD.

Depending on the connection method, one or more data blocks follow.

For PARTPAT, they contain: GS, SetA, SetB, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS

For ELPAT, they contain: GS, SHIDA, SHIDB, GA, GB, XY, YS, ZS, FaceA, FaceB, SetA,

SetB

For ELEMID, they contain: GS, SHIDA, SHIDB, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS, FaceA, FaceB

For GRIDID, they contain: GS, SPTYP, GA, GB, XS, YS, ZS followed by GA1...GA8,

GB1...GB8 where SPTYP defines the surface patch type on both sides of the weld and can be

QQ, TT, QT, TQ, Q, or T and GAi are the nodes of patch A and GBi are the nodes of patch B.

For ALIGN, they contain: GA, GB. No additional data is needed.

For all methods, the pairing surface patch information is required, which identifies the master patches

and, in addition, for the indirect connection methods, the regions from where to select the secondary

patches. It is possible to have point connections on either side when the master patch information for that

CWELD 350

Weld or Fastener Element Connection

side is omitted (i.e., the SetA or SetB for PARTPAT, the SHIDA or SHIDB for ELPAT and ELMID or

the GA1..GA8 or GB1..GB8 for GRIDID is left blank). It is not possible to make point connections to

automatically generated nodes. The node GS is the approximate CWELD location node or CWELD

reference node. If GS is blank, the coordinates may be entered directly through XS, YS, and ZS and a

GS-node is automatically created. If GA and GB are both entered explicitly, the GS input is ignored;

otherwise, the GS input is used for the projection onto the surfaces on each side of the CWELD to

determine the end locations of the beam. If GS is ignored, GA and GB are projected onto their respective

surfaces. If GS and GA are not specified but GB is, then GB is used as GS. If GS and GB are not specified,

but GA is, then GA is used as GS. If GS, GA, and GB are not specified, then the coordinates XS, YS, ZS

are used. If GS is specified and maximally one of the GA or GB, then GS is used for the projections on

both sides and GA or GB are ignored for this purpose. If one side of the connector makes a point

connection and the connector node for that side has been left blank and the GS-node has been specified,

the point connection is made to the GS-node and the GS-node is projected onto the opposite side to

determine the location of the other connector node. If the node on the opposite side also makes a point

connection, the node for that side must have been specified. SHIDA and SHIDB are element numbers

defining master patches. For solid elements, face information must be entered as well to fully identify the

patch. For shell elements, the face information is not required. Face identifiers for FaceA and FaceB

follow the definitions specified in the FACE IDS option described in Marc Volume C: Program Input.

Valid set types specifying the sets SetA and SetB with patches to search from when finding the

projections are element and face sets for shell elements in 3-D models, face sets for continuum elements

in 3-D models, element and edge sets for truss, beam and axisymmetric shell elements in 2-D models and

edge sets for continuum elements in 2-D models. Below faces should be understood as edges when

entering the data for a 2-D model.

For more information about the geometric definition of the flexible connector, see Marc Volume A,

Chapter 9, Mesh Independent Connection Methods.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Enter the element number (EWID) of the connector element between the

patches.

1-5

1st

351 CWELD

Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

6-15

2nd

GRIDID, ALIGN.

16-20

3rd

30-35

4th

defined in the COORD SYSTEM option to define the orientation of the

beam cross section. Leave blank or enter 0 if the automatic procedure is

to be used.

36-40

5th

Enter the value for BTYPE (the Marc beam element type to be used for the

connection). Default is 98 in a 3-D and 5 in a 2-D analysis when EWID is

blank or the element type used on the CONNECTIVITY input when EWID

is not blank.

41-45

6th

Enter the value for TTYPE (the type of constraint used to connect the

auxiliary nodes in the CWELD).

Enter 0 (default) for RBE3 constraints.

Enter 44 for Kirchhoff constraints.

Enter 80 for combined RBE2 and RBE3 constraints.

46-55

7th

Enter the value for , the angle over which to rotate the cross section

about the beam axis to obtain its final orientation.

56-65

8th

Enter the value for WGHT, the RBE3 distance weighting exponent.

Defaults to the value given on the SWLDPRM input.

66-70

9th

Enter 0 (default) if the auxiliary nodes should not be relocated.to their

projections on the finite element model.

Enter 1 to have the auxiliary nodes relocated to their projections on the

finite element model.

71-80

10th

Enter the name of the CWELD. This name is only used for output

purposes.

If left blank, a default name will be given as cw followed by the order

number of the CWELD in the input sequence left-padded with zeros to

obtain a ten-character string.

For the PARTPAT method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:

4th data block

1-5

1st

Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate CWELD

location.

If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8.

GS is ignored if GA in field 4 and GB in field 5 are both nonzero.

CWELD 352

Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A.

If not blank and GB in field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.

21-25

5th

If blank, GS is used for the projection on side B.

If not blank and GA in field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.

26-35

6th

36-45

7th

46-55

8th

Enter the setname of SetA containing the patches to search from for side

A of the connection. The GS or GA node is projected onto a patch from

this set and all further patches involved in the connection are

automatically selected from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint

with the set entered in the 2nd field of this data block, but the search

procedure is facilitated if it is.

1-32

1st

33-64

2nd

Enter the setname of SetB containing the patches to search from for side

B of the connection. The GS or GB node is projected onto a patch from this

set and all further patches involved in the connection are automatically

selected from the set. This set does not have to be disjoint with the set

entered in the 1st field of this data block, but the search procedure is

facilitated if it is.

If left blank, a point connection is assumed on this side.

For the ELPAT method, enter the 4th and 5th data blocks as follows:

4th data block

1-5

1st

Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate CWELD

location.

If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8.

GS is ignored if GA in field 4 and GB in field 5 are both nonzero.

6-10

2nd

the connection.

353 CWELD

Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 9th field of this

data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GA node will be projected

onto this patch.

If blank or 0, a point connection is assumed on this side.

11-15

3rd

the connection

For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 10 field of this

data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GB node will be projected

onto this patch.

If blank or 0, a point connection is assumed on this side.

16-20

4th

If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A.

If not blank and GB on field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.

21-25

5th

If blank, GS is used for the projection on side B.

If not blank and GA on field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.

26-35

6th

36-45

7th

46-55

8th

56-60

9th

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 2nd field

of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell

elements).

61-65

10th

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 3rd field

of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for

shell elements).

Enter the setname of SetA containing the patches to search from for side

A of the connection. The GS or GA node is projected onto the master patch

specified in the 2nd field of the 4th data block and all further patches

involved in the connection are automatically selected from the set.

1-32

1st

If the master patch is a shell element, this field can be left blank and all

shell elements in the model are considered.

If the master patch is the face of a continuum element, a face set is

required here.

CWELD 354

Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format

Fixed

33-64

Free

2nd

Data

Entry Entry

A

Enter the setname of SetB containing the patches to search from for side

B of the connection. The GS or GB node is projected onto the master patch

specified in the 3rd field of the 4th data block and all further patches

involved in the connection are automatically selected from the set.

If the master patch is a shell element, this field can be left blank and all

shell elements in the model are considered.

If the master patch is the face of a continuum element, a face set is

required here.

For the ELEMID method, enter the 4th data block as follows:

4th data block

1-5

1st

Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate CWELD

location. If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8.

GS is ignored if GA on field 4 and GB on field 5 are both nonzero.

6-10

2nd

the connection.

For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 9th field of this

data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GA node is projected onto

this patch.

If blank or 0, a point connection is assumed on this side.

11-15

3rd

the connection.

For a continuum element, a face number is required in the 10th field of

this data block to fully identify the patch. The GS or GB node is projected

onto this patch.

If blank or 0, a point connection is assumed on this side.

16-20

4th

If blank, GS is used for the projection on side A

If not blank and GB on field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.

21-25

5th

If blank, GS is used for the projection on side B.

If not blank and GA on field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.

26-35

6th

36-45

7th

46-55

8th

355 CWELD

Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

56-60

9th

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 2nd field

of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell

elements).

61-65

10th

Enter the face number to project to of the element entered in the 3rd field

of this data block (required for continuum elements; ignored for shell

elements).

For the GRIDID method, enter the 4th, 5th and 6th data blocks as follows:

4th data block

1-5

1st

Enter the value of GS, the node number of the approximate cweld

location.

If GS is blank, enter the coordinates through fields 6, 7, and 8. GS is

ignored if GA on field 4 and GB on field 5 are both nonzero.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD. If blank, GS is used

for the projection on side A.

If not blank and GB on field 5 is not blank, GA is used for the projection.

21-25

5th

Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD. If blank, GS is

used for the projection on side B.

If not blank and GA on field 4 is not blank, GB is used for the projection.

26-35

6th

36-45

7th

46-55

8th

56-65

9th

Enter the value of SPTYP defining the surface patch combination being

connected as one of QQ, TT, QT, TQ, Q, or T.

This field is optional and may be left blank.

If this data block is blank, a point connection is assumed on side A.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Repeat until all nodes of the patch on side A have been defined. A patch

can have up to 8 nodes.

CWELD 356

Weld or Fastener Element Connection

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

If this data block is blank, a point connection is assumed on side B.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Repeat until all nodes of the patch on side B have been defined. A patch

can have up to 8 nodes.

For the ALIGN method, enter the 4th data block as follows:

4th data block

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Enter the value of GA, the first node of the CWELD. May be blank if the

element is entered through the CONNECTIVITY option.

21-25

5th

Enter the value of GB, the second node of the CWELD. May be blank if

the element is entered through the CONNECTIVITY option.

357 PWELD

Connector Element Property

PWELD

Description

The properties of the cweld connector element are entered through the PWELD option. The geometrical

properties of the connector element between the two patches may also be entered here instead of entering

them through the GEOMETRY option. The PWELD option contains the following information:

PWID, D, MID, LDMIN, LDMAX, WTYPE

EGEOM1, EGEOM2, ..., EGEOM8

The first line defines the general CWELD characteristics. If the second field on the first line (D) is

nonzero, it represents the characteristic diameter (3-D analysis) or thickness (2-D analysis) of the

CWELD that will be used to compute the positions of the auxiliary nodes. It also defines the cross-section

properties if no further geometric data is supplied. PWID is the PWELD identifier referenced on the

CWELD option. LDMIN and LDMAX are the minimum and maximum length to diameter ratios of the

CWELD. WTYPE defines the connection type as either a general connection or a spotweld connection.

MID is a material identification number.

The second line defines the geometrical properties of the element in the same way they are defined in the

GEOMETRY option for the particular element type. The data required for each element type can be found

in Marc Volume B: Element Library. This second line is always required even when the characteristic

dimension (diameter or thickness) D has been defined and no further data is needed. In that case, it should

be left blank (or contain zeros only) and in 3-D models, the cross section will be circular with diameter

D or in 2-D models, the cross section will be rectangular with thickness D and unit width. If the

characteristic dimension D on the first line is zero and the first field on the second line is nonzero, a

characteristic dimension will be estimated from the geometric properties. If the first field on the second

line is zero, a nonzero value for D is required on the first line when using a method that generates auxiliary

nodes and patches for its connections because it is currently not possible to estimate a characteristic

diameter from BEAM SECT data. If the EGEOM4, EGEOM5, and EGEOM6 fields are all blank or zero, the

local directions of the connector element are determined by one of the two procedures outlined in the

Connector Orientation section of Marc Volume A: Theory and User information; otherwise, these values

are used to define the local directions. In the latter case, it is possible to use a coordinate system defined

at the first node of the element, but it is not possible to offset its nodes. If the geometrical properties are

defined in both the PWELD and GEOMETRY options for the same connector element, the properties

defined in the PWELD option are used.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

PWELD 358

Connector Element Property

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

1-5

1st

6-15

2nd

Marc will make an estimate if the cross-section data are not entered

through the BEAM SECT parameter.

In a 3-D analysis, D is the characteristic diameter.

In a 2-D analysis, D is the characteristic thickness and the section will

have a unit width.

16-20

3rd

Enter the value for MID; a material identification number to assign the

material properties.

21-30

4th

Enter the value of LDMIN; the smallest ratio of length to diameter for

stiffness calculation

Default is DLDMIN, which defaults to 0.2 if not specified on the

SWLDPRM option.

31-40

5th

Enter the value of LDMAX, the largest ratio of length to diameter for

stiffness calculation.

Default is DLDMAX, which defaults to 5.0 if not specified on the

SWLDPRM option.

41-50

6th

Enter the value for WTYPE, the type of connection as SPOT for a spotweld

connector or leave blank for a general connector.

1-10

1st

EGEOM1

11-20

2nd

EGEOM2

21-30

3rd

EGEOM3

31-40

4th

EGEOM4

41-50

5th

EGEOM5

51-60

6th

EGEOM6

61-70

7th

EGEOM7

71-80

8th

EGEOM8

359 SWLDPRM

Parameters for CWELD Connectors

SWLDPRM

Description

A number of global parameters that control the behavior of CWELD and CFAST connections and their

output to the jobid.out file can be entered through this model definition option. These parameters and

their descriptions are summarized in Table 3-3.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-10

1st

11-

2nd

3rd

4th

A

A maximum of four parameter,value pairs can be entered per line, but it may also be less. The

parameter,value pairs can appear in any order. A parameter and its value cannot occur in different lines;

they must appear on the same line. At least one pair is required per line. The second data block can be

repeated as many times as desired. If a parameter is defined more than once, the last assigned value is the

active value.

Table 3-3

Name

Type

Default

Description

CHKRUN

Integer > 0

(0 or 1)

meaning in Marc and is ignored.

GSMOVE

Integer > 0

complete projection of all points has not been found.

NREDIA

D is reduced in half in case a complete projection of all

points has not been found.

SWLDPRM 360

Parameters for CWELD Connectors

Table 3-3

Name

PRTSW

Type

0 < Integer < 4

Default

0

Description

Parameter to control the CWELD/CFAST diagnostic

output to the Marc output file (jobid.out).

0 = no diagnostic output

1 = print errors only

2 = print errors and warnings only

3 = print projection diagnostics with no tying details

4 = print all diagnostics

GSPROJ

20.0

master patch A and master patch B. The connection will

not be generated if the angle between these two normal

vectors is greater than the value of GSPROJ. If GSPROJ

is negative, the program will always accept the

connection and will only issue a warning if the angle is

larger than |GSPROJ| (see Figure 9-62 in Marc Volume A:

Theory and User Information).

GSCURV

20.0

a patch to which an auxiliary node projects and its

corresponding auxiliary and master patches. It provides

a measure to monitor the curvature of a surface and to

recognize patches that belong to, for example, stiffeners.

A connection is not generated if the angle between the

normal vectors is greater than 90-GSCURV meaning

that the patches are almost normal to each other. In that

case, the patch is rejected and the search proceeds to the

next patch in the list. If the angle is between zero and

GSCURV, no message is displayed. If the angle is between

GSCURV and 90-GSCURV, a large angle warning is

displayed. The following three tests are performed in the

order given below when GSCURV is positive:

If 0 < angle < GSCURV => OK

If GSCURVE < angle < 90-GSCURV => trigger a warning.

If angle > 90-GSCURV => reject.

Note that the warning condition is never triggered when

GSCURV > 45 as it is overruled by the reject condition.

If GSCURV is negative, the projection is always accepted

and a warning is issued when the angle is larger than

|GSCURV| (see Figure 9-62 in Marc Volume A: Theory

and User Information)

361 SWLDPRM

Parameters for CWELD Connectors

Table 3-3

Name

Type

Default

Description

GSTOL

Real

0.0

projection on a patch. IF GSTOL is positive, the distance

is relative to the characteristic CWELD/CFAST diameter

D, (the tolerance is GSTOL*D). If GSTOL is negative, the

distance is absolute (i.e., the tolerance is -GSTOL). If GS

is used for the projection together with one of the

methods PARTPAT/PROP or ELPAT/ELEM, an error is

issued if the distance is too large. If GA and GB are used

for the projection or if one of the ELEMID or GRIDID

methods is used, the test only issues a warning if the

distance is too large. If GSTOL is zero, any distance

is accepted.

PROJTOL

computed coordinates of the projection point lie outside

the patch boundary, but are located within

PROJTOL*(dimension of the patch).

ACTVTOL

Integer > 0

different CWELD/CFAST connection methods. This

parameter is entered as an integer and is converted to a

four-character string. If its value is less than 1000, the

string is prepended with zeros. The first character (from

the left) controls the behavior when the PARTPAT/PROP

method is used. The second controls the behavior when

the ELPAT/ELEM method is used. The third controls the

behavior when the ELEMID method is used and the

fourth controls the behavior when the GRIDID method is

used. For ALIGN, the PROJTOL tolerance has no

significance. Each digit d i in the string can have the

1111

for the ELPAT/ELEM or PARTPAT/PROP methods. The

values have the following meaning:

0 = PROJTOL is completely deactivated

SWLDPRM 362

Parameters for CWELD Connectors

Table 3-3

Name

Type

Default

Description

1 = PROJTOL is activated for ELEMID and GRIDID,

PROJTOL is activated in initial projections for

ELPAT/ELEM, PROJTOL is only activated over free

edges of the patch in auxiliary projections for

ELPAT/ELEM, and in initial and auxiliary

projections for PARTPAT/PROP. Free edges have

no neighbors within the set that defines the

complete surface.

ACTVTOL

(cont)

CWSETS

Integer > 0

(0 or 1)

element sets with the elements involved in the

CWELD/CFAST connections.

0 = the sets are not created

1 = four sets are created automatically:

fastener_all_beams_inc000, the set

containing all connector beam elements.

fastener_all_faces_sidea_inc0000,

the set containing all elements with patches on side

A of the connection.

fastener_all_faces_sideb_inc0000,

the set containing all elements with patches on side

B of the connection.

fastener_all_warnings_inc0000, the set

containing all elements involved in CWELD/CFAST

warning messages.

Defining sets with any of these names must be avoided

and are considered an error.

MAXEXP

Integer > 0

expansions in the search for projections of the auxiliary

nodes. First, the master patch is tried. If no projection is

found on the master patch, a first expansion is made

including all neighboring patches of the master patch. If

no projection is found on any of the new patches, a

second expansion is made including all neighbors of the

patches tried so far. This process continues until the

number of expansions exceeds MAXEXP. Two patches are

neighbors if they share at least one node in their

connectivities.

DLDMIN

0.2

characteristic diameter.

363 SWLDPRM

Parameters for CWELD Connectors

Table 3-3

Name

Type

Default

Description

DLDMAX

5.0

characteristic diameter.

MAXITR

Integer > 0

25

iteration process for finding the projection on a patch.

EPSITR

1.0E-5

the projection on a patch. If the parametric coordinate

change in an iteration is less than EPSITR, the projection

is accepted as converged.

DELMAX

0.1

during the iteration process for finding the projection on

a patch. At first DELMAX is not activated (i.e., the

parametric coordinate change is not limited during the

iteration process). The parameter is only activated when

the full Newton Raphson iteration process for a

projection did not converge. In that case, the iteration

process is restarted with DELMAX activated.

CWSPOT

beam length.

1 = scale the stiffness of the beam

2 = reposition the end nodes of the beam

3 = reposition the auxiliary patch nodes and the end

nodes of the beam.

RBE3WT

Real

0.0

The weight factor for each retained node in a RBE3

1

involved in a CWELD/CFAST connection is: f i = ---n

di

where

fi

di

since they result in heavier weighting for nodes further

away. The default results in uniform weighting

fi = 1 .

SWLDPRM 364

Parameters for CWELD Connectors

Table 3-3

Name

BOXING

Type

Default

Description

Parameter to control the boxing algorithm used to speed

up the search for master patches when connection

method PARTPAT/PROP is used.

-1 =The boxing algorithm is always deactivated

0 = The boxing algorithm may or may not be activated

depending on the number of elements in the sets.

1 = The boxing algorithm is always activated

Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface

SUPERELEM

(Model Definition)

Description

This option triggers Marc to perform the Craig-Bampton method of Component Mode Synthesis and

generate a Modal Neutral File (MNF) that can be uploaded into MD Adams models to represent flexible

components. The option allows direct definition of the boundary or interface degrees of freedom. The

option also allows automatic definition of interface degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact

with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint

analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are not known a priori. It also allows the specification

of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The

two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies are consolidated into one node with six degrees of

freedom before exporting to the MNF.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs. Data blocks 3a and 4a may be repeated if needed.

A. List of Interface Degrees of Freedom.

3a data block

1-80

1st

1st

4a data block

1-80

B. List of Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of all nodes in contact with

these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.

3b data block

1-5

1st

Enter -1.

1st

4b data block

1-80

Perform Craig-Bampton Analysis for MD Adams MNF Interface

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

C. List of Load-controlled Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of the control

nodes of these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.

3c data block

1-5

1st

Enter -2.

1st

4c data block

1-80

Create DMIG of Substructure

Definition)

Description

This option allows the creation of a DMIG file containing the stiffness associated with the degrees of

freedom specified here. This DMIG may be subsequently read into Marc or Nastran. The option allows

direct definition of the degrees of freedom. The option also allows automatic definition of interface

degrees of freedom of the nodes that get in contact with selected rigid contact bodies. This is very useful

for some nonlinear analyses such as tire footprint analysis in which the interface degrees of freedom are

not known a priori. It also allows the specification of interface degrees of freedom of the control nodes

of selected load-controlled rigid contact bodies. The two control nodes for load-controlled rigid bodies

are consolidated into one node with six degrees of freedom before exporting to the DMIG.

This option can only occur once in the analysis. However, it may be used in either the model definition

or the load increment section.

The DMIG will be written to file jidname_dmigst_inc, where:

jidname

inc

Note:

If a node is subsequently going to be transformed, all degrees of freedom of all nodes must

be specified here.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Create DMIG of Substructure

Format

Fixed

16-20

Free

4th

Data

Entry Entry

I

Enter 3 to create a DMIGB file.

DMIGB uses a different output format, which results in a smaller file

(about one third of the size of a DMIG file). When a DMIGB file is

included in a Marc analysis, the program uses a column-wise storage

instead of a full in-core matrix storage. This memory reduction can be

important for large DMIG files. The DMIGB format can be used only

as input for a Marc analysis; it can not be used in a Nastran analysis.

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

Enter 1 if terms less than xf K 1 are filtered out.

Enter 2 if terms less than xf are filtered out.

31-40

7th

41-50

8th

eight characters.

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs. Data blocks 3a and 4a may be repeated if needed.

A.

3a data block

1-80

1st

1st

4a data block

1-80

B. List of Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of all nodes in contact with

these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.

3b data block

1-5

1st

Enter -1.

1st

4b data block

1-80

Create DMIG of Substructure

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

C. List of Load-controlled Rigid Contact Bodies. All degrees of freedom of the control

nodes of these bodies will be interface degrees of freedom.

3c data block

1-5

1st

Enter -2.

1st

4c data block

1-80

Output Control of Matrices

Description

This option allows you to control the output of matrices into DMIG format. These matrices may then be

read in using the DMIG option and activated using either the B2GG, B2PP, K2GG, K2PP, M2GG, M2PP,

and P2G options within Marc or within MD Nastran. To output the substructure matrix, use the

SUPERELEM option. In the case of element matrix, they can either be written in the Marc global

(MSC.Nastran Basic) or a local coordinate system. Both symmetric and nonsymmetric matrices are

supported. Note that the scalar factor associated with the STIFSCALE option is not applied to the element

matrices. This option may be repeated in each loadcase.

The files created associated with element matrices have the names jidname_dmigXX_inc, where:

Jidname

XX

ST

stiffness matrix

DF

MS

mass matrix

DM

damping matrix

CO

conductivity matrix

SP

Inc

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

The 2nd and 3rd, 4th and 5th, 6th and 7th, 8th and 9th, 10th and 11th, 12th and 13th data blocks are

entered as pairs as required.

2nd data block

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 for global matrix.

Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

Output Control of Matrices

Format

Fixed

16-20

Free

3rd

Data

Entry Entry

I

Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.

Enter -2 to switch off writing DMIG output.

21-25

4th

Enter 2 to output in current transformed system. The global matrix is

always written in transformed system.

26-30

5th

matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.

Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).

Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.

Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.

Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

Enter 1 to output global stiffness in tied state.

36-45

7th

value will be ignored.

46-50

8th

the DMIG file. (default)

Enter 2 is all element matrices share the same name.

Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.

1-80

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 for global matrix.

Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.

21-25

4th

Enter 2 to output in current transformed system. The global matrix is

always written in transformed system.

Output Control of Matrices

Format

Fixed

26-30

Free

5th

Data

Entry Entry

I

matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.

Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).

Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.

Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.

Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

36-45

7th

value will be ignored.

Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.

1-80

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 for global matrix.

Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.

21-25

4th

Enter 2 to output in current transformed system. The global matrix is

always written in transformed system.

26-30

5th

matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.

Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).

Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.

Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.

Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

36-45

7th

value will be ignored.

Output Control of Matrices

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.

1-80

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 for global matrix.

Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.

21-25

4th

Enter 2 to output in current transformed system. The global matrix is

always written in transformed system.

26-30

5th

matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.

Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).

Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.

Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.

Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

36-45

7th

value will be ignored.

Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.

1-80

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 for global matrix.

Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.

21-25

4th

Output Control of Matrices

Format

Fixed

26-30

Free

5th

Data

Entry Entry

I

matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.

Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).

Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.

Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.

Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

Enter 1 to output global conductivity in tied state.

36-45

7th

this value will be ignored.

Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.

1-80

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 2 for global matrix.

Enter 3 for element and global matrices.

16-20

3rd

Enter 1 to write out only once in the loadcase.

21-25

4th

26-30

5th

matrix is to be written, this option and the next data block is not used.

Enter 1 if a list of elements is given (default).

Enter 2 if all elements are to be output.

Enter 3 if a list of bodies is to be given.

Enter 4 if all bodies are to be output.

31-35

6th

36-45

7th

this value will be ignored.

Only required if a list of elements or bodies to be given.

1-80

375 BSQUEAL

Specify Data for Output of Matrices used in Brake Squeal Analysis

BSQUEAL

Description

This option allows the user to define inputs necessary for brake squeal analysis or general perturbation

complex eigenvalue analysis. Marc writes out normal contact stiffness and frictional stiffness in DMIG

format for normal contact (nonglued) interfaces. This data is used by Nastran in a complex

eigenvalue analysis.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

stiffness output in DMIG format.

6-10

2nd

If set to 2, write after last increment (after nonlinear analysis).

11-15

3rd

Set to 1 for conventional brake squeal based upon rotating axis (default).

Set to 2 for calculation based on conventional sliding contact.

16-20

4th

The 3rd through 5th data blocks are repeated for each set of contact body pairs.

3rd data block

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-20

3rd

If 0, the friction coefficient is obtained from the CONTACT TABLE option

21-25

4th

Enter the table ID for the friction coefficient (only if value is given for

friction coefficient).

26-35

5th

36-40

6th

area.

Independent value is temperature only.

41-45

7th

If 0, the rotation axis is given on 4th data block

BSQUEAL 376

Specify Data for Output of Matrices used in Brake Squeal Analysis

Format

Fixed

46-50

Free

8th

Data

Entry Entry

I

If 0, the second rotation axis is given on 5th data block

51-55

9th

retained (default)

Enter 1 if vector of stiffness and friction at tied node is tangential at

the node.

56-60

10th

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

For general contact, enter x-component of sliding direction cosine.

41-50

5th

For general contact, enter y-component of sliding direction cosine.

51-60

6th

For general contact, enter z-component of sliding direction cosine.

For brake squeal, if there is only one axis, leave the 5th data block blank.

5th data block

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

Output Control of Tying Matrices (MPC Entries) for all Glued Contacts

MPCOUT (Model Output Control of Tying Matrices (MPC Entries) for all

Glued Contacts

Definition)

Description

This option allows the user to output tying matrices of all glued contacts in Nastran MPC format.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

Enter 2 to output only in the end of load case.

Enter 3 to switch off writing.

DMIG 378

Direct Matrix Input

DMIG

Description

This option is compatible with MD Nastran and allows the direct input of matrices at nodal points. It

permits matrices generated with either product to be entered into Marc.

The matrix is defined by a single header entry and one or more column entries. A column entry is required

for each column with nonzero element.

The matrix may only be used for real symmetric or nonsymmetric stiffness matrices, real mass matrices,

or for load matrices. The matrices are not activated unless a K2GG, K2PP, M2GG, M2PP, or P2G model

or history definition option is used.

It is advisable to have K2GG, M2GG, etc. placed before the DMIG in the input file.

Note:

This option must be in fixed format using the MD.Nastran conversion of ten fields per line

of width 8 or 16.

1

DMIG

NAME

"0"

IFO

TIN

TOUT

POLAR

G1

C1

10

NCOL

DMIG

NAME

GJ

CJ

G2

C2

A2

B2

DMIG

STIF

DMIG

STIF

27

2.5+10

A1

B1

3.+5

3.+3

1.0

0.

- etc. -

Example

4

2

0.

50

379 DMIG

Direct Matrix Input

Field

Contents

NAME

Name of the matrix. See Remark 1.(One to eight alphanumeric characters, the first of

which is alphabetic.) The name is case sensitive.

IFO

Form of matrix input. IFO = 6 must be specified for matrices selected by the K2GG,

M2GG and B2GG options. (Integer)

1 = Square

9 or 2 = Rectangular

6 = Symmetric

TIN

1 = Real, single precision (One field is used per element.)

2 = Real, double precision (One field is used per element.)

3 = Complex, single precision (Two fields are used per element.) (not available)

4 = Complex, double precision (Two fields are used per element.) (not available)

TOUT

POLAR

Input format of Ai, Bi. (Integer=blank or 0 indicates real, imaginary format; Integer > 0

indicates amplitude, phase format.)

NCOL

Number of columns in a rectangular matrix. Used only for IFO = 9. See Remarks 5 and 6

(Integer > 0)

GJ

CJ

Degree of freedom number for node point GJ. (1 < Integer < 6;)

Gi

Ci

Ai, Bi

Real and imaginary (or amplitude and phase) parts of a matrix element. If the matrix is

real (TIN = 1 or 2), then Bi must be blank. (Real)

Remarks

1. Matrices may also be selected for all simulations by K2GG = NAME and M2GG = NAME.

2. The header entry containing IFO, TIN, and TOUT is required. Each nonnull column is started

with a GJ, CJ pair. The entries for each row of that column follows. Only nonzero terms need be

entered. The terms may be input in arbitrary order. A GJ, CJ pair may be entered more than once,

but input of an element of the matrix more than once produces a fatal message.

3. Field 3 of the header entry must contain an integer 0.

4. For symmetric matrices (IFO = 6), a given off-diagonal element may be input either below or

above the diagonal. While upper and lower triangle terms may be mixed, a fatal message is issued

if an element is input both below and above the diagonal.

DMIG 380

Direct Matrix Input

5. The recommended format for rectangular matrices requires the use of NCOL and IFO = 9. The

number of columns in the matrix is NCOL. (The number of rows in all rectangular DMIG matrices

is always the number of nodal points.) The GJ term is used for the column index. The CJ term is

ignored.

6. If NCOL is not used for rectangular matrices, it is taken to be the maximum number of degrees of

freedom per node.

7. The matrix names must be unique among all DMIGs.

8. TIN should be set consistent with the number of decimal digits required to read the input data

adequately. For a single-precision specification on a short-word machine, the input is truncated

after about eight decimal digits, even when more digits are present in a double-field format. If

more digits are needed, a double precision specification should be used instead. However, note

that a double precision specification requires a D type exponent even for terms that do not need

an exponent. For example, unity may be input as 1.0 in single precision, but the longer form 1.0D0

is required for double precision.

Note:

Selects Direct Input Stiffness Matrix

Description

This option activates or deactivates a stiffness matrix defined by the DMIG option.

This option should be in the input file before the matrix is read in by the DMIG option.

Note:

If transformation or rigid body rotations of the stiffness matrix are to occur, all degrees of

freedom of the nodes must appear on the DMIG file.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Enter the name of the DMIG. Note that this is case sensitive.

21-25

3rd

Enter -1 to deactivate matrix.

26-35

4th

36-40

5th

41-45

6th

transformation has been applied to the node (default - this implies that the

stiffness matrix used is provided in the transformed system).

Enter 1 to apply transformations to the stiffness matrix.

46-50

7th

Enter first node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.

51-55

8th

Enter second node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.

56-60

9th

Enter third node number used to rigidly rotate the stiffness matrix.

Remarks

1. DMIG matrices are not used unless selected.

2. Terms are added to the stiffness matrix before any constraints are applied.

3. A scale factor may be applied to the stiffness matrix specified here or to all stiffness matrices via

the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CK2 entry.

4. If a transformation is to be applied to the stiffness matrix, the DMIG must contain all of the

degrees of freedom associated with the node to which the transformation is applied.

5. Large rotation DMIG is based upon the node numbers given in the 7th, 8th, and 9th fields. If only

the 7th field is used, then the rotation is based upon the rotation degrees of freedom of this node.

If all these nodes are specified, then a triad is formed, and the rotation of this triad is used.

Selects Direction Input Mass Matrix

Description

This option activates or deactivates a mass matrix defined by the DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.

Format

Format

Fixe

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Enter the name of the DMIG. Note that this is case sensitive.

21-25

3rd

Enter -1 to deactivate matrix.

26-35

4th

Remarks

1. DMIG matrices are not used unless selected.

2. Terms are added to the mass matrix before any constraints are applied.

3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain a 6.

4. M2GG input must either be in consistent mass units or the COEFFICIENT model definition option,

CM2 entry may be used.

Selects Direction Input Damping Matrix

Description

This option activates or deactivates a damping matrix for dynamic or harmonic analysis defined by the

DMIG option in a dynamic analysis.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Enter the name of the DMIG. Note that this is case sensitive.

21-25

3rd

Enter -1 to deactivate matrix.

26-35

4th

Remarks

1. DMIG matrices are not used unless selected.

2. Terms are added to the damping matrix before any constraints are applied.

3. The matrix must be symmetric and field 4 on DMIG, name entry must contain the integer 6.

4. A scale factor may be applied to the damping matrix specified here or to all damping matrices via

the COEFFICIENT model definition option, CB2 entry.

Selects Direction Input Load Vector

Description

This option activates or deactivates a load vector defined by the DMIG option. This load vector may be

scaled by referencing a table which is a function of time.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Enter the name of the DMIG. Note that this is case sensitive.

21-25

3rd

Enter -1 to deactivate the load vector.

26-30

4th

31-35

5th

Remarks

1. Terms are added to the load matrix before any constraints are applied.

2. The matrix must be rectangular in form (i.e., field 4 on DMIG entry - IFO -must contain the integer

9).

3. A scale factor may be applied to the vector specified here or to all vectors via the COEFFICIENT

model definition option entry.

Recover Substructure Output

Description

This option allows you to perform a displacement and stress calculation for the substructure. It can be

followed by output control options, such as PRINT ELEMENT, PRINT CHOICE, POST, etc.

The file containing the displacements of the external nodes is given using the -sid option when the job

is submitted.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units

MNF UNITS

Description

This option defines the units used to define the model. If this option is not included, default is SI units

(kilogram, meter, second, Newton). This option is only used for creating the MNF file.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

1: kilogram

2: pound mass

3: slug

4: gram

5: ounce mass

6: kpound mass

7: megagram

8: dozen slug

6-10

2nd

1: kilometer

2: meter

3: centimeter

4: millimeter

5: mile

6: foot

7: inch

11-15

3rd

1: hour

2: minute

3: second

4: millisecond

MD Adams Modal Neutral File Units

Format

Fixed

16-20

Free

4th

Data

Entry Entry

I

1: newton

2: pound force

3: kilogram force

4: ounce force

5: dyne

6: kNewton

7: kpound force

STIFSCALE 388

Define Stiffness Scaling Factor

STIFSCALE

Description

This option allows the contributions of an element stiffness and mass matrix to be scaled before including

them into the global stiffness matrix. The distributed loads associated with the element are also scaled.

Note that this is a scalar multiple; no transformation occurs.

Caution:

If you use this option, you must define the scale factor for all elements; the default is zero.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number from which the following data is read. Defaults

to input.

1-10

1st

Enter a list of elements for which the above scaling is applied.

389 COEFFICIENT

Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices

COEFFICIENT

Description

This option allows you to put in global coefficients that can be used to either define or scale matrices. It

allows compatibility with MD Nastran PARAM of the same names that are used here.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-10

1st

(default=0.0). If the DAMPING model definition option is included, the

value entered here is ignored.

11-20

2nd

(default=0.0). If the DAMPING model definition option is included, the

value entered here is ignored.

21-30

3rd

Enter the value of CB1, factor applied to spring damping matrix. Default

is 1.0

31-40

4th

Enter the value of CB2, factor applied to damping DMIG, default is 0.0

unless, B2GG references DMIG.

41-50

5th

Enter the value of CK1, factor applied to element stiffness matrix, and

springs. Default is 1.0

51-60

6th

Enter the value of CK2, factor applied to Stiffness DMIG; default is 0.0

unless, K2GG references DMIG.

61-70

7th

Enter the value of CK3, factor applied to stiffness matrix from user

element (USELEM user subroutine). Default =1.0

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

31-35

7th

COEFFICIENT 390

Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the value of CM1 factor applied to element mass matrix, and mass

points. Default is 1.0

11-20

2nd

Enter the value of CM2, factor applied to Mass DMIG; default is 0.0

unless M2GG references DMIG.

21-30

3rd

matrix. Default is 1.0

31-40

4th

Enter the value of CP1, factor applied to external loads, this is only

allowed if the ELASTIC parameter is included. Caution should be

exercised if the load is due to centrifugal effects, as this reflects a scaling

of the mass, not the rotational speed.

41-50

5th

Enter the value of CP2, factor applied to load DMIG; default is 0.0 unless

P2G references DMIG.

51-60

6th

Enter the value of CP3, factor applied to external load associated with

user-defined elements. Default is 1.0

61-70

7th

dynamic problems. Default is 0.0

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

31-35

7th

1-10

1st

indicating do not include term.

11-20

2nd

indicating do not include term.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

391 COEFFICIENT

Define Scaling Coefficients for Matrices

Remarks

1. If the DAMPING model definition option is used to specify different damping coefficients based

upon the element number, it is assumed to be active for all elements, and ALPHA1, ALPHA2, and

CB1 coefficients are ignored.

2. If the STIFSCALE model definition option is used to specify scale factors based upon the element

number, it is assumed to be active for all elements and the CK1, CK3, CM1, CM3, CP1, and CP3

coefficients are ignored.

Deactivate Elements

Deactivate Elements

Description

This option allows you to deactivate elements during the course of an analysis, which can be useful to

model ablation or excavation. By default, after the elements are deactivated, they demonstrate zero

stresses and strains on the post file. However, internally, they retain the stress state in effect at the time

of deactivation and this state can be postprocessed or printed at any time. At a later stage in the analysis,

the elements can again be activated with the ACTIVATE history definition option. As an alternative, you

can use the UACTIVE user subroutine. The stress state is restored on the post file when the elements are

reactivated. If this is not desirable, the stress/strain states can be permanently set to zero at deactivation

by using the additional command line option STRESS/STRAIN.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

Enter the word POST to update the post file geometry so deactivated

elements are not shown.

41-50

5th

Enter the word NOPO to not update the post file geometry; the deactivated

elements are shown.

1-80

1st

Create Error Estimation

ERROR ESTIMATE

Description

You can request that Marc give information regarding the error associated with the finite element

discretization. There are two measures; the first evaluates the stress discontinuity between elements. A

large value implies that the stresses gradients are not accurately represented in the finite element mesh.

In a classical linear elastic solution, this could be resolved by choosing quadratic elements over linear

elements or refining the mesh.

The second error measure examines geometric distortion in the model. It first examines the aspect ratios

and warpage of the elements and in subsequent increments measures how much these ratios change. This

measure can be used to indicate if the original mesh is good and whether, at a later time, rezoning

is required.

The evaluation of the stress error measure is moderately expensive. The evaluation of the geometric error

measure is very inexpensive.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

USDATA 394

Invoke USDATA User Subroutine for Initialization

USDATA

Description

This option invokes the call to the USDATA user subroutine for the initialization of user variables. These

variables (data) are stored in a common block USDACM that can be used in other user subroutines. This

option also provides for the definition of the amount of memory for the data in the common block in

REAL*4 words. If this memory is specified as nonzero, the data is automatically saved on the restart file

for use in subsequent analysis.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-6

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter the number of REAL*4 words needed for the data stored in

common block USDAM via the USDATA user subroutine.

395

Program Control

er 3: This section of the document describes various program control options. The information in this section

relevant to all types of analyses (mechanical, heat, Joule, bearing, acoustic, electrostatic,

Mode ismagnetostatic,

and electromagnetic). In particular, the CASE COMBIN option allows you to combine

separate load cases obtained from elastic analyses. The SOLVER option is used to control the solution

l

procedure of the linearized equations. The default is the direct solvers; as an alternative, the iterative

Defini solver can be chosen. The OPTIMIZE option is very important to minimize the computational cost of the

analysis, as the cost of analysis is proportional to the square of the size of the bandwidth. (Options POST,

tion

PRINT CHOICE, PRINT ELEMENT, PRINT SPRING, PRINT CONTACT, PRINT NODE, NODE SORT,

Optio SUMMARY, ELEM SORT, and UDUMP all control the amount and method that you can obtain the

resultant quantities.) The RESTART option is important for all nonlinear analysis or for postprocessing

ns

with Marc. As the solution to nonlinear problems is obtained using the incremental technique, the

RESTART option is used to stop the analysis (checkpoint) and then continue it at some later time.

The REAUTO option is used to overwrite previously defined control values upon restarting an analysis.

The POST option is used to control the database that is used by Marc Mentat and MD Patran

for postprocessing.

Combine Load Cases

CASE COMBIN

Description

This option allows you to combine different load cases for an elastic analysis. Each load case must be

stored on a RESTART file and then combined with other cases as a scalar multiple (LAMBDA) of itself.

All output element variables and nodal variables are combined.

This option can be used only in conjunction with the ELASTIC parameter. A new restart file of the

resulting combination is written as increment 0 if it is requested.

The use of the CASE COMBIN option precludes the addition of any further load cases in the same run.

Cases can only be combined from restart files.

This option can be used to perform the superposition of the results of a Fourier analysis at certain

locations around the circumference. The positions for which superposition is requested can be either

equally spaced or specified by you.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-11

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

positive number the stations are equally spaced around the circumference

starting at = 0. If preceded by a minus sign, the - values are read from

data lines.

Only used for Fourier result superposition and if the second integer on the 2nd data block is negative.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Continuation data is in Format 8E10.0.

Combine Load Cases

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

The 4th data block is repeated for each load case.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-20

3rd

Default is 1.0.

Specify Direct or Iterative Solver

Description

This option defines the solver to be used in the analysis. You can specify either the direct or iterative

solver. The choice of whether the in-core or out-of-core procedure is used is automatically determined

by Marc, based upon the amount of workspace required and the amount of memory that can be allocated.

You can also select whether a symmetric or nonsymmetric solver is used. Additionally, you can specify

if the solution of a nonpositive definite system is to be obtained.

For DDM, an out-of-core procedure is only available for solver type 8. As a convenience, it is necessary

to specify the control parameters for the decoupled pre-conditioner only in the first domain file.

When the iterative solver, type 2 or type 9, is chosen, additional parameters must be defined which are

used to control the accuracy.

Notes:It is not recommended to use the iterative solver type 2 for beam or shell models, because these

problems are ill conditioned, resulting in a large number of iterations. For a well-conditioned

system, the number of iterations should be less than the square root of the total number of degrees

of freedom in the system.

You control the maximum number of iterations allowed. If this is a positive number, Marc stops

if this is exceeded. If this is a negative number, Marc prints a warning and continues to the next

Newton-Raphson iteration or increment.

The Pardiso solver can only be used on shared memory computers.

The MUMPS solver can be used on either shared memory or distributed memory computers.

Solver types 6, 10, and 11 are not available on all hardware platforms. If the solver type is not

supported, solver type 8 is used.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

1st data block

1-10

1st

2nd data block

1-5

1st

Data

Entry Entry

A

0 for profile direct solver.

2 for sparse iterative.

4 for sparse direct solver

6 for hardware provided direct sparse solver

8 for multifrontal direct sparse solver.

Specify Direct or Iterative Solver

10 for mixed direct/iterative solver.

11 for Pardiso parallel direct solver.

12 for MUMPS parallel direct solver

6-10

2nd

types 0, 8, 11 and 12. (Not supported for DDM.)

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Solver Type

Procedure

D/I

N/A

D/I

11

12

I/I

D/I

I/I

N/A

Full K

D/I

I/I

Full K

Full K

Full K

Full K

I/I

Full K

Full K

I/I

D/I

D/I

D/I

I/I

D/I

D/I

where D/I means do a direct solve in the domains and an iterative solution

between the domains.

where I/I means do an iterative solution in the domains and an iterative

solution between the domains.

where Full K means form a complete stiffness matrix and use the parallel

direct solution.

21-25

5th

is 500)

26-30

6th

number turns off the overlap.

31-35

7th

36-40

8th

6, 8, or 10 before going out-of-core. Default is the same behavior as for

other solvers. For solver type 6, this option is only available on SGI. For

solver type 8 or 10, it is available on all platforms.

41-45

9th

46-50

10th

Enter 0 to use coarse preconditioner (default).

Enter -1 to not use coarse preconditioner.

51-55

11th

56-60

12th

61-65

13th

Specify Direct or Iterative Solver

66-70

14th

applicable to the direct solvers except types 11 and 12.

Enter -1 to deactivate AUTOSPC.

71-75

15th

76-80

16th

Enter 1 for domain pre-conditioner (default)

Enter 2 for global preconditioner (uses more memory).

The 3rd data block is only required for solver type 2 (sparse iterative) or solver type 9 (CASI). It may

also be used with the solver type 10.

3rd data block

1-5

1st

For solver type 10, set to 0.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Solver type 2:

Enter 3 for diagonal preconditioner.

Enter 4 for scaled-diagonal preconditioner.

Enter 5 for incomplete Cholesky preconditioner.

Solver type 9:

Enter 0 for CASI Primal Preconditioner.

Enter 1 for CASI Standard Preconditioner.

Solver type 10:

Enter 0; not used.

The 4th data block is only required for solver type 2 (sparse iterative) or solver type 9 (CASI). It may

also be used with solver type 10 if the 3rd data block is also entered. It may be used with DDM if the

inter-domain iterative solver is used (pre-conditioner type 0 or 3) in the 4th field of the 2nd data block.

4th data block

1-10

1st

The default for solver type 2 is 1.e-3.

The default for solver type 9 is 1.e-8.

The default for solver type 10 is 1.e-4.

When using the multifrontal direct sparse solver, one can specify the number of threads when submitting

a job by using the nthread command line option. As an example, one would use:

run_marc -j myjob -nthread ntx

Specify Direct or Iterative Solver

When using the Pardiso solver, one needs to specify the number of threads when submitting a job by

using the nthread command line option. As an example, one would use:

run_marc -j myjob -nthread ntx

When using the MUMPS parallel solver, one needs to specify the number of processors when submitting

a job by using the nsolver command line option. As an example, one would use:

run_marc -j myjob -nsolver nsx

It is also possible to use the MUMPS parallel solver in a distributed environment over several processors;

each of which has multiple CPUs/cores. One would use:

run_marc -j myjob -nsolver nsx -nthread ntx.

When using the Pardiso solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:

SOLVER

11

Additionally, one needs to specify the number of threads when submitting a job by using the nthread

command line option. As an example, one would use:

run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx -nthread ntx

where ndx is the number of domains and ntx is the number of threads. The default number of threads is

equal to the number of domains.

When using the MUMPS parallel solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:

SOLVER

12

Additionally, one needs to specify the number of processors when submitting a job by using the nsolver

command line option. As an example, one would use:

run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx -nsolver nsx

where nsx is the number of processors. If the nsolver option is not given, then nsx = ndx.

When using the CASI iterative solver with DDM, the solver option should look like the following:

SOLVER

9

Additionally, one needs to specify the number of processors when submitting a job by using the nsolver

command line option. As an example, one would use:

run_marc -j myjob -nps ndx

OPTIMIZE 402

Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers

OPTIMIZE

Description

This option allows a choice of bandwidth optimizers to be invoked and is used to reduce computer costs

in larger problems. Note that this option creates an internal node numbering different from your node

numbering, but that all data input and output is in your node numbering system.

In addition, you can output the obtained correspondence table for later use. This correspondence table

can then be read in subsequent analyses.

In a deformable contact analysis, the bandwidth is re-optimized when the contact conditions change.

Note:

Gap elements can change the internal node numbers. This can result in a non-optimal node

numbering system.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-8

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter:

2 Cuthill-McKee algorithm.

5 Read externally supplied correspondence table from unit specified in

the fifth field.

9 Sloan Algorithm (default).

10 Minimum Degree Algorithm (only available for sparse direct solver

- Solver Type 4).

11 Metis Nested Dissection Algorithm (only available for Multifrontal

Direct Sparse Solver - Solver Type 8 or 10).

Note:

Algorithm is used by default.

16-20

3rd

(Not available for optimizer 11.)

21-25

4th

Unit number of optimized mesh file. Only used if the third field is set to

1. Default is 18 if left blank.

403 OPTIMIZE

Invoke Bandwidth Optimizers

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

26-30

5th

the correspondence table is written to this unit. If the second field is 5 then

the correspondence table is read from this unit. (Not available for

optimizer 11.)

31-35

6th

Set to 1 to suppress print out (default).

Set to 2 to print table.

0

Special treatment of nodes with LM for R-P Flow and gap elements

for all analysis types (default).

Special treatment for all nodes with LM, all analysis types.

Option 2 Cuthill-McKee

2nd data block

1-5

1st

2nd data block

1st

number given in the fifth field of data block 1.

No continuation data.

Option 10 Minimum Degree Algorithms

No continuation data.

Option 11 Metis Nested Dissection Algorithms

No continuation data.

Create File for Postprocessing

Description

This option creates a postprocessor file for time-history or variable versus variable plots using Marc

Mentat or your own postprocessing. In the latter case, the file is accessed via the utility PLDUMP given

in Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special Routines.

You have two possibilities for the post file in association with restarted runs:

a. If the POST option follows the RESTART option, Marc first copies the previous post file onto

the new post file (up to the restart increment), thus providing a continuous post file from the

beginning of the analysis. The old post file is closed after it has been read. It is important that

the POST option of the restart job requests the same post variables to be written to the post

file as requested in the previous data file. Otherwise, loss of data or I/O errors can occur.

b. If the POST option precedes the RESTART option, the new post file contains only those

increments analyzed in the current run.

One or the other options should be chosen if (B) is used, a continuous post file is not created, so that

(A) cannot subsequently be used for this analysis unless you combine the files with your own program.

Note:

definition option must be used for storing eigenvectors on post file.

Element data is written to the post file for each integration point of a continuum element or for the

integration points on the layer requested; unless, either the CENTROID parameter is used or the average

value is requested via the 14th field.

Note:

small deformations. In a geometrically nonlinear analysis, if the total Lagrangian

formulation is used, the stresses and the strains are the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress and

the Green-Lagrange strains, respectively. You can always request to output Cauchy stresses

(post code 41-47 and 341) in the post file. If the updated Lagrangian formulation is used in

the large deformation analysis, the stresses and the strains are generally Cauchy stresses

and the logarithmic strains, respectively.

Create File for Postprocessing

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-4

1st

1-5

1st

For heat transfer, by default, the temperatures are written to a post file.

Enter -1 to suppresses this.

6-10

2nd

Unit number on which to open the new binary post file (jid.t16).

Defaults to unit 16 if left blank. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.

11-15

3rd

Unit number on which to open the previous binary post file (rid.t16)

for a restarted run. Defaults to unit 17 if left blank. Note that all data from

this file (up to the restart increment) is copied to the new file upon restart,

so that the post file is continuous from the start of the analysis, provided

the POST option follows the RESTART option.

16-20

4th

Set to 1 for formatted post file.

Set to 2 for both binary and formatted post file.

21-25

5th

post files.

26-30

6th

Unit number on which to open the new formatted post file (jid.t19).

Defaults to unit 19. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.

31-35

7th

Unit number on which to open the previous formatted post file for a restart

run. Defaults to unit 20. See Table B-1 in Appendix B.

36-40

8th

converted are given in the third and eleventh field of RESTART model

definition section.

41-45

9th

file every increment.

46-50

10th

Vector is defined UPOSTV in user subroutine. This field is only used for

7- and 8-style post files.

51-55

11th

Enter 8 to generate Marc 8 (not released) style post file.

Enter 9 to generate MSC.Marc 2000 style post file.

Create File for Postprocessing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter 10 to generate MSC.Marc 2001 style post file.

Enter 11 to generate MSC.Marc 2003 style post file.

Enter 12 to generate MSC.Marc 2005 style post file (default).

Enter 13 to generate MSC.Marc 2005r3 style post file.

56-60

12th

Enter 0 if no iterative data is needed.

Enter 1 to get the iterative displacements.

Enter 2 to get the iterative displacements and reaction/residual forces.

Enter 3 to get the iterative displacements, reaction/residual forces and the

touched bodies in a contact analysis.

The iterative data is written as subincremental data.

Note:

61-65

13th

The use of this option can generate a huge post file since the

post data is written for every iteration.

Enter the total number of nodal post codes (including user-defined nodal

post codes).

If a 0 is entered a default set of nodal data is written on the post file,

depending on the analysis type.

If a -1 is entered, no nodal data is written.

Note:

66-70

14th

file unless explicitly chosen. Besides the chosen quantities, if

the deformation also needs to be visualized then the

displacements also need to be chosen as nodal quantities.

Enter 1 if per element only the average element integration point data

should be written on the post file. This might considerably reduce the size

of the post file, but some significant information might be lost.

The default is 0 where the element data is written on the post file for all

available integration points.

71-75

15th

types 80-84 and 155-157 do not appear on the post file.

The default is 0, where all the available nodes are written on the post file.

76-80

16th

Enter 1 to exclude forces caused by glued contact from the contact normal

and friction forces.

The default is 0 where the contact normal and friction forces also contain

the contributions due to glued contact.

Create File for Postprocessing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Data blocks 3 and 4 are used for input of variables to be written on the post file. For 8- and lower style

post files, only element data can be selected and the nodal data is written by default. For 9- and higher

style post files, both element and nodal data can be selected. This data block is repeated for all selected

element variables, and, for 9- and higher style post files, all selected nodal variables.

3rd data block (POST Version 13)

Use for defining element post codes.

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter an element post code. The code numbers are described in Table 3-4.

16-20

3rd

elements.

For post codes 471 and 481, enter the global identification number of the

rebar layer

21-68

4th

Enter a 48-character label associated with this post code for use

in postprocessing.

1-5

1st

Enter an element post code. The code numbers are described in Table 3-4.

6-10

2nd

elements.

For post codes 471 and 481, enter the global identification number of the

rebar layer

11-35

3rd

Enter a 24-character label associated with this post code for use in

postprocessing.

Use for defining nodal post codes.

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter a nodal post code. The code numbers are described in Table 3-5.

16-63

3rd

Enter a 48-character label associated with this post code for use

in postprocessing.

Data blocks 5, 6, and 7 are used for post file version 13 or higher to select elements and nodes to be

written on the post file. They are all optional. If none of the block is present, all elements are written in

the post file.

5a data block

1-10

1st

5b data block

1-80

1st

Create File for Postprocessing

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

6a data block

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter 1 if all elements of the selected contact body are placed on post file

(default)

Enter 2 if only the elements on the exterior surface are placed on the post

file.

6b data block

1-80

Enter a list of contact bodies, for which the elements are to be written to

post file.

For the 7th data block, these nodes are in addition to nodes based upon element selection; typically, it

would be used for nodes not associated with elements.

7a data block

1-10

1st

7b data block

1-80

Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Codes

Description

1-6

Components of strain. For rigid-perfectly plastic flow problems, components of strain rate

Equivalent plastic strain (integral of equivalent plastic strain rate). For rigid-perfectly

plastic flow problems, equivalent plastic strain rate

Total temperature

10

Increment of temperature

11-16

Components of stress

17

18

19

User-defined variable via the PLOTV user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User

Subroutines and Special Routines.

20

Thickness of element

21-26

27

28

29

30

engineering strain

31-36

37

38

39

41-46

47

48

49

51-56

57

58

59

60

2

--- ijp ijp

3

2

--- ijc ijc

3

Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Codes

Description

61-66

67

68

69

71-76

78

Original volume

79

Grain size

80

Damage indicator for Cockroft-Latham, Oyane, and Principal Stress criteria, and criteria

using the UDAMAGE_INDICATOR user subroutine.

81-86

91-107

108-109

Interlaminar shear for thick composite shells (TSHEAR parameter must be present)

110

Interlaminar shear bond index for thick composite shells (only available if TSHEAR

parameter is present and Allowable Shear Bond Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the

COMPOSITE option) = max(Interlaminar shear components given by post codes 108 and

109)/SB

111-116

121-126

Elastic strain

127

128

129

175

176

177

178

179

189

Fictive temperature for Narayanaswamy Shift Function for thermal rheologically simple

viscoelastic material

<0

User-defined variable via the PLOTV user subroutine. See Marc Volume D: User

Subroutines and Special Routines.

241

Gasket Pressure

242

Gasket Closure

243

Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Codes

Description

244

245

246

251

254

257

Interlaminar shear bond index for composite solids (only available if Allowable Shear Bond

Stress, SB, has been prescribed on the COMPOSITE option) = magnitude of interlaminar

shear vector calculated by post code 254/SB

261

Beam axis (required if beam moment plots are created with Marc Mentat). Orientation axis

of CBUSH/CFAST elements 194 and 195.

264

265

266

267

268

269

270

301

311

Stress tensor

321

331

341

351

361

371

381

391

401

411

421

431

441

Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Codes

Description

451

461

471

(Second Piola-Kirchhoff). See Marc Volume B: Element Library for details.

481

Global components of the rebar stress in the deformed configuration (Cauchy). See Marc

Volume B: Element Library for details.

487

Rebar angle.

491

492

493

494

501

Interlaminar normal stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element

Library for details.

511

Interlaminar shear stress; layer n is between n and n+1. See Marc Volume B: Element Library

for details.

531

541

547

PH =

eq

548

TWIN =

eq

549

2 3 ijTWIN ijTWIN

TRIP =

eq

551

2 3 ijPH ijPH

2 3 ijTRIP ijTRIP

PL =

eq

2 3 ijPL ijPL

552

553

557

601-617

621

Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Codes

Description

627

631

637

641

651

661

671

681

691

694

697

704

705

706

707

708

709

710

714

715

716

717

718

719

720

721

731

741

Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Codes

Description

9 or 180

Total temperature

181-183

184-186

Components of flux

271

272

273

274

(Pyrolysis model B or C)

275

(Pyrolysis model B or C)

276

(Pyrolysis model B or C)

277

278

279

g w

280

mg

281

s p

282

s l

283

s c

eff

eff

(Pyrolysis model B or C)

(Pyrolysis model B or C)

Pyrolysis Volumetric Mass density of water vapor

(Pyrolysis model B or C)

190

Pressure

191-193

194-196

87

Voltage

88

89

197-199

577-579

190

Pressure

191-193

Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Codes

Description

130

561-563

564-566

140

570

Lamination loss

571-573

574-576

89

570

Lamination loss

561-563

564-566

567-569

571-573

574-576

577-579

131-133

134-136

137-139

141-143

144-146

147-149

151-153

154-156

157-159

Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-4

Codes

Description

161-163

164-166

167-169

561-563

564-566

131-133

134-136

151-153

154-156

171

Porosity

172

Void ratio

173

Pore pressure

174

Preconsolidation pressure

285

Degree of cure

286

287

288

289-294

295-300

581-586

591-596

Notes:

For heat transfer, code 9 is used for all heat transfer elements.

When using shells in heat transfer, it is important to enter a code for each layer in

chronological order if post file is to be correctly read by the INITIAL STATE or CHANGE

STATE options.

Create File for Postprocessing

Note that you do not need to select nodal values (that is, displacement, velocities and

accelerations, and temperature for a heat transfer run) as these are automatically written to

the post file.

Eigenmodes (dynamic analysis) and eigenvectors (buckling analysis) are written to

the post file only if indicated by the RECOVER or MODAL

INCREMENT/BUCKLE INCREMENT option.

Layered quantities for beams, shells, composite shells, composite solids, and

rebar quantities.

For many post codes, a layer number is required, and is conventionally one to the last layer

number in the element. Layer 1 is the top layer, layer 2 is the next layer, etc. for shells,

composite shells, bricks, or rebar elements. In many shell applications, the number of

layers in different elements is not the same. Two alternative mechanisms may be used to

specify the layer number:

I.The user can specify the following layer codes:

15000 - top layer

10000 - bottom layer

5000 - middle layer

If the number of layers in a shell is an even number, it will use (nlayer +1)/2 where

nlayer is the number of layers.

II.If the user specifies the layer ID for the composite elements, then the user must specify

the layer ID. This is useful in ply drop-off simulations.

Note that post codes 91-107 refer to failure indices for different failure criteria and post

codes 601-617 refer to associated strength ratios. More than 17 quantities are allowed in

the analysis but only the first 17 quantities are available for postprocessing. For example.

if three failure criteria (say, max. stress, Hoffman and Puck) are flagged, post codes 9197/601-607 would contain the six indices/ratios associated with maximum stress, post code

98 / 608 would contain the one index / ratio associated with Hoffman and post codes 99103 / 609-613 would contain the five indices / ratios associated with Puck criterion.

Create File for Postprocessing

Post codes 691 and 694 provide access to the first and second orientation vectors

respectively. These vectors depict the alignment of the material coordinate system at the

element level with respect to the global cartesian system. They are available for elements

that are either composites, or using materials that are orthotropic/anisotropic / requiring the

HOOKLW ANELAS user subroutines, or using the ORIENTATION option to identify the

material coordinate system. Note that these element orientation vectors are averaged across

all integration points of the element and presented as a single set of vectors at the element

centroid. They are always calculated on the current element geometry and any layer IDs

associated with post codes 691 and 694 are ignored. Note also that while the normal usage

of these post vectors is in conjunction with the ORIENTATION option, if no special material

orientation is provided, then they can also be used to obtain the element coordinate system

for orthotropic materials, composites, etc. For composites, post code 697 provides access

to the fiber angle in any layer. If used without any associated layer id, post code 697

provides access to all layer angles. Else, the user can obtain the angle for a specific layer L

by using 697,L as the post code. Note that if there are no composite elements, post code

697 is ignored. The orientation vectors on the post file are available for visualization in

Marc Mentat. Either element orientations or layer orientations can be plotted. Note that for

layer orientation vectors to be available for a set of layers, the associated layer orientation

angle should be available on the post file through post code 697.

For post codes 411, 421, 431, and 441, global quantities for shell elements are reported for

as many layers as requested and the same layer numbering system is used as for regular

shell quantities. Layer 1 is the top surface; layer 2 is the next surface, etc. This convention

is followed from MSC.Marc 2000 on.

Caution has to be exercised in interpreting the results when strain and/or stress tensors are

requested for beam and shell elements:

1. For most elements in this category (elastic beam elements 31, 52, 98 are exceptions),

stress tensors (post codes 311, 351, 361) or their associated component values (post

codes 11-16, 51-56, 61-66) and total strain tensor (post code 301) or its associated

component values (post codes 1-6) can be requested with or without an associated layer

number. When no layer number is requested, the generalized strains (stretches, shear

strains) are reported for the strain post values and generalized stresses (axial force,

shear forces) are reported for the stress post values. Generalized curvature strains and

generalized moments can be requested through post codes 641 and 651 for shells and

numerically integrated beams. Note that for shell elements, the generalized stresses are

forces per unit length. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a definition of the

generalized strain and stress output for each element type. When a layer number is

used, the actual strain and stress components at the requested layer are reported. Layer

number are ignored for post codes 641 and 651.

Create File for Postprocessing

2. For conventional (non-numerically integrated) elastic beams (types 31, 52, 98), there

are no layers - so only the generalized strains and stresses are reported for these

elements. Refer to Marc Volume B: Element Library for a definition of the generalized

strain and stress output for each element type. Equivalent quantities are not computed

for these element types since they do not make physical sense. The thermal strain tensor

(post code 371) or its associated components (post codes 71-76) are available.

3. For other stress tensors (post codes 341, 391, 411) and strain tensors (post codes 321,

331, 371, 381, 401, 421, 431, 441, 461), there are no generalized values and they can

only be requested for a particular layer. If no layer number is provided by the user, by

default, the tensors are reported for layer number 1. Numerically integrated solidsection beam elements (type 52 or 98) have layer numbers and from a postprocessing

perspective behave as open or closed section beams or shells.

Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-5

Code

1 Displacement

2 Rotation

3 External Force

4 External Moment

5 Reaction Force

6 Reaction Moment

7 Fluid Velocity

8 Fluid Pressure

9 External Fluid Force

10 Reaction Fluid Force

11 Sound Pressure

12 External Sound Source

13 Reaction Sound Source

14 Temperature

15 External Heat Flux

16 Reaction Heat Flux

17 Electric Potential

18 External Electric Charge

19 Reaction Electric Charge

20 Magnetic Potential

21 External Electric Current

22 Reaction Electric Current

23 Pore Pressure

24 External Mass Flux

25 Reaction Mass Flux

26 Bearing Pressure

27 Bearing Force

28 Velocity

29 Rotational Velocity

30 Acceleration

31 Rotational Acceleration

32 Modal Mass

Description

Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-5

Code

33 Rotational Modal Mass

34 Contact Normal Stress

35 Contact Normal Force

36 Contact Friction Stress

37 Contact Friction Force

38 Contact Status

39 Contact Touched Body

40 Herrmann Variable

41 solid (Pyrolysis Model B only)

42 M g (Pyrolysis Model B or C)

43 s p (Pyrolysis Model B only)

44 s l (Pyrolysis Model B only)

46 Tying Force

47 Coulomb Force

48 Tying Moment

49 Generalized Nodal Stress

50 Generalized Nodal Strain

51 Inertia Relief Load

52 Inertia Relief Moment

53 J-Integral

54 Stress Intensity, Mode I

55 Stress Intensity, Mode II

56 Stress Intensity, Mode III

57 Energy Release

58 Energy Release Rate I

59 Energy Release Rate II

60 Energy Release Rate III

61 Crack Growth Direction

62 Crack System Local X

63 Crack System Local Y

64 Crack System Local Z

Description

Create File for Postprocessing

Table 3-5

Code

Description

66 Breaking Index (Normal)

67 Breaking Index (Tangential)

68 Breaking Index

69 Delamination Index (Normal)

70 Delamination Index Tangential)

71 Delamination Index

72 Recession

73 Glue Deactivation Status

74 VCCT Failure Index

75 Remesh displacement (relative displacement between two models on the post file)

76 Lorentz Force

77 Wear Index

78 Wear Rate

<0 User-defined nodal quantity via the UPSTNO user subroutine.

Note: The contact status (code 38) can have the following values:

0 if a node is neither in contact nor has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.

0.5 if a node is in near contact.

1 if a node is in true contact.

2 if a node has tying constraints due to cyclic symmetry.

The Touched Body (code 39) and the Near Contact Distance (code 65) are not available for

segment-to-segment contact.

Define Loadcase

Define Loadcase

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the

TABLE parameter to activate this input option.

Description

This option is used to specify the boundary conditions and initial conditions that are active in this

loadcase. This is used to activate or deactivate FIXED DISP, FIXED TEMPERATURE, etc., DIST LOADS,

DIST FLUXES, etc., POINT LOAD, POINT FLUX, etc., FOUNDATION, FILMS, INITIAL DISP, INITIAL

VEL, INITIAL TEMP, etc. Boundary conditions not explicitly activated are deactivated.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-32

2nd

1-5

1st

3rd data block (Repeat as many times as specified on 2nd data block.)

1-32

1st

33-40

2nd

This is applicable to FIXED DISP, DIST LOADS, POINT TEMP, and

CHANGE STATE only.

If a time dependent table (independent variable types 1,2,3,4) is applied to

this boundary condition, this flag is ignored and the table is used to control

the temporal variations.

Enter 0 if load is applied instantaneously,

or if boundary condition has been previously activated, it

remains constant (default).

Enter 1 if point load, distributed load or kinematic load is to be

linearly changed from current magnitude to prescribed

magnitude,

or point temp is to be linearly changed from initial temp to

prescribed magnitude,

or change state is to be linearly changed from initial state

to prescribed state.

Define Loadcase

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter 2 if point load, distributed load or kinematic load is to be

linearly changed from zero to prescribed magnitude,

or point temp is to be linearly changed from initial temp to

prescribed magnitude,

or change state is to be linearly changed from initial state

to prescribed state.

If the boundary condition is not included in a subsequent

loadcase: point load, distributed load or kinematic load is

linearly reduced in magnitude to zero,

point temperature is linearly changed to the

initial temperature,

change state is linearly changed to the initial state.

Enter 3 if point load, distributed load or kinematic load is to be

linearly changed from zero to prescribed magnitude,

or point temp is to be linearly changed from initial temp to

prescribed magnitude,

or change state is to be linearly changed from initial state

to prescribed state.

If the boundary condition is not included in a subsequent

loadcase:

point load, distributed load is linearly reduced in

magnitude to zero,

kinematic displacements are to be instantaneously

removed, and the previous reaction force is linearly

reduced to zero,

point temperature is linearly changed to the

initial temperature,

change state is linearly changed to the initial state.

Enter -1 or -2 load is removed gradually.

point load, distributed load or kinematic load is linearly

reduced in magnitude to zero,

point temperature is linearly changed to the

initial temperature,

change state is linearly changed to the initial state.

Enter -3 load is removed gradually,

Define Loadcase

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

point load, distributed load is linearly reduced in

magnitude to zero,

kinematic displacements are to be instantaneously

removed, and the previous reaction force is linearly

reduced to zero,

point temperature is linearly ramped to the

initial temperatures,

change state is linearly ramped to the initial state.

Enter -4 Load is removed instantaneously,

point load, distributed load is instantaneously reduced to

zero,

kinematic displacements are to be instantaneously

removed, and the previous reaction force is linearly

reduced to zero,

point temperature is instantaneously changed to the initial

temperature,

change state is instantaneously changed to the

initial state.

When POINT TEMP is used, the initial temperatures are

prescribed in the INITIAL TEMP option.

When CHANGE STATE is used, the initial temperatures

are prescribed in the CHANGE STATE option.

TRACK 426

Enter a List of Points to be Tracked

TRACK

Description

The analysis program creates a file containing information regarding the motion of a material particle

which is at the coordinate position of the node in the undeformed state. This file is then used by the

graphical user interface to visualize the motion of the point. It is also possible to track the material

behavior (equivalent stress and equivalent plastic strain). This can be used for time history plots. This

information is written to a file, jid.trk.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 to track equivalent stress and equivalent plastic strain.

Enter -1 if quantities specified in the 3rd data block are to be tracked.

16-20

4th

Enter the body number which contains these nodes. This is optional, but

it does speed up the calculation.

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter the element post code of the quantity to be tracked (see Table 3-4 in

the POST option description).

16-40

3rd

in postprocessing.

Enter a list of nodes to be tracked.

Define a Flow Line Grid

FLOW LINE

Description

This option allows you to define a grid (possibly independent of the original mesh) which is tracked

during the analysis. This information is written to the post file. This facilitates viewing the motion of the

material particles.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-9

1st

1-5

1st

Enter 3 if flow line file is used. See Appendix G Flow Line File Format: for

the format of the .flw file.

Enter 4 if circular grid is used for 2-D analysis only. The initial diameter

will be 80% of the grid size specified in the 3rd data block.

6-10

2nd

Default is body 1.

Enter -1 to put flow lines on all bodies.

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Default =

=

Required if a Cartesian or circular grid is used, Option 2 or 4.

1-5

1st

Enter 1 if grid is to pass through a point specified in the 8th, 9th, or

10th field.

6-10

2nd

Define a Flow Line Grid

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-30

5th

31-40

6th

41-50

7th

51-60

8th

61-70

9th

71-80

10th

Required if flow line file is used, Option 3.

1-80

1st

429 IRM

Intergraph Interface

IRM

Intergraph Interface

Description

This option allows you to generate an IRM file which is compatible with Intergraph. Two types of

quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses, strains, etc.)

can either be component values or invariant values or both. They are each an average value within the

element. The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points and a weighted average

is calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam and/or shell elements. If the

IRM option is used simultaneously with either or both of the SDRC and HYPERMESH options, internally the

program treats the data in a cumulative manner. For example, if stresses are requested for the Intergraph file

and creep strains are requested for the SDRC Universal file, both quantities are output into both files. The

Intergraph results file is named jid.g.

Note:

When the Intergraph results file is requested together with the Hypermesh results file, the

invariant element quantities are automatically written into the Intergraph results file.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1st data

block

1-4

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

2nd data block

1-10

1st

3rd data block

1-5

1st

Enter:

1

for stresses.

IRM 430

Intergraph Interface

Format

Fixed

6-10

Free

2nd

Data

Entry Entry

If the value in the first field is a 2, enter 0.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 for invariants.

Enter 2 for component and invariant values.

Note:

Hypermesh results file, the invariant element quantities are

automatically written into the Intergraph results file.

4th data block

1-8

1st

5th data block

1-5

1st

Enter:

1 for displacements.

2 for velocities.

4 for reaction forces.

5 for temperatures.

6 for generalized stresses.

7 for generalized strains.

8 for top/middle/bottom layer stresses.

9 for top/middle/bottom elastic strains.

10 for top/middle/bottom plastic strains.

11 for top/middle/bottom creep strains.

13 for eigenmodes.

14 for harmonic displacements and reactions.

Note:

10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component.

431 IRM

Intergraph Interface

Element Data

CAT = ELEM

TYPE - A.B.C.D where A = S for stress

E for total strain

C for creep strain

T for thermal strain

P for plastic strain

B = C for component

I for invariant

C = 1 for 1st component

2 for 2nd component

3 for 3rd component

4 for 4th component

5 for 5th component

6 for 6th component

or

C = 1 for lowest principal

2 for intermediate principal

3 for highest principal

4 for Von Mises Intensity

5 for mean normal (hydrostatic)

6 for Tresca

D=

layer number

TYPE A.D where

ETI for incremental strain energy density

EET for total elastic strain energy density

EEI for incremental elastic strain energy density

EPT for total plastic strain energy density

EPI for incremental plastic strain energy density

D = layer number

IRM 432

Intergraph Interface

TYPE A.D where

SYT for stress/yield stress at current temperature

D = layer number

TYPE A.B.D where

A = FL

B = 1 to 6

D = layer number

Nodal Data

CAT = NODE

TYPE = A.B.C.

A= D

for displacement

for velocity

for acceleration

for reactions

for eigenmode

TEMP

for temperatures

GSC

GSI

GNC

GNI

TSC

TSI

MSC

MSI

BSC

BSI

433 IRM

Intergraph Interface

TEC

TEI

MEC

MEI

BEC

BEI

TPC

TPI

MPC

MPI

BPC

BPI

TCC

TCI

MCC

MCI

BCC

BCI

B= X

THX

THY

THZ

Skipped if A is not D, V, A or R

C = 1 for 1st component

2 for 2nd component

3 for 3rd component

4 for 4th component

5 for 5th component

6 for 6th component

IRM 434

Intergraph Interface

Skipped if A is D, V, A, or R

I=

2 for intermediate principle value

3 for maximum principle value

4 for von Mises intensity

5 for dilatational value

6 for Tresca intensity

435 SDRC

SDRC I-DEAS Interface

SDRC

Description

This option allows you to generate a Universal file which is compatible with the SDRC I-DEAS program.

Two types of quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses,

strains, etc.) written into the Universal file are only the component values. Once the Universal file is read

into I-DEAS, the invariants are computed internally. They are each an average value within the element.

The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points and a weighted average is

calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam and/or shell elements. If the

SDRC option is used simultaneously with either or both of the IRM and HYPERMESH options, internally the

program treats the data in a cumulative manner. For example, if stresses are requested for the SDRC Universal

file and creep strains are requested for the Hypermesh results file, both quantities are output into both files.

The SDRC Universal file is named jid.unv.

In addition, if the SDRC Universal file is required, the element results can be output as element or

nodal variables. To output the element variables, use ELEMENT. To output the nodal variables, use

ELEMENT NODE.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-4

1st

11-15

2nd

16-20

3rd

Enter either the 2a data block or 2b data block.

2a data block

1-10

1st

2a data block

1-10

1st

SDRC 436

SDRC I-DEAS Interface

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

Enter:

1 for stresses.

2 for total strains.

3 for creep strains.

4 for thermal strains.

5 for plastic strains.

6 for strain energy.

7 for von Mises equivalent stress divided by the yield stress.

8 for failure indices.

6-10

2nd

If no nodal data is required, skip to the next model definition point.

4th data block

1-8

1st

5th data block

1-5

1st

Enter:

1 for displacements.

2 for velocities.

3 for acceleration.

4 for reaction forces.

5 for temperatures.

6 for generalized stresses.

7 for generalized strains.

8 for top/middle/bottom layer stresses.

9 for top/middle/bottom elastic strains.

10 for top/middle/bottom plastic strains.

437 SDRC

SDRC I-DEAS Interface

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

11 for top/middle/bottom creep strains.

13 for eigenmodes.

14 for harmonic displacements and reactions.

Note:

8, 9, 10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component.

HYPERMESH 438

HyperMesh Interface

HYPERMESH

HyperMesh Interface

Description

This option allows you to generate a results file which is compatible with HyperMesh. Two types of

quantities can be on this file: element and nodal quantities. The element quantities (stresses, strains, etc.)

written into the results file are both the component values and the invariant values. They are each an

average value within the element. The nodal quantities are values extrapolated from the integration points

and a weighted average is calculated. Extreme care should be used interpreting the results with beam

and/or shell elements. For writing of eigenmodes into the HYPERMESH results file, the Marc data file

should contain either the MODAL INCREMENT or the BUCKLE INCREMENT model definition option, as

appropriate, together with the DYNAMIC or BUCKLE parameter. Do not use related history definition

options MODAL SHAPE, BUCKLE, or RECOVER. If the HYPERMESH option is used simultaneously with

either or both of the IRM and SDRC options, internally the program treats the data in a cumulative manner.

For example, if stresses are requested for the SDRC Universal file and creep strains are requested for the

Hypermesh results file, both quantities are output into both files. The HyperMesh results file is named

jid.hmr.

Note:

When the Intergraph results file is requested together with the HyperMesh results file, the

invariant element quantities are automatically written into the Intergraph results file.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-4

1st

11-15

2nd

Leave blank.

16-20

3rd

2nd data block

1-10

1st

3rd data block

1-5

1st

Enter:

1 for stresses.

2 for total generalized strains.

3 for creep strains.

439 HYPERMESH

HyperMesh Interface

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

4 for thermal strains.

5 for plastic strains.

6 for strain energy.

7 for von Mises equivalent stress divided by the yield stress.

8 for failure indices.

6-10

2nd

If no nodal data is required, skip to the next model definition point.

4th data block

1-8

1st

5th data block

1-5

1st

Enter:

1 for displacements.

2 for velocities.

3 for acceleration.

4 for reaction forces.

5 for temperatures.

6 for generalized stresses.

7 for generalized strains.

8 for top/middle/bottom layer stresses.

9 for top/middle/bottom elastic strains.

10 for top/middle/bottom plastic strains.

11 for top/middle/bottom creep strains.

13 for eigenmodesa.

Note:

10, or 11 results in only the top or actual component

For writing of eigenmodes into the HYPERMESH results file, the Marc data file should contain either the

MODAL INCREMENT or the BUCKLE INCREMENT model definition option, as appropriate, together with

the DYNAMIC or BUCKLE parameter. Do not use related history definition options MODAL SHAPE,

BUCKLE, or RECOVER.

Specify Output

Specify Output

Description

This option allows you the control of the output from Marc. The data given here remains in control until

a subsequent PRINT CHOICE set is inserted such a set can be included with either the model definition

or with history definition data set. See also PRINT ELEMENT and PRINT NODE.

The default values print all elements and all nodes. Element quantities are printed at each integration

point or at the centroid only, depending on whether the CENTROID parameter is used. For shells,

only the extreme fibers are output, plus layers where the inelastic strains or state variables are nonzero.

For beams, fibers with inelastic strains or nonzero state variables are printed. In addition, section forces

are given for these elements. This option also allows debug output of certain items. The default is no

debug printout.

All of the above defaults are reset by the PRINT CHOICE option.

The PRINT CHOICE option has no effect on the post processor file.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-12

1st

1-5

1st

10).

6-10

2nd

(maximum 10).

11-15

3rd

CENTROID is flagged).

16-20

4th

Number of layers to be printed. This is for beams and shells only and

overrides the default described above.

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

otherwise real and imaginary components are given.

31-35

7th

Debug print flag. Enter a nonzero value and use data block 7.

36-40

8th

Log file flag. Enter unit number to which log file is to be written.

Specify Output

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Include only if the first field of 2nd data block is not zero.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Etc.

5th

Etc. in I5 format.

Include only if the second field of 2nd data block is not zero.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Etc.

5th

Etc. in I5 format.

Include only if the third field of 2nd data block is not zero.

I

of entries given in third field of data block 2). This is only used if

CENTROID is not flagged. Be careful with analyses with several different

element types.

Include only if the fourth field of 2nd data block is not zero.

I

Enter the list of shell or beam fibers to be printed in (16I5) format. This

overrides Marc default, so you should be careful to not unintentionally

suppress plasticity or creep printout.

Include only if the seventh field of 2nd data block is not zero

1-5

1st

16I5

Specify Elements to be Included in Output

Description

This option allows you to choose which elements, and what quantities associated with an element are to

be printed. If you do not specify NODE on the first data line, these values are at the integration points.

This option can be used to print response quantities for the first 28 integration points of any element. This

suffices for all elements, except continuum composite elements (types 149 - 154, 175 - 180) which can

have as many as 2040 integration points. For print-outs at integration point numbers greater than 28 for

continuum composite elements, use PRINT CHOICE. If you specify the word NODE, these values are the

extrapolated nodal values. This extrapolation is currently not available for rebar elements, composite

continuum elements, semi-infinite elements, or cavity elements.

Note:

This option revokes any NO PRINT that precedes it. Therefore, NO PRINT followed by

PRINT ELEMENT and not followed by PRINT NODE results in the selected element

printout and full nodal printout. Use PRINT NODE with a blank node list to suppress

node output.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

unit 6.

Data blocks 3, 4, and, if necessary, 5 and 6 are given once for each data set.

3rd data block

1-80

1st

STRAIN

STRESS

PLASTIC

CREEP

Specify Elements to be Included in Output

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

CREEP

THERMAL

ENERGY

total strain energy

incremental total strain energy

total elastic strain energy

incremental elastic strain energy

plastic strain energy

incremental plastic strain energy

CRACK

CAUCHY

STATE

PREFER

ELECTRIC

CURRENT

output current.

ALL

Enter a list of elements to be printed.

Note:

To suppress all element print-out, enter a blank list for the list

of elements.

If the NODE option is not specified on the 1st data block, enter a list of

integration points to be printed.

If the NODE option is specified on the 1 data block, enter a list of node

positions based upon the CONNECTIVITY option. These node positions

range from one to the maximum number of nodes per element.

Specify Elements to be Included in Output

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter a list of layers to be printed. This is only necessary if there are either

thin walled beam, shell, rebar, solid composite elements in the mesh, (that

is, element types 1, 4, 5, 8, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 22, 23, 24, 25, 45,46, 47,

48, 49, 50, 72, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 98, 138, 139, 140,

142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 165, 166,

167, 168, 169, 170, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 180).

It is also necessary to include this data block if there are beam element

types 52 or 98 and they are used with integrated solid cross sections.

Specify Nodes to be Included in Output

Description

This option allows you to choose which nodes and what nodal quantities are to be printed.

Note:

This option revokes any NO PRINT that precedes it. Therefore, NO PRINT followed by

PRINT NODE and not followed by PRINT ELEMENT results in the selected nodal output

and full element output. Use PRINT ELEMENT with a blank element list to suppress

element printout.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Data blocks 3 and 4 are entered as pairs, one for each data set.

3rd data block

1-80

1st

INCR

TOTA

VELO

output velocity

ACCE

output acceleration

LOAD

REAC

TEMP

output temperature

FLUX

output flux

Note:

MODE

0, 2 is used.

Specify Nodes to be Included in Output

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

VOLT

PRES

COOR

INER

ALL

Enter a list of nodes to be printed.

Note:

To suppress all nodal printout, enter a blank list for the list of nodes. The average nodal

generalized stresses are obtained via an extrapolation and averaging procedure. If there is

a geometric or material discontinuity at a node, this value is not correct unless either double

nodes are used with kinematic tying, or you control which elements are to be averaged

using the PRINT ELEMENT feature.

Suppress Elements and Nodes in Output

Description

This option suppresses element and nodal output.

Note:

This option is revoked by using either the PRINT CHOICE, PRINT ELEMENT, or PRINT

NODE options. Therefore, NO PRINT followed by a PRINT ELEMENT, for example, results

in element and full nodal printout. Use PRINT NODE or PRINT ELEMENT with blank node

or element lists to suppress all node or element output.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Controls the Print Out of Springs

Description

This option controls the output for selected springs.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter a list of springs to be printed

Deactivates the Printing of All Springs

Description

This options suppresses the output of spring results.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Prints the Contact Body Summary

Description

This option ensures that the summary of contact information for each body is printed to the output file

even if the NO PRINT option is activated.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout

NO PRINT CONTACT (Model Definition) Suppresses the Contact Body Summary Printout

Description

This option deactivates the output of the summary of contact information.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level

Description

This option allows the user to output the contributions to the nodal force at either an element level or a

nodal level. This is useful when constructing a free body diagram of part of the structure. The Marc for

grid force balance is with respect to the global coordinate system. In Marc, the following contributions

are considered:

On an element level, the grid force balance is based upon the

Internal forces

Distributed Loads

Foundation Forces

Reaction Force

On a nodal basis, it is much more complete and includes

Internal Forces

Foundation Forces

Spring Forces

Tying/MPC Forces

Inertia Forces

Damping Forces

DMIG Forces

Reaction Force

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

every increment).

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Enter 1 if grid force output is to be written to file jid.grd.

21-25

5th

Enter the number of times that grid force should be output in a load case;

if 1 is entered, the output will occur at the last increment of the load case.

Nodal Force Output at Element or Node Level

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

3rd and 4th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)

3rd data block

1-10

1st

1-80

Enter a list of elements for which grid force output will be done

5th and 6th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)

5th data block

1-10

1st

1-80

Enter a list of contact bodies; grid force on an element level will be given

for elements in these bodies.

7th and 8th data block are optional (may be repeated multiple number of times)

7th data block

1-10

1st

1-80

Enter a list of nodes for which forces will be output on a nodal basis.

Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies

PRINT VMASS (Model Definition) Print Element Volumes, Masses, Costs, and Strain Energies

Description

This option allows you to obtain printed output of element volumes, masses, costs and strain energies.

Options are provided for you to print the total quantities for each group of elements and the quantities for

each element in the group or the total quantities for each group of elements only.

In order to have correct mass computations, mass density for each element must be entered through one

of the material options. In order to have the correct cost, the cost per unit mass or the cost per unit volume

must be defined through the ISOTROPIC/ORTHOTROPIC option. The total strain energy and the plastic

strain energy, if applicable, are printed. Note that volumes and masses for some special elements (for

example, gap element, semi-infinite element, etc.) is not be computed. These quantities can be written on

either standard output file unit 6, or your specified unit.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-11

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 for option to print only total volumes, masses, costs, and strain

energy for groups of elements. Default is 0.

11-15

3rd

3a data block

Enter a list of elements to be printed.

3b data block

Enter the negative of deformable body number (only one body number per

data block).

455 REAUTO

Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis

REAUTO

Description

Used for changing conditions on restart of a problem in an autoloading sequence, dynamics, creep, or

heat transfer.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

This entry allows a reset of various parameters during restart. It can be

used to override previously set values in the middle of automatic load

incrementation. These values are originally set in the AUTO CREEP,

AUTO INCREMENT, AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, DYNAMIC CHANGE, or

TRANSIENT. Only the nonzero values set here are used. For AUTO LOAD,

only the 3rd, 4th, and 5th fields are used; set other fields to 0.

1-10

1st

Time step size. The value should only be set in dynamic problems.

11-20

2nd

21-25

3rd

Total number of time steps in this set of boundary conditions or, for AUTO

LOAD, number of equal load increments. To immediately complete

previous set of load history data, set to 1.

26-30

4th

31-35

5th

Reassembly interval for mass and stiffness matrices; for linear problems,

set equal to the value given in the third field.

36-40

6th

41-50

7th

51-60

8th

INCREMENT).

61-65

9th

parameters based upon the ADAPT GLOBAL option, before the END

OPTION, are used.

Enter 2 to force remeshing immediately after restart and user will provide

mesh file in jid_b*.mesh file in the format of a .t18 file.

Enter 3 to force remeshing immediately after restart and user will provide

mesh file in jid_b*.mesh file in the format of a .feb file.

REAUTO 456

Interrupt/Modify Load Sequence from Previous Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter 4 to force remeshing immediately after restart and user will provide

the mesh file in jid_b*.mesh in the format of a standard Marc data file.

66-70

Notes:

10th

restart.

When using REAUTO to read mesh files, you need to prepare mesh files for all defined

remeshing bodies.

Use ADAPT GLOBAL to read mesh files immediately after the restart. With this option, you

can select the remeshing body.

457 RESTART

Set Flags for Restart

RESTART

Description

This option sets up the flags for the restart files; both for the input of a previous restart file and for output

of a restart file from the current analysis. When the ELASTIC parameter is included, always restart at

increment 0.

The following points should be noted concerning the RESTART option.

A restart write frequency must be specified when a restart file is to be output. The analysis can

then be restarted from any increment at which restart has been written.

The restart file contains only those increments written during the current part of the analysis. The

restart file is not continuous because of the large volume of data that can be involved. If it were

written on the same file, the input/output time would be increased and also you might overflow

the file storage in large problems.

At restart, the data governing the increments (or increment set) next to be analyzed must follow

the END OPTION as incremental input data. Any file input, such as a file of temperature

increments describing a thermal history, must be skipped forward by you to the appropriate

point; that is, to the beginning of the increment of the new part of the analysis.

During any option set for a series of increments (AUTO CREEP, DYNAMIC CHANGE, AUTO

INCREMENT, AUTO LOAD, AUTO STEP, AUTO THERM CREEP, TRANSIENT), restart can be

effected and control parameters changed. Marc then continues to the end of the part of the

analysis specified by the option. You have the option to terminate such a part of the analysis

prematurely through the use of restart with the REAUTO option.

The RESTART INCREMENT history definition option can be used to modify parameters defined

The RESTART LAST option can be used to save only the last converged increment or to

The old restart file is closed after it has been read.

The input data describing the problem is not saved, and therefore must be read in with each restart. This

should include the model geometry including CONNECTIVITY and the COORDINATES material

properties contact data and boundary conditions. Additional tables may be added, or they can have

additional data added. The RESTART option specifies restart parameters; for example, input/output files,

restart increment, and intervals at which restarts are to be written.

RESTART 458

Set Flags for Restart

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-7

1st

1-5

1st

Set to 1 to write out restart data on a file. Set to 2 to read restart data from

a file (that is, to restart a problem). Set to 3 to restart a problem and

continue writing restart data for subsequent restart.

6-10

2nd

write every three increments, set the second field to 3. This data is only

used if the first field is set to 1 or 3. Defaults to 1 if left blank.

11-15

3rd

Enter the increment at which the restarted problem run begins. Only used

if the first field of this data block is set to 2 or 3. The number here should

be the number given in the message:

RESTART DATA AT INCREMENT

i on TAPE j

which appears on the output of the previous run of the problem at the point

where the restart is desired.

Note:

of such points is determined by the data in columns 6 through

10 of this data block in the previous run of the problem.

A restarted run should, in principle, have the same parameters

as the original run. Only those parameters can be changed

which do not affect the storage allocation within Marc.

16-20

4th

Logical unit number for output of restart data; default logical unit number

is 8 if nothing is given here and the RESTART option is specified in the

parameters. Note that this file must be specified in the main program.

21-25

5th

Logical unit number for input of restart data from previous run; default is

9 if nothing is given here. Specify file in main program.

26-30

6th

31-35

7th

36-40

8th

41-45

9th

46-50

10th

increment specified in the eleventh field. The job does not do any analysis.

This is to, for example, allow you to recover increments suppressed by

PRINT CHOICE.

459 RESTART

Set Flags for Restart

Format

Data

Entry Entry

Fixed

Free

51-55

11th

with the tenth field above or the eighth field of the POST option.

56-60

12th

zero. This can be used to postprocess either eigenvectors or harmonics.

61-65

13th

Enter the last subincrement to be read. This is used in conjunction with the

tenth field above or the eighth field of the POST option.

Use Condensed Restart File

RESTART LAST

Description

This option sets up the flags for a condensed restart file where only the last converged increment or some

specific increment is saved. It can also be used to write a restart file on separate files at a

specified frequency.

The input data describing the problem is not saved, and therefore must be read in with each restart. This

should include the model geometry including CONNECTIVITY and the COORDINATES material

properties contact data and boundary conditions. Additional tables may be added, or they can have

additional data added. The RESTART option specifies restart parameters; for example, input/output files,

restart increment, and intervals at which restarts are to be written.

Notes: Upon writing, the last converged increment is written to the restart file. Upon reading, this

increment is subsequently read in and the analysis continues. The restart file is closed after it

has been read. The REAUTO option can be used to terminate any multi-increment history

definition block.

The restart file name to store data at the last increment or at the end of analysis is jid.t08

by default. This file is overwritten when it is used. The file name to store data at specific

increment or increment intervals or at the end of each loadcase is jid.i_n.t08, n being the

increment number.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-12

1st

1-5

1st

Enter -1 to write out the last increment at the end of each loadcase and at

the end of the analysis.

Set to 2 to read restart data from a file (that is, to restart a problem).

Set to 3 to restart a problem and write out the last increment of restart data

for subsequent restart.

Enter -3 to restart a problem and write out the last increment at the end of

each loadcase and at the end of the analysis.

6-10

2nd

Logical unit number for output of restart data; default unit number is 8 if

nothing is given here.

Use Condensed Restart File

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Logical unit number for input of restart data from previous run; default is

9 if nothing is given here.

Enter frequency to write restart to individual files. The files will be named

jid_i_nn.t08 (where nn is the current increment).

If the number here is less than zero, its positive number is the specific

increment to write out the restart file. This option works when the first

field is set to -1 or -3.

UDUMP 462

Specify Nodes and Element for Postprocessing

UDUMP

Description

This option allows you to specify which nodes and elements can be referenced for postprocessing

through user subroutines. Nodal quantities are accessed through subroutine IMPD, element quantities are

accessed through the ELEVAR user subroutine (see Marc Volume D: User Subroutines and Special

Routines). During harmonic subincrements, the ELEVEC user subroutine is used.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Create Summary Report

Description

This option produces a summary of the results of the increment and outputs them in a report format. This

option is in effect until a NO SUMMARY option is encountered. The summary consists of the maximum

and minimum of temperatures, stresses, strains, plastic strains, creep strains, displacements, velocities,

accelerations and reaction forces. The option also produces a detailed accounting of both the memory

usage and timing information.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter the unit number to be used for output, default is standard output,

unit 6.

16-20

3rd

Do Not Create Summary

Description

This option turns off the summary feature. The default is off unless the SUMMARY option has been

previously invoked.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Sort Element Results

Description

This option allows various element quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This

option is in effect until a NO ELEM SORT option is encountered. This option allows you to sort either in

ascending or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute

value. A range can be given over which to sort.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

below, defines each sort.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Enter the unit number to be used for output, default is standard output, unit

6.

16-20

4th

The 3rd data block is repeated once for each sort.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter 0 for sort in descending order. Enter 1 for sort in ascending order.

Default is 0; sort in descending order.

11-15

3rd

Enter 0 for sort by absolute value. Default is 0; sort by absolute value.

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

element in mesh.

Sort Element Results

Table 3-6

Code

Description

Code

Description

1 first stress

2 second stress

3 third stress

4 fourth stress

5 fifth stress

6 sixth stress

7 equivalent stress

8 mean stress

9 Tresca stress

13 first strain

14 second strain

15 third strain

16 fourth strain

17 fifth strain

18 sixth strain

19 equivalent strain

20 mean strain

21 Tresca strain

49 temperature

61 voltage

73 first gradient

74 second gradient

75 third gradient

Do Not Create Report Sorted by Element

Description

This option turns off the ELEM SORT feature. The default is off unless the ELEM SORT option has been

previously invoked.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Sort Nodal Results

Description

This option allows various nodal quantities to be sorted and the output given in report format. This option

is in effect until a NO NODE SORT is encountered. NODE SORT allows you to sort either in ascending

or descending order. In addition, you can use either the real numeric value or the absolute value. A range

can be given over which to sort.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

below defines each sort.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Enter the unit number to be used for output, default is standard output, unit

6.

16-20

4th

The 3rd data block is entered once for each sort.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter 0 for sort in descending order. Enter 1 for sort in ascending order.

Default is 0, sort in descending value.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 for sort by real numerical value. Enter 0 for sort by absolute value.

Default is 0, sort by absolute value.

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

mesh.

Sort Nodal Results

Table 3-7

Code

Meaning

Result

Results in the Ith component of the incremental displacement to

be sorted.

101 101

102 102

103 103

104 104

105 105

106 106

107 107

Cancel Report Sorted by Nodes

Description

This option negates the NODE SORT option. The default is off unless the NODE SORT option has been

previously invoked.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Define Objective Function to be Optimized

DESIGN OBJECTIVE

Description

This option defines the objective function for the optimization process. It is not needed for a pure

sensitivity analysis run. If it is specified for a pure sensitivity analysis run, the gradient of the objective

function is also computed. Currently, the only option is to minimize the objective function.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-16

1st

N/A

1st

MATERIAL VOLUME

MATERIAL MASS

MATERIAL COST

USER DEFINED

Note:

COST, the material unit cost should be defined with the

material data (for example, see ISOTROPIC)

For USER DEFINED, you need to modify the user subroutine

uobjfn.f. This routine is self-explanatory together with an

example.

Define Variable Design Parameters

DESIGN VARIABLES

Description

This option defines the design variables. If a sensitivity analysis is required, the derivative of the response

with respect to each design variable and the element contributions to the response are reported. If an

optimization analysis is performed, then the design variables are modified to optimize the objective

function. The option can be used more than once.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-15

1st

for each design variable.

2nd data block

N/A

1st

Enter design variable set ID (optional). In general, this is not the same as

design variable numbers assigned by Marc and defined in the output.

N/A

2nd

COMPOSITE.

N/A

3rd

CTHIC

AREA

cross-sectional area

IXX

IYY

BMHEI

beam height

RADIU

radius

WLLTH

wall thickness

YNGMD Youngs modulus (isotropy)

YNG11

YNG22

YNG33

Define Variable Design Parameters

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

POISR

PSR12

Poissons ratio 12

PSR23

Poissons ratio 23

PSR31

Poissons ratio 31

SHR12

SHR23

SHR31

MASSD

Mass density

N/A

4th

LYRTH

selected in the 3rd field of the 3rd data block under the

COMPOSITE model definition option.)

PLYAN

ply angle

N/A

1st

N/A

2nd

N/A

1st

LINKED or UNLINKED.

N/A

2nd

ELEMENTS, MATERIALS, or LAYERS, depending on the second field

in the 2nd data block.

N/A

Enter a list of elements if the second field of the 4th data block is

ELEMENTS.

Enter a list of material IDs if second field of the 4th data block is

MATERIALS.

Enter a list of layer numbers if second field of the 4th data block is

LAYERS.

Define Limits on Displacement Response

Define Limits on

Displacement Response

Description

This option is used to specify displacement constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization

process. The option can be used more than once.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-19

1st

Data blocks 2 through 7 are repeated for each displacement constraint group.

2nd data block

N/A

1st

Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE where needed;

for example, ABSOLUTE TRANSL1):

TRANSL1

TRANSL2

TRANSL3

ROTATN1

ROTATN2

ROTATN3

RESTRAN

resultant translation

RESROTA

resultant rotation

DIRTRAN

DIRROTA

DIRLTRA

DIRLROT

RLTRAN1

RLTRAN2

RLTRAN3

RLROTA1

RLROTA2

RLROTA3

Define Limits on Displacement Response

Format

Fixed

N/A

Free

2nd

Data

Entry Entry

A

Enter either:

< (for less than or equal to)

or

> (for greater than or equal to)

N/A

3rd

The 3rd data block is only used if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is DIRTRAN, DIRROTA,

DIRLTRA, DIRLROT; otherwise, it is skipped.

3rd data block

N/A

1st

N/A

2nd

N/A

3rd

Note:

N/A

1st

N/A

6th data block

N/A

1st

N/A

If first field of 2nd data block does not begin with RL, enter the list of

constrained nodes.

If first field of 2nd data block begins with RL, enter the first and second

node numbers which are constrained relative to one another.

Define Limits on Stress Response

Description

This option is used to specify stress constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization process. The

option can be used more than once.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-13

1st

for each stress constraint group.

2nd data block

N/A

1st

Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE where needed;

for example, ABSOLUTE STRESS1):

STRESS1

STRESS2

The stress components as defined for each

element separately in Marc Volume B: Element

Library (see below for generalized stresses).

STRESS3

STRESS4

STRESS5

STRESS6

VOMSTRS

OSHSTRS

MAPSTRS

PRSTRS1

PRSTRS2

PRSTRS3

TRESTRS

STRESSV

SHSTRSP

Define Limits on Stress Response

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

GENSTS1

GENSTS9

N/A

2nd

generalized stresses

1 through 9

obtained by integration through thickness of

layered elements as defined in Marc Volume B:

Element Library.

Enter either:

< (for less than or equal to)

or

> (for greater than or equal to)

N/A

3rd

The 3rd data block is only used if the 1st field of the 2nd data block is STRESSV or SHSTRSP;

otherwise, it is skipped.

3rd data block

N/A

1st

N/A

2nd

N/A

3rd

Note:

N/A

1str

N/A

N/A

1st

N/A

Define Limits on Strain Response

Description

This option is used to specify strain constraints for a design sensitivity/design optimization analysis. The

option can be used more than once.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-13

1st

2nd data block

N/A

1st

Enter one of the words (preceded by the word ABSOLUTE if needed; for

example, ABSOLUTE STRAIN1):

STRAIN1

STRAIN2

STRAIN3

STRAIN4

for each element separately in

Marc Volume B: Element Library.

STRAIN5

STRAIN6

VOMSTRN von Mises equivalent strain

MAPSTRN maximum absolute principal strain

N/A

2nd

PRSTRN1

PRSTRN2

PRSTRN3

TRESTRN

Enter:

< (for less than or equal to)

or

> (for greater than or equal to)

N/A

3rd

N/A

1st

Define Limits on Strain Response

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

N/A

N/A

1st

N/A

Define Limits on Eigenfrequency Response

Define Limits on

Eigenfrequency Response

Description

This option is used to specify free vibration frequency constraints for a design sensitivity or design

optimization case. The option can be used more than once.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-16

1st

2nd data block

N/A

N/A

1st

2nd

FRQCYCL

FRQRADS

FGPCYCL

be prescribed; in cycles per unit time

FGPRADS

be prescribed; in radians per unit time

Enter either:

< (for less than or equal to)

or

> (for greater than or equal to)

N/A

3rd

N/A

1st

N/A

1st

mode numbers.

If the constraint is on the difference between the frequencies of two modes,

enter the numbers of the two modes.

481

Mechanical Analysis

er 3: This section is the first of four sections describing the input format for mechanical analysis. This section

analysis controls and boundary conditions. The three subsequent sections concentrate on

Mode describes

material properties, rate effects, and dynamic analysis.

l

The CONTROL option is required in all nonlinear analysis. It governs the number of increments and the

Defini accuracy associated with the analysis. This section also discusses the procedures for J-integral calculation

in fracture mechanics.

tion

The boundary conditions available for performing mechanical analysis are:

Optio

Kinematic constraints of either zero or specified displacements.

ns

Surface, volumetric or nodal loads.

Thermal loads.

Foundation support.

Surface contact.

These boundary conditions can be specified using a variety of techniques. The boundary conditions

when given here in the model definition sections represent the total quantities to be applied in the

zeroth increment. Mechanical loads are scaled if the SCALE parameter is included so that the model is

at impending yield. Note that thermal loads are not scaled. In addition, as the zeroth increment is

treated as linear elastic, the applied boundary conditions should not produce either material or

geometry nonlinearities.

Control Option for Stress Analysis

Description

This option allows you to input parameters governing the convergence and the accuracy for nonlinear

analysis. For heat transfer analysis, see the CONTROL (Heat Transfer) history definition option in

Chapter 4, History Definition Options.

For coupled thermal-stress analysis, data block 6 must be used.

For coupled electrostatic-stress analysis, data block 7 must be used.

For nonlinear static analysis, the controls are described in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information.

They do not appear on the restart file, and so must be re-entered on a restart run.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-7

1st

11-20

2nd

1-5

1st

This is a cumulative number and is usually used to stop the run when

restart is being used. If an ELASTIC parameter is included, this field is

ignored and all load cases are analyzed.

6-10

2nd

plasticity, or other tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 3. This

should usually be increased to 10 for rigid-plastic flow option.

If a negative number is entered, Marc does a maximum of the absolute

value entered. If convergence has not been obtained, a warning is

given and Marc proceeds to the next increment. This is not recommended.

11-15

3rd

tangent modulus nonlinearities. Default is 0.

Note:

This data field forces this number of recycles to take place at all

subsequent increments.

INCREMENT option.

16-20

4th

0 or left blank Convergence is achieved when residuals satisfy

the criterion.

Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1 Convergence is achieved when displacements satisfy

the criterion.

2 Convergence is achieved when strain energy satisfies

the criteria.

4 Convergence is achieved when either residual or

displacement satisfies the criterion.

5 Convergence is achieved when both residual and

displacement satisfies the criterion.

Notes:

requires at least one iteration. If nonlinear analysis is done

with the CENTROID parameter, the residuals are not

calculated and testing is always done on displacements.

Nonlinear analysis with the CENTROID parameter is not

recommended.

If the fields are set as 0, 1, or 2, only the 3rd data block is

needed.

If the fields are set as 4 or 5, the 3a data block is also

needed. In this case, the 3rd data block is set for residual

testing and 3a data block is set for displacements

check only.

21-25

5th

is on component values or magnitude of vector.

Enter imag+irel where:

Irel = 0

Irel = 1

Irel = 2

incremental displacements are below minimum value, in

which case absolute tolerances testing is used.

Imag = 0

Component value

Imag = 10

Component values

Imag = 20

moment testing.

26-30

6th

1 Full Newton-Raphson (default).

2 Modified Newton-Raphson (no reassembly

during iteration).

Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

3 Newton-Raphson with strain correction modification (see

Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information).

8 Secant method.

31-35

7th

If set to 1, solution of nonpositive definite system is forced.

Note:

nonpositive definite and this entry has no significance.

36-40

8th

41-45

9th

46-50

10th

0 Normal-full contribution.

1 For Mooney material, reduce contribution of hydrostatic

pressure on initial stress stiffness according to:

initial = f r p I

stiffness matrix, is the current stress tensor, f r is entered

through the PARAMETERS option, p is the hydrostatic

pressure and I I is a unit tensor.

2 No initial stress stiffness.

3 Use stress at beginning of increment, not last iteration.

4 Results in the inclusion of only the positive stresses in the

initial stress stiffness during the equilibrium iteration.

Besides faster convergence, this leads to a stable analysis

of very thin shell structures.

51-55

11th

Control parameter:

0 Do not allow switching of convergence testing between

residuals and displacements.

1 Allow switching of convergence testing between residual

and displacements if reaction forces or displacements

become extremely small. For more details, see Marc

Volume A: Theory and User Information.

Note:

being used.

Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format

Data

Entry Entry

Fixed

Free

56-60

12th

Note that this switches off the modified Newton-Raphson procedure if

chosen in the sixth field of this data block.

61-65

13th

there is an inner iteration loop to insure accuracy. The maximum number

of iterations allowed can be set here.

Default is 50.

Include if residual testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 0, 4, or 5.

1-10

1st

Maximum allowable value of maximum residual force divided by

maximum reaction force.

Default is 0.10.

11-20

2nd

Maximum allowable value of maximum residual moment divided by

maximum reaction moment. Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on

residual moment occurs.

21-30

3rd

Minimum reaction force, if reaction force is less than this value, checking

is bypassed or absolute testing is performed.

31-40

4th

Minimum moment: if moment is less than this value, checking is

bypassed or absolute testing is performed.

41-50

5th

Maximum value of residual force.

Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual force takes place.

51-60

6th

Maximum value of residual moment.

Default is 0.0 in which case, no checking on residual moments

takes place.

If absolute displacement testing, maximum value of rotation increment.

Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking or rotations take place.

61-70

7th

Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Maximum allowable value of the change in rotation increment at the

retained nodes of RBE2, rigid link (tying type 80) or beam-shell offset

nodes. Default is 0.001 radians.

Notes:

If the 4th field of the 2nd data block is 4 or 5, the rigid link rotation tolerance entered in

the 4th data block circumvents the corresponding value in the 3rd data block.

The rigid link rotation tolerance if left at 0, is reset to 0.001 radians by the Marc solver to

ensure backward compatibility for RBE2.Theare two ways to by-pass the link

rotation check: the rigid link rotation tolerance can be set to a negative number, or the

rigid link rotation tolerance can be left as 0.0 with an additional FEATURE,5701 added to

the parameter section of the input.

Include if displacement testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 1, 4, or 5.

1-10

divided by the displacement increment.

Default is 0.10.

11-20

2nd

by the rotational increment.

Default is 0.0, in which case, no checking on change in rotational

increment occurs.

21-30

3rd

checking is bypassed or absolute testing is performed.

31-40

4th

is bypassed.

41-50

5th

Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on displacements takes place.

51-60

6th

Default is 0.0; in which case, no checking on rotations takes place.

61-70

7th

Maximum allowable value of the change in rotation increment at the

retained nodes of RBE2, rigid link (tying type 80) or beam-shell offset

nodes. Default is 0.001 radians.

Notes:

If the 4th field of the 2nd data block is 4 or 5, the rigid link rotation tolerance entered in

the 4th data block circumvents the corresponding value in the 3rd data block.

The rigid link rotation tolerance if left at 0, is reset to 0.001 radians by the Marc solver to

ensure backward compatibility for RBE2.Theare two ways to by-pass the link

rotation check: the rigid link rotation tolerance can be set to a negative number, or the

rigid link rotation tolerance can be left as 0.0 with an additional FEATURE,5701 added to

the parameter section of the input.

Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Include if energy testing is required and the fourth field of the 2nd data block is 2.

1-10

1st

Default is 0.1.

Only necessary for coupled thermal-mechanical analysis and the first data block does not have the word

STRUCTURAL.

1-10

1st

time step scheme for heat transfer.

Default value of 20.

11-20

2nd

Maximum nodal temperature change allowed before properties are reevaluated and matrices reassembled.

Default value of 100.

21-30

3rd

This control provides a recycling capability to improve accuracy in highly

nonlinear heat-transfer problems (for example, latent heat, radiation

boundary conditions).

Default is 0, which bypasses this test. Set to maximum temperature error

which is considered acceptable.

Note:

the TRANSIENT NON AUTO fixed stepping procedure. All three

fields are checked for the transient adaptive stepping procedure.

None of the three fields are checked for the auto step adaptive

stepping procedure.

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

control automatic time step scheme.

51-60

6th

control automatic time step scheme.

61-70

7th

control automatic time step scheme.

71-80

8th

This is used to control the time step for the TRANSIENT option.

Control Option for Stress Analysis

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Only necessary for coupled electrostatic structural analysis and the first data block does not have the

word STRUCTURAL.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis

Description

There are many parameters that are used in the finite element calculations. These parameters can be

customized for your particular application. Some of these constants can be entered in other input blocks

as well. The last nonzero value is used for the calculation.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

Enter the scale factor which, when multiplied with the incremental strain,

is used to predict the incremental strain in the next increment.

1-10

1st

Default is 1.0.

11-20

2nd

boundary conditions. The penalty factor is this multiplier times the

maximum diagonal value of the operator matrix. Default multiplier is

1 x 109. If the APPBC parameter is used, this option is not used.

21-30

3rd

analysis for plane strain, axisymmetric, or solid analysis when

displacement elements are used.

Default is 100.

31-40

4th

when displacement elements are used.

Default is 1 x 106.

41-50

5th

procedure.

Default is 0.25.

51-60

6th

Default is 0.50.

61-70

7th

Houbolt procedure.

Default is 1.5.

Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis

Format

Fixed

71-80

Free

8th

Data

Entry Entry

E

Houbolt procedure.

Default is -0.5.

1-10

1st

becomes stuck in a concave corner for two-dimensional contact.

Default is 8.625.

11-20

2nd

becomes stuck in a concave corner for three-dimensional contact.

Default is 20.0.

21-30

3rd

Default is 1 x 10-4.

31-40

4th

Default is 1 x 10-12.

41-50

5th

Enter the fraction of the hydrostatic pressure that is subtracted from the

stress tensor in the initial stress calculation. See the tenth field of the

CONTROL option.

Default is 1.0

51-60

6th

Enter the factor used to calculate the drilling mode for shell elements type

22, 75, 138, 139, and 140.

Default is 0.0001.

61-70

7th

Enter the scale factor to the initial incremental displacements estimate for

the increment after a rezoning increment. The default value is 1.0, which

usually improves friction convergence, but may result in an inside-out

element.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

Default is 273.15; that is, user input in Centigrade.

If user temperature is in Kelvin (K) or Rankine (R), enter a negative value.

The offset temperature is then set to zero.

21-30

3rd

Default is 0.5

Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis

Format

Fixed

31-40

Free

4th

Data

Entry Entry

E

Default is 0.0.

41-50

5th

Default is 5.67051 x 10-8 W/m2K4.

51-60

6th

Default is 14387.69 MK.

61-70

7th

Default is 2.9979 x 1014 M/s

71-80

8th

iteration.

Default is 1 x 1030.

1-10

1st

Initial friction stiffness (only for friction models 6 and 7). This stiffness

will be used during the first cycle of an increment to define the friction

stiffness matrix in cases where a touching node has a zero normal force

and the amount of sliding does not exceed the elastic sticking limit.

If set to zero, Marc will estimate the initial friction stiffness based on

the initial average stiffness of the contact body to which the touching

node belongs.

11-20

2nd

is used. If a zero is given, that this value is set internally by Marc and

depends on the solver being used.

21-30

3rd

simulations. This is useful to stabilize the solution. The default is 100.

31-40

4th

Note that the value of alphaf defined here may be overruled by defining

the spectral radius on the 6th field.

41-50

5th

Note that the value of alpham defined here may be overruled by defining

the spectral radius on the 6th field.

Definition of Parameters used in Numerical Analysis

Format

Fixed

51-60

Free

6th

Data

Entry Entry

E

Define the spectral radius S for the generalized alpha dynamic operator.

The following conventions apply:

0 S 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and alphaf and alpham

alphaf = - S /(1+ S ) and alpham = (1-2 S )/(1+ S )

S = 1 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and neither alphaf nor

alpham will be changed

S = 2 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and the values of alphaf

and alpham will be optimized for a dynamic contact analysis

S = 3 : the 4th and 5th field are ignored and the values of alphaf

and alpham will be optimized for an analysis without dynamic

contact

S = 4 : use the values of alphaf and alpham as entered on the 4th

61-70

7th

this value, the RBE3 is probably singular and a warning message is

printed. If the value is negative, the analysis is stopped. Default is 1 x 106.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

Permeability of vacuum.

Default is 0 = 1.25664 10 6 Hm 1

31-40

4th

Permittivity of vacuum.

Default is 0 = 8.85419 10 12 Fm 1

41-50

5th

normal vectors of two segments is smaller than this limit angle, then these

segments will not come into contact. Default value is 120 degrees.

493 MATUDS

Provide Additional Data for Material User Subroutines

MATUDS

Description

This option is used to define a material user subroutine to be associated with a material ID and to pass

additional data into the user subroutine. This will activate the call to the md_ version of the user

subroutine. See Volume D for more details.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Type Entry

1-10

1st

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter the material ID, if zero, the user specified subroutine will be used

for all materials for which it is applicable.

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

26-30

5th

31-35

6th

36-40

7th

Set to 0 to not print auxiliary data (default)

Set to 1 to print out auxiliary data

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 16 integers per line

1-5

1st

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 reals per line

1-10

1st

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 character strings per line

1-10

1st

CONUDS 494

Provide Additional Data for Contact User Subroutines

CONUDS

Description

This option is used to define a contact user subroutine to be associated with a contact body and to pass

additional data into the user subroutine. This will activate the call to the md_ version of the user

subroutine. See Volume D for more details.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Type Entry

1-10

1st

1-10

1st

11-15

2nd

Enter the contact body ID, if zero, the user specified subroutine will be

used for all contact bodies for which it is applicable.

16-20

3rd

21-25

4th

26-30

5th

31-35

6th

36-40

7th

Set to 0 to not print auxiliary data (default)

Set to 1 to print out auxiliary data

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 16 integers per line

1-5

1st

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 reals per line

1-10

1st

Repeat as necessary, maximum of 8 character strings per line

1-10

1st

Define Fixed Displacement

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the

TABLE parameter to activate this input option.

Description

This data block defines potential fixed displacements, including the magnitude, degrees of freedom and

applied locations, and associates it with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition is activated

or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. The boundary conditions are

specified either by giving the kinematic displacement, a list of degrees of freedom, and either a list of

nodal numbers or a list of surfaces. The prescribed displacements are with respect to the degrees of

freedom associated with the element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system

using either the TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or

UTRANFORM options.

The FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter

nonuniform time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.

Note:

In static analysis, the boundary conditions specified must always be sufficient to remove

all rigid body modes.

It is advised that boundary conditions not be placed on nodes which might come into

contact. Using a symmetry rigid body is preferred.

Fourier loading using the table driven input format is not supported in this release. Use the

non-table driven input instead.

Further detail is given in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. See Marc Volume B: Element

Library, for a definition of the degrees of freedom for each element type.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Define Fixed Displacement

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-5

1st

default is 1. See 9th and 10th data blocks.

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines are required for this

boundary condition.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 if complex value given as real and imaginary numbers.

Enter 2 if complex value given as magnitude and phase.

16-20

4th

enter 0 if no Fourier series.

21-25

5th

Enter a 1 if incremental displacements relative to the position at the

beginning of this loadcase are to be given.

26-30

6th

Not used.

31-63

7th

Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This label

will be referenced by the LOADCASE model definition option.

If a complex harmonic displacement is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component or

the magnitude, and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.

4th data block - Magnitudes

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

block 8.

21-30

3rd

A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

The 6th and 7th data blocks are only required if a complex harmonic boundary condition.

Define Fixed Displacement

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

degree of freedom listed in data block 8.

11-20

2nd

second degree of freedom listed in data block 8.

21-30

3rd

degree of freedom listed in data block 8.

7th data block - Table IDs for Imaginary Component or Phase Angle

1-5

1st

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the first degree

of freedom listed.

6-10

2nd

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the second

degree of freedom listed.

11-15

3rd

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for the third degree

of freedom listed.

Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed

displacements are prescribed.

Note:

The 9th and 10th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd

data block, 1st field.

9th data block

1-5

1st

1: Element IDs

2: Nodes IDs

3: Volume/Region/Body IDs

4: Surface IDs

5: Curve IDs

6: Point IDs

11: Element-Edges IDs

12: Element-Faces IDs

13: Element-Edges IDs - Mentat convention

14: Element-Faces IDs - Mentat convention

Define Fixed Displacement

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above boundary conditions

are applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the

9th data block.

Define Fixed Displacement

The information provided here is based upon not using the table driven

input style.

Description

This data defines the fixed displacement that each specified degree of freedom must take during the first

and subsequent increments, unless it is further modified using the DISP CHANGE option. The boundary

conditions are specified either by giving the kinematic displacement and a list of degrees of freedom and

a list of nodal numbers or by the input of boundary conditions generated during mesh generation

(MESH2D). The prescribed displacements are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with the

element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the

TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.

Note:

In static analysis, the boundary conditions specified must always be sufficient to remove

all rigid body modes.

Fourier loading using the table driven input format is not supported in this release. Use the

non-table driven input instead.

Further detail is given in Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information. See Marc Volume B: Element

Library, for a definition of the degrees of freedom for each element type.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

This field is set to nonzero to flag input of boundary conditions set during

mesh generation (MESH2D). If this field is activated, no further data is

required in this option.

11-15

3rd

Note:

coordinate data on this file, so that the model definition data

must be arranged accordingly.

For each set of boundary conditions use the 3rd, 4th, and 5th data blocks.

Define Fixed Displacement

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

3a data block

Use only if not Fourier Analysis.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

block 4.

21-30

3rd

A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified. The third

data block is read as 8E10.3.

3b data block

Use for Fourier analysis only.

1-5

1st

6-15

2nd

16-25

3rd

4.

26-35

4th

36-45

5th

4.

46-55

6th

Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed

displacements are prescribed.

Note:

Enter a list of nodes to which the above boundary conditions are applied.

Define Distributed Loads

DIST LOADS (with TABLE Input - Model Definition) Define Distributed Loads

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the

TABLE parameter to activate this input option.

Description

This data block defines potential distributed loads applied to the model, including the magnitude, type of

load and location, and associates this with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition will be

activated or deactivated using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. The FORCEM user

subroutine can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed loads, or the TABLE model definition

option may be used.

The distributed loads entered here are total loads. If no time-dependent tables are referenced and the

ramping options in the LOADCASE model or history definition option are not used, the distributed load

will be instantaneously applied in the loadcase.

When used with global adaptive meshing, if the load is applied to a curve or a surface where element

edges or faces are attached, the load is correctly applied after remeshing.

For more information on pressure cavity loading, see Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information,

Chapter 9, Pressure Cavity Loading.

Note:

If distributed load is applied on the bottom of a shell, the sign of the load is reversed, that

is, a positive load is now in the direction of the normal to the surface.

Fourier loading using the table driven input format is not supported in this release. Use the

non-table driven input instead.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of distributed load data, defaults to input.

The 3rd through 9th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.

3rd data block

1-5

1st

default is 1. See 9th and 10th data blocks.

Define Distributed Loads

Format

Fixed

6-10

Free

2nd

Data

Entry Entry

I

Enter 1 if the FORCEM user subroutine required for this

boundary condition.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 if complex value given as real and imaginary numbers.

Enter 2 if complex value given as magnitude and phase.

16-20

4th

Enter the Fourier series number associated with the load, enter 0 if no

Fourier series.

21-25

5th

ibody_cavity = icavity * 10000 + icavity_type * 1000 + ibody

where

ibody_cavit is the cavity-modified value for the distributed load type.

y

icavity is the cavity ID.

icavity_type is the cavity load type:

0: cavity is closed.

1: cavity is loaded with an applied pressure.

2: cavity is loaded with an applied mass.

9: cavity load is defined by the UCAV user subroutine.

ibody is the original value for the distributed load type (see library

element description in Marc Volume B: Element Library.)

26-30

6th

Enter 1 to exclude applied load when the edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is fully

in contact.

31-63

7th

Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This label

will be referenced by the LOADCASE model definition option.

If a complex harmonic distributed load is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component

or the magnitude, and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.

Define Distributed Loads

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in first

coordinate direction.

11-20

2nd

coordinate direction.

21-30

3rd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the load in third coordinate direction.

1-5

1st

Enter the table ID associated with the load. For load type 21 or 102 to 113,

enter the table ID associated with the load in the first direction.

6-10

2nd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID associated with the load

in the second direction.

11-15

3rd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID associated with the load

in the third direction.

The 6th and 7th data blocks are only required if a complex harmonic boundary condition.

6th data block - Imaginary Component or Phase Angle

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the imaginary component of load in

second coordinate direction.

21-30

3rd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the imaginary component of load in

third coordinate direction.

7th data block - Table IDs for Imaginary Component or Phase Angle

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID for imaginary component

or phase in second direction.

11-15

3rd

For load type 21 or 102 to 113, enter the table ID for imaginary component

or phase in third direction.

If geometry type is element IDs (1) use either the first field or the second and third field.

If geometry type is volume (3), surface (4), or curve (5) use the second field only.

1-5

1st

Enter the distributed load type based upon element library description in

Marc Volume B: Element Library.

6-10

2nd

1: Normal pressure

Define Distributed Loads

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

2: Shear stress in 1st tangent direction

3: Shear stress in 2nd tangent direction

4: Volumetric in x-direction

5: Volumetric in y-direction

6: Volumetric in z-direction

7: force/length in beams x-direction

8: force/length in beams y-direction

9: force/length in beams z-direction

11: Wave loading

13: Force/length on edge of shell on midplane; perpendicular to

edge

14: Force/length on edge of shell on midplane; tangent to the

edge; positive is from node 1 to node 1+1

15: Force/length on edge of shell; perpendicular to shell, for

example, -v3 direction

21: General traction

100 + jaxis: Centrifugal based upon entering 2, in radians/time

101: Inelastic heat generation

102: Gravity

103 + jaxis: Coriolis based upon entering 2, in radians/time

104 + jaxis: Centrifugal based upon entering (cycles/time)

105 + jaxis: Coriolis based upon entering (cycles/time)

106: Uniform body load (force per unit volume)

107: Nonuniform body load (force per unit volume)

110: Uniform beam load (force per unit length)

111: Nonuniform beam load (force per unit length)

112: Uniform load per unit area

113: Nonuniform load per unit area

Note:

11-15

3rd

For problems with more than one rotation axes, jaxis equals the

rotation ID times a thousand.

Define Distributed Loads

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

The 9th and 10th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd

data block, 1st field.

1-5

1st

1: Element IDs

3: Volume/Region/Body IDs

4: Surface IDs

5: Curve IDs

9: Polycurve IDs

10: Polysurface IDs

11: Element-Edges IDs

12: Element-Faces IDs

13: Element-Edges IDs - Mentat convention

14: Element-Faces IDs - Mentat convention

15: Cavity ID

16: Surface ID: orientation ID

17: Curve ID: orientation ID

18: Surface ID: orientation ID - Mentat convention

19: Curve ID: orientation ID - Mentat convention

1-80

are applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the

9th data block.

Define Distributed Loads

The information provided here is based upon not using the table driven

input style.

Description

This block of data allows pressure (surface and volumetric) loads to be specified. These values are

incremental values per increment if a fixed time-step procedure is used or the total change over the

loadcase if an adaptive time-step procedure is used or the total value of the load if the ELASTIC parameter

is used. User subroutine FORCEM can be used for nonuniform, time-dependent distributed loads.

Note:

If FOLLOW FOR is included in the input file with DIST LOADS, the input about type of

load, magnitude etc. (data blocks 3 and 4) needs to be consistent in the model and history

definition options.

If FEATURE,10101 is used, then the pressure on an edge (2-D) or face (3-D) is applied, unless all nodes

of that edge or face are in contact with another body. If separation occurs, the distributed load is reapplied

to the surface. This feature internally turns on FOLLOW FOR.

For most distributed load types, one enters a load per unit length (on beams or shell edges) or a load per

unit area. There are a few exceptions listed below:

Load Type

100

Centrifugal

Enter 2 ( in radians/time)

102

Gravity

103

Enter 2 ( in radians/time)

104

Centrifugal

Enter ( in cycles/time)

105

Enter ( in cycles/time)

106

107

110

111

112

113

General traction

-10 to -21

Define Distributed Loads

Table 3-8

IBODY

User Subroutine

-10

No

-11

Yes

-12

No

-13

Yes

-14

No

-15

Yes

-16

No

-17

Yes

-18

No

-19

Yes

-20

No

-21

Yes

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of distributed load data, defaults to input.

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.

3a data block

Use if conventional Marc input, not Fourier, not applied to a cavity, and not Nastran PLOAD4 style.

1-5

1st

Marc Volume B: Element Library.

For problems with more than one rotation axes, add the rotation axis ID

times a thousand.

6-15

2nd

For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in first

coordinate direction.

Define Distributed Loads

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

16-25

3rd

For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in

second coordinate direction

26-35

4th

For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in third

coordinate direction

36-40

5th

the FORCEM user subroutine.)

3b data block

Use if distributed load is applied to cavity and not Fourier. The CAVITY parameter and CAVITY model

definition option is also required.

1-5

1st

ibody_cavity = icavity * 10000 + icavity_type * 1000 + ibody

where

ibody_cavity is the cavity-modified value for the distributed load type.

icavity is the cavity ID.

icavity_type is the cavity load type:

0: cavity is closed.

1: cavity is loaded with an applied pressure.

2: cavity is loaded with an applied mass.

9: cavity load is defined by the UCAV user subroutine.

ibody is the original value for the distributed load type (see

library element description in Marc Volume B:

Element Library.)

6-15

2nd

If icavity_type = 2, enter incremental mass.

16-25

3rd

26-35

4th

36-40

5th

the FORCEM user subroutine.)

41-45

6th

Define Distributed Loads

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

3c data block

Use if Fourier Analysis.

1-5

1st

Marc Volume B: Element Library.

For problems with more than one rotation axes, add the rotation axis ID

times a thousand.

6-15

2nd

16-25

3rd

For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in first

coordinate direction.

26-35

4th

For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in

second coordinate direction.

36-40

5th

For load types -10 to -21 or 102 to 113, enter the magnitude of load in third

coordinate direction.

3d data block

Use if Nastran PLOAD4 style input.

1-5

1st

Parameter identifying the type of load plus 200. See library element

description in Marc Volume B: Element Library.

6-15

2nd

16-25

3rd

26-35

4th

36-45

5th

Enter P4, the magnitude of load at node 4 of face or edge. Not required if

a triangular face.

46-55

6th

56-65

7th

Define Distributed Loads

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

66-75

8th

76-80

9th

be used in the FORCEM user subroutine.) If the direction of the load is

given with respect to a COORD SYSTEM option, then enter the negative

of the coordinate system ID.

Notes:

If the direction of the load is not defined, then the conventional Marc direction is used.

If the direction of the load is defined, then it is fixed and not updated even if the FOLLOW

FOR parameter is activated.

Enter a list of elements associated with the above distributed loads.

Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations

FACE IDS

Films, and Foundations

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the

TABLE parameter to activate this input option.

y

FACE ID

NODES

12

FACE ID

NODES

123

2

1

3

2

1

4

FACE ID

NODES

12

23

34

41

Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations

7

FACE ID

NODES

152

263

374

481

3

FACE ID

NODES

12

23

31

FACE ID

NODES

142

253

361

3

z

1

y

x

FACE ID

NODES

123

(top)

132

(bottom)

Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations

4

FACE ID

NODES

1234

(top)

1432

(bottom)

3

FACE ID

NODES

123456

(top)

132654

(bottom)

4

FACE ID

NODES

12345678

(top)

14328765

(bottom)

4

3

1

2

FACE ID

NODES

124

234

314

123

Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations

6

4

FACE ID

NODES

1254

2365

3 1 4 6

132

456

1

2

3

15

6

NODES

1

2

3

4

5

1 2 5 4 7 14 10 13

2 3 6 5 8 15 11 14

3 1 4 6 9 13 12 15

321879

4 5 6 10 11 12

11

12

14

13

4

FACE ID

10

8

5

6

4

FACE ID

NODES

1265

2376

3487

4158

1234

6587

Face ID for Distributed Loads, Fluxes, Charge, Current, Source, Films, and Foundations

4

10

FACE ID

NODES

1 2 4 5 09 08

2 3 4 6 10 09

3 1 4 7 08 10

1 2 3 5 06 07

9

7

6

1

5

2

8

16

15

7

5

20

13

14

19

17

4

12

11

18

3

9

10

2

FACE ID

NODES

1 2 6 5 09 18 13 17

2 3 7 6 10 19 14 18

3 4 8 7 11 20 15 19

4 1 5 8 12 17 16 20

1 2 3 4 09 10 11 12

6 5 8 7 13 16 15 14

Define Nodal Point Loads

POINT LOAD (with TABLE Input - Model Definition)Define Nodal Point Loads

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the

TABLE parameter to activate this input option.

Description

This data block defines potential point loads, including the magnitude and location of application and

associates this with a boundary condition name. This boundary condition will be activated or deactivated

using the LOADCASE model or history definition option. Point loads can be specified as fixed direction

loads or follower loads. The prescribed forces are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with

the element, unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the

TRANSFORMATION, COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.

The point loads entered here are total loads. If no time-dependent tables are referenced and the ramping

options in the LOADCASE model or history definition option are not used, the point load will be

instantaneously applied in the loadcase.

The FORCDT or FORCDF user subroutines or the TABLE model definition option can be used to enter

nonuniform time or frequency dependent boundary conditions.

Notes:

Fourier loading using the table driven input format is not supported in this release. Use the

non-table driven input instead.

The fourth field of the FOLLOW FOR parameter should be set to 1 when follower force

point loads are used in the model. The follower load is only supported through the mesh

based automated option wherein the nodal loads are specified in vector form and the initial

load orientation with respect to the mesh is maintained as the structure deforms. The

follower force option is not available for fourier loads or harmonic loads. Also, the

follower force capability is not supported for point loads specified through the FORCDT

user subroutine.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of point load data, defaults to input.

Define Nodal Point Loads

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

The 3rd through 8th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.

3rd data block

1-5

1st

default is 1. See 8th and 9th data blocks.

6-10

2nd

Enter 1 if the FORCDT or FORCDT user subroutine is required for this

boundary condition.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 if complex value given as real and imaginary numbers.

Enter 2 if complex value given as magnitude and phase.

16-20

4th

Enter the Fourier series number associated with the nodal load; enter 0 if

no Fourier series.

21-25

5th

Enter -1 for automated follower force

26-30

6th

31-63

7th

Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This label

will be referenced by the LOADCASE option.

If a complex harmonic point load is to be defined, data blocks 4 and 5 define the real component or the

magnitude; and data blocks 6 and 7 define the imaginary component or the phase.

4th data block

Real magnitude.

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Define Nodal Point Loads

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

The 6th and 7th data blocks are only required if a complex harmonic boundary condition.

6th data block - Imaginary Component or Phase Angle

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

7th data block - Table IDs for Imaginary Component or Phase Angle

1-5

1st

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for first degree

of freedom.

6-10

2nd

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for second degree

of freedom.

11-15

3rd

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for third degree

of freedom.

16-20

4th

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for fourth degree

of freedom.

21-25

5th

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for fifth degree

of freedom.

26-30

6th

Enter the table ID for imaginary component or phase for sixth degree

of freedom.

The 8th and 9th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd data

block, 1st field.

8th data block

1-5

1st

1: Element IDs

2: Nodes IDs

3: Volume/Region/Body IDs

4: Surface IDs

5: Curve IDs

6: Point IDs

Define Nodal Point Loads

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

11: Element-Edges IDs

12: Element-Faces IDs

13: Element-Edges IDs - Mentat convention

14: Element-Faces IDs - Mentat convention

Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above boundary conditions

are applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the

8th data block.

Define Nodal Point Loads

The information provided here is based upon not using the table driven

input style.

Description

This block of data allows nodal point loads to be specified. The nodal loads can be specified as fixed

direction loads or follower loads. For the fixed direction loads, the nodal forces are always specified in

vector form. For the follower loads, two options are possible: Option 1 is the MD Nastran style Follower

Force wherein the magnitudes of the nodal force and moment are specified and the direction is

independently specified using 2 or 4 nodes. Option 2 is the Mesh Based Automated Follower Force

wherein the nodal loads are specified in vector form and the initial load orientation with respect to the

mesh is maintained as the structure deforms. For more details, refer to Marc Volume A: Theory and

User Information.

These values are incremental values unless the ELASTIC parameter is used or the 3rd field of the

FOLLOW FOR parameter is set to 1, in which case they are total loads. When specified in the form of a

load vector, the prescribed forces are with respect to the degrees of freedom associated with the element,

unless they have been transformed to a local coordinate system using either the TRANSFORMATION,

COORD SYSTEM, SHELL TRANSFORMATION, or UTRANFORM options.

Notes:

Enter an upper bound to the number of nodes with point loads on the DIST

LOADS parameter.

The fourth field of the FOLLOW FOR parameter should be set to 1 when follower force

loads are used in the model. When this global parameter for follower force point loads is

turned on, the 5th data block is mandatory. The follower force option is not valid for fourier

loads or harmonic loads. Also, the follower force capability is not supported for point

loads specified through user subroutine FORCDT.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter unit number for input of point load data, defaults to input.

11-15

3rd

Enter 1 to signal existence of more than one point load on the same node.

The loads are summed in this case.

Define Nodal Point Loads

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

The 3rd and 4th data blocks are entered as pairs, one for each data set.

3a data block

Use if not Fourier Analysis.

1-10

1st

Nodal force magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.

11-20

2nd

Nodal moment magnitude for MD Nastran style follower force.

21-30

3rd

31-40

4th

41-50

5th

51-60

6th

61-70

7th

71-80

8th

Continuation data is necessary, must be in 6E10.3 format. Continuation data is needed if more than

eight degrees of freedom per node in analysis.

Notes:

The nodal load vector is valid for fixed direction force or for automated follower force.

Only the first two fields are used for the MD Nastran style follower force.

3b data block

Use only if Fourier Analysis.

1-5

1st

6-15

2nd

16-25

3rd

26-35

4th

36-45

5th

46-55

6th

Enter a list of nodes having the point load given above.

Define Nodal Point Loads

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

Used only when 4th field of FOLLOW FOR parameter is 1.

For the Nastran style follower force, enter as many lines as there are nodes in the 4th data block.

1-5

1st

-1 = Automated follower force

First node for Nastran style follower force

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

Neglect Incremental Displacement

The information provided here is based upon table driven input. See the

TABLE parameter to activate this input option.

Description

This model definition option indicates that the incremental displacement of the indicated nodes is to be

neglected. This allows you to apply a load or displacement on the structure to generate a stress in the body

without the displacements changing. In this way, an initial stress field may be generated. This option

cannot be used with the multiplicative (FeFp) plasticity formulation (PLASTICITY, 5).

At the end of the increment, this option is automatically deactivated.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

3rd data block

1-5

1st

default is 1. See 9th and 10th data blocks.

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

16-20

4th

21-25

5th

26-30

6th

31-63

7th

Enter the unique label associated with this boundary condition. This label

will be referenced by the LOADCASE model definition option.

Neglect Incremental Displacement

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

11-20

2nd

block 8.

21-30

3rd

A maximum of eight kinematic constraints can be specified.

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

11-15

3rd

Enter a list of degrees of freedom to which the above prescribed

displacements are prescribed.

Note:

The 7th and 8th data blocks are repeated in pairs for as many geometry types as specified in the 3rd

data block, 1st field.

7th data block

1-5

1st

1: Element IDs

2: Nodes IDs

3: Volume/Region/Body IDs

4: Surface IDs

5: Curve IDs

6: Point IDs

11: Element-Edges IDs

12: Element-Faces IDs

13: Element-Edges IDs - Mentat convention

14: Element-Faces IDs - Mentat convention

Enter a list of geometric entities to which the above boundary conditions

are applied. The geometric entities must all be of the type prescribed in the

7th data block.

Neglect Incremental Displacement

HOLD NODES

Description

This model definition option indicates that the incremental displacement of the indicated nodes is to be

neglected. This allows you to apply a load or displacement on the structure to generate a stress in the body

without the displacements changing. In this way, an initial stress field may be generated. This option

cannot be used with the multiplicative (FeFp) plasticity formulation (PLASTICITY, 5).

At the end of the increment, this option is automatically deactivated.

Format

Format

Fixed

Free

Data

Entry Entry

1-10

1st

1-5

1st

6-10

2nd

Enter a list of nodes for which the displacements will not be updated in

this increment.

1-80

1st

1-80

1st

Define Inertia Relief

Description

This option defines the parameters necessary for conducting an inertia relief analysis. The parameters are

used to evaluate the Rigid Body Modes of the system. Once the modes are evaluated, the program

evaluates the inertia relief load vector which balances the external load vector acting on the system. For

more details of these procedures, you are referred to Inertia Relief in Chapter 5 in the Marc Volume A:

Theory and User Information manual.

When inertia relief is no longer active in a current loadcase, an option can be provided to remove or retain

inertia relief loads fro